Omega | RD-MV1000/RD-MV2000 Series | Owner Manual | Omega RD-MV1000/RD-MV2000 Series Owner Manual

Omega RD-MV1000/RD-MV2000 Series Owner Manual
User’s
Manual
RD-MV1000/RD-MV2000
M-4660
1st Edition
How to Use This Manual
Content Summary
This user’s manual consists of the chapters listed below. For information about the
communication features and the accompanying software DAQSTANDARD, read the
respective manual.
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Appendix
Index
Title and Contents
Feature Overview
The MV features.
Installation and Wiring
How to install the MV, how to wire input terminals, and how to connect the power
cable.
Measurement Channels and Alarms
How to set measurement conditions and how to set alarms.
Measurement and Recording
How to record and store measured values and other values. This chapter also
explains how to load measured data or setup data from a CF card or USB flash
memory.
Screen Operations
How to use the operation screen.
Display Configuration
How to change the displayed information on the operation screen and how to write
a message.
Event Action
How to make the MV perform a specific action in response to an event, a remote
control signal input, or a pressing of the USER key.
Security Features
How to use the key lock feature and the feature that allows only registered users to
operate the MV.
Environment Settings
How to configure the time settings and how to operate the MV by using a keyboard.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
How to use computation channels and how to create various reports, such as
hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports.
External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
How to use external input channels.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Explains error messages and troubleshooting measures.
Specifications
Lists the MV specifications.
Describes measured data file sizes, text file formats, etc.
Note
•
•
This user’s manual covers information about MVs that have a suffix code for language “-2”
(English).
For language configuration instructions, see section 9.4, “Changing the Language.”
1st Edition: December 2008
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2008, Omega
M-4660
i
The following symbols are used in this manual.
Unit
K
k
Denotes 1024. Example: 768 KB (file size)
Denotes 1000.
Markings
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage
to the instrument. This symbol appears on the instrument to
indicate that the user must refer to the user's manual for special
instructions. The same symbol appears in the corresponding
place in the user's manual to identify those instructions. In the
manual, the symbol is used in conjunction with the word
“WARNING” or “CAUTION.”
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious
or fatal injury to the user, and precautions that can be taken to
prevent such occurrences.
CAUTION
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause light
injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and
precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
Note
Calls attention to information that is important for proper
operation of the instrument.
This mark is used to indicate a reference to a related procedure or
explanation.
Subheadings
Bold characters
Denotes key or character strings that appear on the screen.
Example: Volt
Aa#1
Indicates character types that can be used.
A Uppercase alphabet, a lowercase alphabet, # symbols,
1 numbers.
Procedure
Explanation
Display
Settings
Carry out the procedure according to the step numbers.
All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind;
depending on the operation, not all steps need to be taken.
Explanation gives information such as limitations related the
procedure.
Indicates the display and explains the settings. A detailed
description of the function is not provided in this section.
For details on the function, see chapter 1.
Procedural Explanations
This manual mainly describes the MV1000 procedures. Where procedures differ between
the MV2000 and MV1000, the MV2000 procedures (menu operations) are also provided.
High-Speed and Medium-Speed Input Model Groupings
This manual uses high-speed input model and medium-speed input model to distinguish
between MV models as follows:
Model type
High-speed input model
ii
Model
MV1004, MV1008, MV2008
M-4660
How to Use This Manual
Medium-speed input model
M-4660
MV1006, MV1012, MV1024, MV2010, MV2020, MV2030,
MV2040, MV2048
iii
Contents
How to Use This Manual.....................................................................................................................i
Chapter 1
Feature Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Chapter 3
iv
Setting the Scan Interval and the A/D Converter Integration Time....................................... 3-1
Setting Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation...................................................... 3-2
Setting the Input Range........................................................................................................ 3-3
Setting the Moving Average of the Input............................................................................... 3-6
Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function..................................................................................... 3-7
Hiding the Alarm Indication................................................................................................. 3-10
Setting Alarms on Channels................................................................................................3-11
Releasing Alarm Output...................................................................................................... 3-14
Calibrating Input Values (/CC1 option)............................................................................... 3-15
Counting Pulses (/PM1 option)........................................................................................... 3-17
Setting Range-Out Detection for Linearly Scaled Measurement Channels........................ 3-20
Measurement and Recording
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
Chapter 5
Where and How to Install...................................................................................................... 2-1
Signal Input Terminal Wiring................................................................................................. 2-3
Optional Terminal Wiring....................................................................................................... 2-7
Connecting the Power Supply............................................................................................ 2-14
Measurement Channels and Alarms
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
Chapter 4
System Overview.................................................................................................................. 1-1
Input...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Alarms................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Display.................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Data Storage Functions...................................................................................................... 1-26
Batch Function.................................................................................................................... 1-35
Event Action Function......................................................................................................... 1-36
Security Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-40
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options).............................................. 1-42
FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 Option).......................................................................... 1-48
Other Functions.................................................................................................................. 1-50
Setting the Recording Conditions of Measured Data............................................................ 4-1
Setting the Save Method for Measured Data........................................................................ 4-4
Using the Batch Function...................................................................................................... 4-7
Starting/Stopping Recording, and Saving Measured Data................................................. 4-10
Saving Measured Data Manually........................................................................................ 4-13
Saving Screen Image Data (Snapshot).............................................................................. 4-15
Managing Stored Files........................................................................................................ 4-16
Loading and Displaying Measured Data from External Storage Media.............................. 4-18
Saving and Loading Setup Data......................................................................................... 4-19
Using USB Flash Memory.................................................................................................. 4-21
Screen Operations
M-4660
Contents
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
Chapter 6
Display Configuration
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
Chapter 7
Configuring the Event Action Function.................................................................................. 7-1
Setting Timers....................................................................................................................... 7-3
Setting the Match Time Timer............................................................................................... 7-5
Using the Remote Control Function (/R1 option) and the USER Key................................... 7-7
Using an Alarm, Output Relay, or Internal Switch................................................................. 7-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Security Features
8.1
8.2
8.3
Chapter 9
Setting a Display Group........................................................................................................ 6-1
Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers.................................................................................. 6-3
Setting the Secondary Trend Update Interval....................................................................... 6-4
Writing a Message................................................................................................................ 6-7
Changing Channel Display Colors.......................................................................................6-11
Using Display Zones........................................................................................................... 6-12
Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display............................................................................ 6-13
Displaying Alarm Value Marks and Color Scale Bands...................................................... 6-18
Partially Expanding a Waveform......................................................................................... 6-20
Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the Waveform at Start,
Message Display Direction, Waveform Line Width, and Grid............................................. 6-22
Changing the Bar Graph Display Method........................................................................... 6-24
Changing the Display Background Color............................................................................ 6-28
Automatically Switching Display Groups............................................................................ 6-29
Automatically Returning to a Specified Display.................................................................. 6-30
Registering Favorite Displays............................................................................................. 6-31
Writing a Message When the MV Recovers from a Power Failure..................................... 6-33
Changing the Function Menu and the Display Selection Menu.......................................... 6-34
Event Action
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Chapter 8
Switching Between Displays................................................................................................. 5-1
Displaying Measured Data with Waveforms (trend), Numbers (digital), or Bar Graphs........ 5-5
Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND HISTORY)................................................. 5-9
Viewing All Channels on One Display (OVERVIEW).......................................................... 5-15
Displaying Various Information........................................................................................... 5-16
Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (COLUMN BAR).............................................................. 5-19
Using the Alarm Summary.................................................................................................. 5-22
Using the Message Summary............................................................................................. 5-23
Using the Memory Summary.............................................................................................. 5-24
Viewing Operation History Logs......................................................................................... 5-27
Using the 4-Panel Display (MV2000 only).......................................................................... 5-31
Disabling the Keys (key lock function).................................................................................. 8-1
Allowing Only Registered Users to Operate the MV (login function).................................... 8-4
Logging in and Logging Out.................................................................................................. 8-8
12
13
Environment Settings
App
Index
M-4660
v
Contents
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
Setting the Date and Time.................................................................................................... 9-1
Setting the Temperature Unit and Decimal Point Type......................................................... 9-4
Viewing MV Information........................................................................................................ 9-5
Changing the Displayed Language....................................................................................... 9-6
Initializing the MV.................................................................................................................. 9-7
Transmitting the MV Status via Relay Contact (/F1 option).................................................. 9-8
Controlling the MV by Using a Keyboard.............................................................................. 9-9
Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight Saver................................................................9-11
Chapter 10 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
Configuring Computation Channels.................................................................................... 10-1
Writing Expressions............................................................................................................ 10-6
Displaying Computation Channels.................................................................................... 10-12
Starting/Stopping Computation......................................................................................... 10-15
Generating Reports.......................................................................................................... 10-17
Chapter 11 External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
11.1 Configuring External Input Channels...................................................................................11-1
11.2 Displaying External Input Channels.....................................................................................11-4
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
List of Messages................................................................................................................. 12-1
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................ 12-17
Periodic Inspection........................................................................................................... 12-20
Calibrating the MV............................................................................................................ 12-21
Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts...................................................... 12-23
Chapter 13 Specifications
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
Signal Input and Alarm........................................................................................................ 13-1
Display Functions............................................................................................................... 13-3
Storage Function................................................................................................................ 13-6
Other Standard Functions................................................................................................... 13-8
Options............................................................................................................................. 13-10
General Specifications...................................................................................................... 13-14
External Dimensions......................................................................................................... 13-20
Appendix
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Data File Size..................................................................................................... App-1
Event Action Configuration Examples................................................................ App-4
Text File Formats............................................................................................... App-7
Index
vi
M-4660
Chapter 1
1.1
Feature Overview
1
System Overview
The MV can be used to construct a system like the one shown below. The MV can
make voltage and temperature measurements by itself. It can also transfer data to other
devices via Ethernet or a serial interface, and it can acquire data from multiple channels
using the Modbus protocol.
Feature Overview
System Configuration
2
3
PC
4
Ethernet
(Communication Interface User’s Manual)
Temperature
regulator
PC
Recorder
Serial communication*
(Communication Interface
User’s Manual)
Measurement
input
Section 3.3
Pulse input*
Section 3.10
5
MV
Transmitter power supply*
Section 2.3
Alarm output*
Sections 3.5 to 3.8
FAIL/status output
Section 9.6
6
7
CF card
First Step Guide
USB port
USB flash memory
Section 4.10
8
Keyboard
Section 9.7
Keys
Remote input*
Section 7.4
9
10
* Options
Terminology
11
• Memory sampling
Recording measured data.
• Memory start
12
A command to start memory sampling.
• Memory stop
A command to stop memory sampling.
• Display data
The waveform data displayed on the MV screen. It is essentially measured data that is
recorded at the display data sampling rate.
13
• Event data
Measured data that is recorded at a set sampling rate that differs from that of the
display data.
App
Index
M-4660
1-1
1.1 System Overview
Modes
The MV has an Operation Mode, a Setting Mode, and a Basic Setting Mode.
Mode Transition Diagram
Power ON
Operation Mode
Operation
screen
MENU or
ESC
Setting Mode
MENU
DISP/ENTER
Configuration
screen
Settings menu
MENU or ESC
Select Basic setting mode from the menu,
or hold down FUNC for three seconds.
Basic Setting Mode
DISP/ENTER
Configuration
screen
Basic settings
menu
ESC
Select End, or press ESC then DISP/ENTER.
Mode
Operation Mode
Setting Mode
Basic Setting Mode
Description
For performing measurements.
For configuring settings, such as the input range and the
measurement method. You can change most of the settings in this
mode while the MV is engaged in memory sampling.
For configuring fundamental settings, such as the scan interval and
the measured data save method. You cannot switch to this mode
while the MV is engaged in memory sampling.
*For a list of the contents of Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode, see the First Step Guide.
1-2
M-4660
1.2
1
Input
2
• Number of Channels vs. Scan Interval
The MV acquires data by sampling measurement channel input signals at the set scan
interval. The following is a list of the scan intervals available with different numbers of
channels.
Number of
Model
Measurement
Channels
RD-MV1004
4
RD-MV1008
8
RD-MV1006
6
RD-MV1012
12
RD-MV1024
24
RD-MV2008
8
RD-MV2010
10
RD-MV2020
20
RD-MV2030
30
RD-MV2040
40
RD-MV2048
48
A/D converter integration time
125 ms, 250 ms
1 s, 2 s, 5 s
4
25 ms
2 s, 5 s
125 ms, 250 ms
125 ms
5
25 ms
1 s, 2 s, 5 s
2 s, 5 s
125 ms
60 Hz/50 Hz
100 ms
600 Hz (fixed)
6
7
• A/D Converter Integration Time
The MV uses an A/D converter to convert sampled analog signals to digital signals.
You can effectively eliminate the influence of power supply noise by setting the A/
D converter’s integration time to the same length as or to an integral multiple of the
power source period.
•
3
Scan Interval
Normal Mode
Fast Sampling Mode
For configuration instructions, see section 3.1.
•
Feature Overview
Measurement Channels
Because 100 ms is an integral multiple of both 16.7 ms and 20 ms, you can effectively
eliminate the influence of power supply noise from both 50- and 60-Hz frequencies by
setting the integration time to 100 ms.
Power supply noise elimination is less effective in fast sampling mode than it is in normal
mode. When measuring in an environment susceptible to power supply noise, we
recommend that you measure in normal mode.
8
9
For configuration instructions, see section 3.1.
10
Input Types and Computation Functions
You can measure the following types of input.
Input Type
DC voltage
DC current
Thermocouple
RTD
ON/OFF input
Pulse input4
Description
You can measure DC voltages in the range of ±20 mV to ±50 V.
You can measure a DC current signal by converting it to a voltage signal using a shunt
resistor attached to the input terminal.1
The converted signal can be measured within the DC voltage range (see above).
You can measure temperatures using these thermocouple types: R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N,
W, L, U, and WRe3-25. It is also possible to measure using other thermocouples, such as
PR40-20 and PLATINEL.2
You can measure temperatures using RTD types Pt100 and JPt100. It is also possible to
measure using other RTD types such as Cu10 and Cu25,3 and Pt50 and Ni100.2
You can display contact input or voltage input signals correlated to 0% or 100% of the
display range.
Contact input: A closed contact is ON (1). An open contact is OFF (0).
Voltage input: Less than 2.4 V is OFF (0). 2.4 V or more is ON (1).
You can count pulses.
1 Shunt resistor sold separately. For example, you can use a 250-Ω shunt resistor to convert a 4- to 20-mA
signal to a 1- to 5-V signal.
2 /N3 option
3 /N1 option
4 /PM1 option
M-4660
1-3
11
12
13
App
Index
1.2 Input
The following input processing and math operations are available.
Moving average
DC voltage
Shunt resistor
DC current
Linear Calibration Low cut Difference Measured
scaling correction
computation
value
(/CC1 option)
√
Square root computation
1-5V
Burnout detection
RJC
Thermocouple
Burnout detection
RTD
ON/OFF input
Convert to number of pulses per second
Pulse
(/PM1 option)
Dotted lines indicate that the function can be selected.
Burnout Detection
Reference Junction Compensation
Detects and indicates a sensor burnout.
Performs reference junction compensation on
a thermocouple.
MV
Thermocouple
Burnout
1-5V
Detected on the
1-5 V value.
Internal
reference
junction
Thermocouple
Indicated as
Burnout.
Thermoelectromotive
force
Indicated as
Burnout.
For configuration instructions, see section 3.2.
Burnout
External reference junction
For configuration instructions, see section 3.2.
Moving Average
Eliminates noise.
New sampled
data
Operation example when the number
of moving average data points is 3
1
2
3
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
0.0 mV
(Moving average)
5.0 mV
Sampling data
in the buffer
Measured
value
Sampling
nth time
New sampled
data
15.0 mV
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
Clear
10.0 mV
n + 1th time
10.0 mV
15.0 mV
10.0 mV
Clear
Number of moving
average data points: 2 to 400
11.7 mV
n + 2th time
For configuration instructions, see section 3.4.
1-4
M-4660
1.2 Input
b
x
B
X
a
A
X = (B – A)
x–a
b–a
+A
Measured
value
Measured
value
0V
A
a
Number of break
points: Up to 16
)
b
–100 °c
Difference Computation
4
For square root computation, measured values below
the specified value are cut.
For 1-5 V input, values below 0 % are cut.
Measured
value
5
Result of square root
computation
Input
value
Input
value
The measured value of the channel is set to the
difference with respect to the measured value of the
reference channel.
3
For configuration instructions, see section 3.3.
Low-cut
Low-cut value
For configuration instructions, see section 3.9.
2
300 °c
Input
value
B
Corrects the input value with the characteristics
specified by segments to obtain the measured value.
Output
value
10 V
Measured
value
For configuration instructions, see section 3.3.
Calibration Correction (/CC1 Option)
(
Converts the unit to obtain the measured value.
6
For configuration instructions, see section 3.3.
Pulse Input (/PM1 Option)
Counts pulses.
Pulses of 100 Hz or less
can be counted
7
Input to the MV
Contact
Input
value
–
Measured
value
Measured value on the reference channel
or
5 ms or more
MV
8
Open
collector
9
Count on the MV
The contact changes from open to closed.
The signal level at the input terminal changes from high
to low.
For configuration instructions, see section 3.3.
Feature Overview
Takes the square root of the input value and converts
the unit to obtain the measured value.
Input
value
1
Linear Scaling
Square Root Computation
For configuration instructions, see section 3.10.
Note
You can use difference computation even if the reference channel and difference computation
channel’s input types and ranges are different. Difference computation takes place using the
difference computation channel’s decimal place and unit.
Example 1: If the input value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 and the measured
value of the reference channel is 100.0, the result is 10.00–100.0=–90.00.
Example 2: If the input value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 V and the
measured value of the reference channel is 5.00 mV, the computed result is 10.00
V – 5.00 mV = 5.00 V.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-5
1.3
Alarms
This function generates an alarm when the measured data meets a set condition. You
can set a maximum of four different alarms on each channel.
Alarm Types
You can use the types of alarms listed below. The letters contained in parentheses are
used as abbreviations for the alarms.
For alarm configuration instructions, see section 3.7.
High Limit Alarm (H)
Low Limit Alarm (L)
Measured value Hysteresis
Alarm value
Measured value
Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
Delay High Limit Alarm (T)
Measured value
Alarm value
Delay time
Delay Low Limit Alarm (t)
Measured value
Alarm value
Delay time
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (R)
Measured value
Change in the
measured value
T2
T1
t1
t2
Amount of change in
the setting
| T2-T1 |
Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (r)
Measured value
T2
Amount of change in
the setting
| T2-T1 |
T1
t1
Time
Difference High Limit Alarm (h)
Alarm value
Change in the measured value
Time
Interval (t2-t1)
Interval (t2-t1)
Difference in the measured values of two channels
Hysteresis
t2
Difference Low Limit Alarm (l)
Difference in the measured values of two channels
Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
• Hysteresis
You can set a difference between the value that activates an alarm and the value that
deactivates it.
For configuration instructions, see section 3.5.
• Delay High Limit Alarm and Delay Low Limit Alarm
If the measured value remains above or below the set alarm value for the set period of
time (the delay time), an alarm is activated.
• High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm and Low Limit on Rate-of-Change
Alarm
The MV checks the rate-of-change of the measured values over a set period of time (the
interval) and activates an alarm if the rate-of-change in the rising or falling direction is
greater than or equal to the set value.
The alarm value of the rate-of-change alarm is set using an absolute value. The
interval is derived from the sampling count using the following equation:
Interval = scan interval × sampling count
For instructions on how to set the interval, see section 3.5.
• Difference High Limit Alarm and Difference Low Limit Alarm
The MV activates an alarm when the difference between the values of two channels
goes above or below the set value. You can use this alarm on measurement channels
set to difference computation.
1-6
M-4660
1.3 Alarms
Alarm display
• Hold/Nonhold of Indication
When alarm conditions cease, their indicators can be set to either:
• Stop as soon as the alarm condition ceases (Nonhold).
• Continue until the execution of an a
larm output release (AlarmACK) operation (Hold).
The default setting is Nonhold.
For configuration instructions, see Section 3.5.
• Alarm Hide Function
If this function is enabled, the MV will not display alarm condition information or record
it in the alarm summary. However, the MV will output alarm information to a relay (/A
options) or internal switch. You can set this function for each channel and alarm.
For configuration instructions, see Section 3.6.
1
Feature Overview
Alarm conditions are indicated in operation windows (trend, digital, bar graph, overview,
etc.) and by icons in the status display section. The alarm summary displays detailed
alarm information.
2
3
4
5
Alarm Output Relay Operation
The MV can generate a contact signal from an alarm output relay (/A options) when an
alarm occurs. The alarm output relay operation can be changed.
For configuration instructions, see Section 3.5.
AND/OR
Reflash
Channel 1
Alarm
Channel 2
Channel 3
Alarm output relay
or
Internal switch
Alarm output relay
(reflash ON)
Alarm output relay
(reflash OFF)
Approx.
500 ms
Approx.
500 ms
(when a relay is set to “OR” logic)
7
Channel 1
Alarm
Channel 2
6
8
AND
OR
(You can set the alarm output relay and internal
switch. For details on the internal switch, see the
next page.)
9
Energize or De-energize
When power is shut down
Normal operation
When alarm is occurring
Energize
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
10
NO: Normally Opened
C: Common
NC: Normally Closed
De-energize
Non-Hold
Hold
AlarmACK
Alarm occurrence
Alarm release
Activated
Alarm
output
relay Deactivated
Alarm
Activated
Deactivated
AlarmACK
Alarm occurrence
Alarm release
Activated
Alarm
output
relay Deactivated
or
Activated
Deactivated
AlarmACK
or
Deactivated
Deactivated
Relay is activated
at the next scan
interval
Normal
AlarmACK
AlarmACK
Activated
Activated
or
Reset
Activated
Deactivated
Relay is activated
at the next alarm
occurrence
Relay Action on AlarmACK
Alarm
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-7
1.3 Alarms
• Reflash
This function enables a single alarm output relay with multiple alarms assigned to it to
indicate all alarm occurrences. After the first alarm, subsequent alarms are indicated
by the brief release (approximately 500 ms) of the output relay.
The reflash function affects the first three output relays.*
* I01 to I03 or I11 to I13. With the /A1 option, I01 and I02.
Note
When reflash is enabled, the first three output relays are used exclusively as reflash relays.
The first three output relays are set to OR logic and to the Nonhold operation regardless of the
AND/OR or Nonhold/Hold settings explained below.
• AND/OR
When multiple alarms are assigned to one output relay, you can choose to activate the
alarm in one of the following ways (you can also use AND/OR with internal switches):
• AND: Activate the relay when all of the alarms assigned to it occur simultaneously.
• OR: Activate the relay when any of the alarms assigned to it occur.
• Energize or De-energize Operation
You can choose whether to energize or de-energize alarm output relays when an
alarm occurs. If you select de-energize, the alarm output relays will be in the same
state when the power is shut off as they are when an alarm occurs. This setting
applies to all alarm output relays.
• Nonhold/Hold
When an alarm condition is no longer met, alarm relays can be set to:
• Turn OFF immediately (Nonhold).
•Remain ON until the execution of an alarm output release (AlarmACK) operation (Hold).
This setting applies to all alarm output relays.
• Alarm Output Release Operation
The alarm output release operation (AlarmACK) stops the display and the relay output
of all alarms. For information about how alarm display and output relay operations
respond to an AlarmACK operation, see the previous page.
Note
When you enter Basic Setting Mode, the alarm output relay remains at its current active/
released state. In Basic Setting Mode, alarms are not detected and the AlarmACK operation is
invalid.
Internal Switch
The MV can transmit the alarm status to software switches (30 internal switches).
Internal switch values are shown below. As with AlarmACK, you can apply an AND or OR
operation (see the previous page).
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm release
1
Internal switch
0
Internal switches can be used as events with the event action function (for details, see
section 1.7). Internal switches can also be written into computation channel (/M1 and /
PM1 options) expressions.
1-8
M-4660
1.4
1
Display
Feature Overview
Common Display functions
2
• LCD Display and Its Layout
The RD-MV1000 has a 5.5-inch (240 × 320 dot resolution) TFT color LCD. The RDMV2000 has a 10.4-inch (480 × 640 dot resolution) TFT color LCD. The display
consists of a status display section and a data display section.
The RD-MV1000 Display
3
Status display section
4
Data display section
5
• Status Display Section
he status display section indicates the display name, date/time, batch name
T
(when using the batch function), user name (when using the login function), internal
memory and CF card usage, alarm occurrence, computation status (/M1 or /PM1
option), key lock status, and e-mail transmission.
6
7
• Data Display Section
he data display section shows measured data using numbers, waveforms, and
T
bar graphs. It displays a configuration screen when you are configuring a function.
8
• Group Display
On the trend, digital, and bar graph displays, channel data is displayed in preset
groups. With the RD-MV1000, you can register up to 10 groups, each with up to 6
channels. With the RD-MV2000, you can register up to 36 groups, each with up to 10
channels. The same groups are used for the trend, digital, and bar graph displays.
Displayed groups can be switched automatically at specified intervals (5 s to 1 min).
For configuration instructions, see section 6.1.
9
10
• Channel Number Display and Tag Name Display
You can choose to label displayed channels according to their tag names or according
to their channel numbers. This setting applies to all channels.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.2.
11
• Update Interval of Measured Values
Measured values are updated every second. However, if the scan interval is longer
than 1 s, measured values are updated at the scan interval.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.3.
12
• Alarm Indication
The MV regularly checks for the alarms set to each channel and indicates alarms with
the following symbols:
Alarm Type
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm
Difference high limit alarm
Difference low limit alarm
Symbol
H
L
h
l
Alarm Type
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Delay high limit alarm
Delay low limit alarm
Symbol
R
r
T
t
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-9
1.4 Display
Status Display Section
The status display section contains the following information when the MV is in Operation
or Setting Mode.
Memory Sampling Status
Data type
The green bar indicates the memory sampling progress.
The frame represents either the length of one file save interval (with display
data) or the length of one data segment (with event data).
DISP: Display data
EVENT: Event data
Memory sampling icon
Internal memory error. Contact your nearest Omega dealer for
repairs.
No memory sampling
The remaining memory sampling time.
Memory sampling
in progress
Indicates that the MV is waiting for an event data trigger.
When an event data pre-trigger is set, the part of the bar that
represents the length of the pre-trigger section will be displayed
in orange.
Display paused
(memory sampling
continues)
Display or group name
If all channels are being displayed with trend display,
the group name display shows “ALL”.
Date and time
If the function that gradually adjusts the time is enabled,
the time is displayed in yellow.
When using the batch function
Batch name (displayed
alternately with the display
name)
Date/time*
After an alarm condition has been met, all
alarms have been released, but there is still
at least one alarm for which an AlarmACK
(Green)
operation has not been performed.
Status Icon
(Displayed alternately on models with the /M1
or /PM1 option)
Key lock is on.
If the batch and lot numbers exceed 20 characters,
the date/time area will also be used to display the
batch and lot.
E-mail notification has been activated.
When using the login function
The condition set to the status output
relay (/F1 option) has been met.
Current user name
Date/time*
(displayed alternately with the
display name)
When using the login and batch functions
Current user name
Batch name (displayed
alternately with the display
name and date/time*)
* With the MV2000, the date/time and batch name are displayed
on different lines.
The green bar indicates the amount of used CF card
memory. If Media FIFO is switched off, the bar
color will change to red when the amount of available
CF card memory falls below 10%.
1-10
Alarm Icons
At least one alarm condition has been met.
This icon blinks when an alarm condition is
(Red) met and AlarmACK has not been executed.
Math icon (/M1 and /PM1 options)
White icon: Math in progress
Yellow icon: Math data dropout
CF Card Icons
Accessing the CF card.
Waiting.
Light blue icon: There is a CF card in the slot,
but it is not connected properly.
Remove the CF card, and then reinsert it. There
is a CF card error. To return the CF card icon to
normal, perform the following:
• Remove the CF card, and then reinsert it.
• Exchange it with a functional CF card.
• Use the MV to format the CF card
(the CF card data will be deleted).
M-4660
1.4 Display
Trend Display (T-Y)
Waveform (displayed with the set channel color)
To change channel colors, see section 6.5
To change waveform line width, see section 6.10
To display every channel's waveform, see section 5.2
Trip line
(up to four lines)
Section 6.1
3
Fine grid
Section 5.2
Current value mark
1 division
Numeric display
section
Section 5.2
Maximum value
Minimum value
1 dot
Displays the maximum and
minimum values sampled
in the time corresponding
to one dot.
Display layout
2
Grid
Section 6.10
You can display a fine grid.
Trend update
interval
Section 6.3
The tag name or channel number,
measured value, unit, and the set
alarm
Trend space function
Inserts a division-wide
space here.
Section 5.2
Alarm mark
Time at the grid location
Either displays the time, or
the date and time.
Sections 6.3 and 9.1
Section 6.10
4
5
Measured
value scale
Section 6.7
Alarm type
1
Feature Overview
Displays measured data using waveforms. (For operating instructions, see section 5.2.)
6
Alarm value mark
Section 6.8
Color scale band
Section 6.8
7
8
Current value
Section 6.7
Vertical display
9
10
Horizontal display
11
Horizontal split display
(displays two groups)
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-11
1.4 Display
• Waveform Updating
Every 30 dots makes up one division (also referred to as DIV) on the time axis.
The waveform update interval is the time corresponding to one dot. The time
corresponding to one dot depends on the time set to one division (the trend interval).
The relationship between the trend update interval and the speed of waveform
movement in the display is as follows:
Trend interval (per DIV)
Time corresponding to one dot (in seconds)
Speed of waveform movement (approximation in mm/h)
Trend interval (per DIV)
Time corresponding to one dot (in seconds)
Speed of waveform movement (approximation in mm/h)
Trend interval (per DIV)
Time corresponding to one dot (in seconds)
Speed of waveform movement (approximation in mm/h)
5 s1
0.125
10000
2 min
4
312
30 min
60
21
10 s1
0.25
5000
5 min
10
156
1h
120
10
15 s2
0.5
2500
10 min
20
78
2h
240
5.2
30 s
1
1250
15 min
30
42
4h
480
2.6
1 min
2
625
20 min
40
31
10 h
1200
1.0
1 40 dots per division. Available on high-speed input models of the MV.
2 Available on medium-speed input models of the MV when in fast sampling mode .
Switching Trend Update Intervals (For instructions on how to set the second
interval, see section 6.3.)
You can press T/DIV to change the trend update interval. You can also switch from the
ordinary trend update interval to the secondary trend update interval, and vice versa,
while the MV is collecting data.
• Writing Messages
Preset messages
1
2
3
4
Start
Material 1
Trend display
Free messages
You can enter non-preset messages.
Preset Messages (For configuration and operating instructions, see section 6.4.)
You can choose preset messages to be written on the waveform.
Max. number of messages: 100 (Messages 1 through 10 are free messages.)
Free Messages (For configuration and operating instructions, see section 6.4.)
You can enter non-preset messages.
Max. number of free messages: 10
Automatically written messages (For configuration instructions, see
sections 6.3 and 6.17.)
•The MV will automatically write a message to indicate when the trend update rate has
been switched during memory sampling.
•The MV will automatically write a message to indicate when power has been
restored after a power failure that occurs during memory sampling.
Message Display Options
•When using horizontal or horizontal split display, messages can be displayed either
vertically or horizontally. (For configuration instructions, see section 6.10.)
•Messages can be displayed as a group in the upper left corner of the screen (list
display). (For operating instructions, see section 5.2.)
List display
1-12
Vertical display
M-4660
1.4 Display
• Zone Display
With zone display
Without zone display
100%
100%
60%
CH2
Zone 2
4
30%
CH1
Zone 1
0%
Time axis
2
3
Zone 3
CH3
1
Feature Overview
You can display channels in specified zones. This allows you to separate waveforms
so that they don’t overlap.
In the following example, channel 1 is set to 0-30%, channel 2 is set to 30-60%, and
channel 3 is set to 60-100%.
0%
Time axis
5
For configuration instructions, see section 6.6.
Auto Zone (For operating instructions, see section 5.2.)
You can divide the trend display area evenly between each channel in a group.
6
• Partial Expansion
This function enables you to compress part of the display and expand the rest of it.
In the following example, the display below 0 V (the boundary value) is shifted to the
bottom 30% of the screen. The bottom 30% of the screen displays –6 V to 0 V, while
the top 70% displays 0 V to 6 V.
Without partial expansion
With partial expansion
Percentage of
display span %
Measured value
6V
100
Boundary
value
0
Percentage of
display span %
Measured value
6V
Boundary Expanded
value
area
shifted
location
0
0
Time axis
8
100
50
–6 V
7
30
–6 V
For configuration instructions, see section 6.9.
Compressed
area
0
Time axis
9
10
11
• Alarm Display
The alarm mark, alarm type, and measured values are displayed in the following
ways, depending on the alarm condition.
Indication not held
Alarm
Indication held
AlarmACK
Occurrence
12
AlarmACK
Release
Alarm mark
Green
Red
Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green
red
green
red
Alarm type
None
Red
None
None
Red
None
None
None
Red
Red None
Measured
value
Blue
Red
Blue
Blue
Red
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Red Blue
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-13
1.4 Display
Digital Display
Displays measured data using large numeric symbols.
For operating instructions, see section 5.2.
Measured value
Unit
Alarm mark
Tag name or channel number
Note
•
•
•
Measurement Channel Numeric Value Display
When the MV detects a range-out (see below), the display is either “+Over” or “-Over.”
When the MV detects a burnout on a channel that has been set to be checked for burnouts,
the display is “Burnout”. All other values are displayed numerically.
Range-outs are detected on measurement channels in the following circumstances.
• If the DC voltage input value goes above the measurable range ± 5%, a range-out is
detected. For example, when the measurement range is 2 V, the measurable range is
–2.000 to 2.000 V. If the voltage exceeds 2.200 V, a positive range-out is detected. If it
goes below –2.200 V, a negative range-out is detected.
• If the input type is thermocouple or RTD, a range-out is detected when the temperature
goes 10°C above or below the measurable range. For example, when the measurement
range is set to R, the measurable range is 0.0 to 1760.0°C. If the temperature exceeds
1770.0°C, “+Over” will be displayed. If the temperature goes below -10.0°C, “-Over” will
be displayed.
• On channels that use linear scaling, the range-out values, ignoring the decimal point,
are above 30000 and below –30000. However, you can also set the range-out values to
105% or greater, and –5% or less of the scale width, as long as those values fall within
±30000.
For configuration instructions, see section 3.11.
Computation Channel Numeric Value Display
See section 1.9.
External Input Channel Numeric Value Display (/MC1 option)
The range of displayable values, ignoring the decimal point, is –30000 to 30000. The
decimal place is determined by the location of the decimal point on the external input
channel’s minimum span value. Regardless of maximum and minimum span value settings,
all values within the range of –30000 to 30000 will be displayed. If the value exceeds 30000,
“+Over” will be displayed. If the value goes below –30000, “-Over” will be displayed.
• Alarm Display
The alarm mark and measured values are displayed in the following ways depending
on the alarm condition.
Indication not held
Alarm
Occurrence
AlarmACK
Release
Alarm mark
Measured
value
1-14
Indication held
AlarmACK
Green
Red
Blue
Red
Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green
red
green
red
Blue
Blue
Red
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Red Blue
M-4660
1.4 Display
1
Bar Graph Display
For operating instructions, see section 5.2.
Feature Overview
Displays measured data using bar graphs.
2
Horizontal
The bar graph base position is set to Normal,
Lower, or Upper.
Section 6.11
The bar graph base position is set to Center.
Section 6.11
3
4
Vertical
Section 6.10
5
Tag name or channel number
Alarm mark
Maximum value
Scale
Section 6.7
Alarm value mark
Bar
(displayed with the set channel color)
Section 6.11
6
7
Unit of measurement and minimum value
Measured value
The bar graph base position is set to Center.
Section 6.11
8
The bar graph base position is set to Normal, Lower, or Upper.
Section 6.11
• Bar Graph Display Updating
9
The bar graph display is updated at the same rate as numeric values.
• Alarm Display
The alarm mark, alarm value mark, and measured values are displayed in the
following ways, depending on the alarm condition.
Indication not held
Alarm
Indication held
AlarmACK
Occurrence
10
AlarmACK
11
Release
Alarm mark
Green
Red
Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green
red
green
red
Value mark
Green
Red
Green Green
Red
Green
Blue
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
Measured
value
Blue
Green Green
Red
Red Green
Blue
Red
Red
Blue
12
Blue
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-15
1.4 Display
Historical Trend
The MV can display the waveforms of past measured data (display or event data) stored
in internal or external memory. This function is called historical trend.
• Historical Trend Display Options
There are five ways that you can display measured data stored in internal memory:
• From the alarm summary display.
See section 5.7.
• From the message summary display.
See section 5.8.
• From the memory summary display.
See section 5.9.
• From the display selection menu.
See section 5.3.
• By pressing HISTORY.
You can also display measured data stored to external memory. See section 4.8.
• Display Contents
Background
color (Changeable)
Waveform (channel display color)
Location of the most recent data
Trip line
Tag name or channel number
(channel display color)
Measured values (maximum and minimum
values for the entire display*)
Unit
Measured values (maximum and minimum
values at the cursor position*)
Cursor
Message
* You can also just display the digital values at the cursor position.
Date and time at the right end of the time axis** or the
time at the cursor position
(The time at the cursor position is surrounded by a yellow square.)
Date and time at the left end of the time axis**
** You can also set this area to display the time relative to the start of recording.
Half screen display
Present trend
Historical trend
Item
Alarm summary
Message summary
Memory summary
Description
Displays a summary of the displayed data’s alarms.
Displays a summary of the displayed data’s messages.
Displays the properties (file name, sample start time, end time,
etc.) of the displayed data.
• Add Message
You can enter added messages.
For operating instructions, see section 6.4.
1-16
M-4660
1.4 Display
• Auto Span
*
Auto span affects channels that are in the same scale position as the selected channel.
When the maximum or minimum values are outside of the set display span
Measured value
Measured value
1
Feature Overview
The MV can automatically adjust the display span of the selected channel.* It sets
the span based on the maximum and minimum displayed historical data values. Auto
span is deactivated when you switch to another group.
2
3
0
Auto span
4
0
5
Time axis
Time axis
When the maximum or minimum values are within the set display span
Measured value
Measured value
6
0
0
7
Auto span
Time axis
Time axis
If the maximum or minimum data value falls outside the maximum selectable display
span, the MV adjusts the display span to the maximum or minimum possible value.
The MV responds in the same way when it encounters overflow data.
8
9
• Top Channel
Displays the selected channel’s historical trend waveform in front of all of the others.
This setting is deactivated when you switch to another group.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-17
1.4 Display
Overview
Displays a list that shows the conditions of all channels.
You can select a channel to access the trend, digital, or bar graph display of its group.
For operating instructions, see section 5.4.
Channels with active alarms are red.
Alarm type
Cursor
Tag name or channel number
Measured value and unit
• Alarm Indication
The channel display area, channel number, tag name, alarm type, and measured
value all change in appearance based on alarm conditions in the following ways.
When indication is
set to hold
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
When indication is
set to non-hold
Alarm
Occurrence
Release
Tag/Channel Black
1-18
White
Black
Channel
area
Green
Red
Alarm type
None
White
None
Measured
value
Black
White
Black
Black Blinking Blinking Black Black Blinking White Black
white
black
white
Red
Green
Green Green
None
White
None
None
None White
White None
Black
White
Black
Black Black White
White Black
Green Green
Red
Red Green
M-4660
1.4 Display
Alarm Summary
1
Feature Overview
You can list up-to-date alarm information.
• The data of up to 1000 alarms can be displayed.
• You can select alarm information to access the historical trend of the display data or
event data that contains the alarm.
For operating instructions, see section 5.7.
2
3
To the historical trend display
4
5
Date/time of alarm occurrence/release
Alarm number (1, 2, 3, 4) and type (H, L, h, l, R, r, T, t)
Channel
6
: Alarm occurrence
(
blinks until the AlarmACK operation is carried out if Indicator
is set to Hold.)
: Alarm release
: Alarm output release (when blinking is cleared through the
AlarmACK operation)
7
Cursor (selects an alarm)
The alarm information number of the alarm on the screen’s bottom
line and the number of alarm entries in internal memory.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-19
1.4 Display
Message Summary
You can display a list of messages and when they were written.
• Up to 450 messages can be displayed.
• Up to 50 added messages can be displayed.
• You can select message information to access the historical trend of the display data
or event data that contains the message.
For operating instructions, see section 5.8.
To the historical trend display
Message
Added message (blue)
The groups on which the message was written
Displays a group number, or A for all groups
Date and time when the message was written
Cursor (used to select a message)
The message number displayed on the screen’s bottom
line and the number of message entries in internal memory.
• Switching Displayed Items
You can switch between two sets of displayed items.
• Message, date and time, and group
• Message and the name of the user who wrote the message
1-20
M-4660
1.4 Display
Memory Summary
2
3
Date and time of the most recently
recorded data
Internal memory data files/
maximum number of recordable files
4
To the historical trend display
Data type
• Display data
• Event data
1
Feature Overview
You can display a list of the display and event data that is stored in internal memory.
• You can select a display data or event data entry to access its historical trend display.
• The MV displays the number of manually sampled data and report data (/M1 and /
PM1 options) samples.
For operating instructions, see section 5.9.
5
Status
Sampling count
6
Memory stop date and time
Memory start date and time
Cursor (selects a file)
7
• Switching Displayed Items
You can switch between two lists of information.
• Start and stop times
• File names
8
• Data Storage
You can save the data in the internal memory to a CF card or to USB flash memory.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-21
1.4 Display
Report Data (/M1 and /PM1 options)
You can display report data stored in the internal memory.
For operating instructions, see section 5.5.
Report type
Start:
Start date and time
Timeout: Report date and time
Unit
Report data status
Indicates whether any of the following
occurred during the report interval.
E: Error data
O: Overflow data
P: Power failure
C: Time adjustment
B: Burnout
Average, maximum, minimum, sum, or instantaneous value
Channel number
Displayed report data number/number of report data entries in internal memory
Stacked Bar Graph (/M1 and /PM1 options)
You can display the report data of each report group in a stacked bar graph.
For operating instructions, see section 5.6.
For information on report groups, see section 10.5.
• Displayed Data Type
The type of data that is displayed is determined by the report type, which is set using
the report function.
Displayed Data
Hourly + daily
Daily + weekly
Daily + monthly
Report Type
Hourly, or hourly + daily
Daily + weekly
Daily, or daily + monthly
Example: Hourly + daily display
Daily sum of all channels and the daily
sums of all report groups
If you select a bar graph, the sum of the hour
selected with the cursor will be displayed.
Daily sums (bar graph)
Hourly transition of report group sums (bar graph).
• Display Modes
You can switch the bar graph between single graph and dual graph display.
Single graph display
Dual graph display
1-22
M-4660
1.4 Display
1
Status Display
Feature Overview
These are the available status displays.
For operating instructions, see section 5.5.
• Relay Status Display
2
Displays the status of the alarm output relay and the internal switch.
• Modbus Client Status Display and Modbus Master Status Display
Display the command status.
3
Log Display
Displays all logs (operation histories).
For operating instructions, see section 5.10.
Log Type
Login
Error
Communication
FTP
WEB
E-mail
SNTP
DHCP
MODBUS
4
Description
Login and logout history, time setting history, power failure history
Error message history
Communication command history
FTP transfer history
Web operation history
E-mail transfer history
SNTP server access history
DHCP server access history
Modbus master and client transfer history
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-23
1.4 Display
4-Panel Display (only with the RD-MV2000)
You can view four different displays on one screen. The displays are all 1/4 of their
ordinary size, so they have content, format, and command limitations.
For operating instructions, see section 5.11.
Displayable Screens
Trend
Digital
Bar graph display
Overview
Alarm summary
Message summary
Memory summary
Modbus client status display
Modbus master status display
Relay status display
Report display
Stacked bar graph display
Limitations
No automatic group switching. Cannot display all channels.
No message display. Number of displayable scales is six or
less.
No automatic group switching.
No automatic group switching. No numeric value display.
Displays one representative alarm letter.
No operations. No numeric display for more than 260
channels.
Cannot use the cursor.
Cannot use the cursor.
Sums of each channel (numeric value display), report group
sums (numeric value display)
• Registering Display Configurations
You can name and register up to four 4-panel display configurations. You can access
the registered configurations by their names.
The default configurations are as follows:
Configuration
Name
MIX
ALL TREND
ALL DIGITAL
ALL BAR
1-24
Displays
Trend (group 1), digital (group 1), bar graph (group 1), overview
All trend displays (groups 1 through 4)
All digital displays (groups 1 through 4)
All bar graph displays (groups 1 through 4)
M-4660
1.4 Display
1
Other Useful Functions
If there is no user activity within a set time period, the MV will automatically switch
back to a specified display.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.15.
• Favorite Display Key
You can access often-used displays easily by registering them to the HISTORY key.
This function is available if you set the HISTORY key operation to Favorite.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.16.
• Menu Customization
You can change the contents of the function menu, which is displayed when you press
the FUNC key, and the display selection menu, which is displayed when you press the
DISP/ENTER key.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.18.
• Display Pause
You can pause the display at any time. Sampling continues while the display is
paused.
Feature Overview
• Automatic Return to a Specified Display
2
3
4
5
6
LCD Display Condition Settings
You can set the LCD Display conditions.
Display Attribute
Operation screen
background color
Historical trend screen
background color
LCD brightness
Backlight saver
Settings
You can set the screen’s background color to either black or white.
The default value is white.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.13.
You can select white, cream, black, or light gray as the background
color.
The default value is black.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.13.
You can set the LCD brightness.
RD-MV1000: Eight levels
RD-MV2000: Six levels
The default brightness level is 2.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.8.
If there is no user activity within a set time period, you can tell the
MV to automatically turn OFF or dim the LCD backlight. This helps
to extend the backlight’s life. The occurrence of an alarm or the
pressing of a key will return the screen to its ordinary brightness.
You can also activate the backlight saver using the FUNC key. The
backlight saver is disabled by default.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.8.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-25
1.5
Data Storage Functions
This section explains the types of data that the MV can record and how to store them.
Data Types
The MV can record the following types of data.
Data Type
Display data
Description
•This is the waveform data that appears on the trend display. Measured data
is recorded at the set sampling intervals. Sampling intervals are determined
by the Trend/Storage interval.
•The maximum and minimum values measured within each sampling interval
are stored.
• You can write a header character string into the file (shared with other files).
• Contains alarm and message information.
• Data formats: Text and binary (undisclosed).
Event data
•Measured data acquired at each set sampling interval. There are two
modes: one in which recording starts when a trigger event occurs, and
another in which recording takes place continuously.
• You can write a header character string into the file (shared with other files).
• Contains alarm and message information.
• Data formats: Text and binary (undisclosed).
Manually sampled data
• The instantaneous measured data values when a manual sample operation
is performed.
• You can write a header character string into the file (shared with other files).
• Data format: Text
Report Data (/M1 and /PM1 options)
•This is hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly data. Report data is recorded at
specific intervals (once a day, once a week, and so on).
• You can write a header character string into the file (shared with other files).
• Data format: Text
Snapshot data (screen image data)
•The image data from the MV display screen when a snapshot operation is
performed.
• Can be saved to a CF card.
• Data format: PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
Setup data
• The MV setup data.
• Data format: Binary (undisclosed)
• Display Data and Event Data
Display data is similar to the conventional chart-sheet recording of the past and
is useful for long-term recording. Event data is useful for when you want to record
measured data in detail.
Display data
Trend interval
Maximum value for each sampling interval
Minimum value for each sampling interval
Instantaneous sampled value
Trend/Storage interval
Event data
Measured data acquired
at the set scan interval.
Time
Scan Interval
Event data sampling interval
Display data sampling interval
1-26
M-4660
1.5 Data Storage Functions
1
Data Recording and Storage Flowchart
Measurement
channel
Computation
channel
External input
channel (MV2000 only)
.
.
.
.
.
.
Feature Overview
Measured data is recorded to internal memory and then saved to external memory.
2
Data of another device
(via communication)
.
.
.
3
Display
Sampling
Setup data
4
Internal memory
FTP server on
the network
Screen image
data
Save
Display/Event
data
CF card
5
Save
Load
6
USB flash memory
External storage medium
Internal Memory
Display data and event data are saved as files in internal memory. They are also saved
as files to an external storage medium.
Sampling
Manual
sampled data
8
9
Internal memory
Display data and event data
7
Report data
10
File
......
11
FTP server on
the network
Save operation
12
......
13
Directory on an external storage medium
App
Index
M-4660
1-27
1.5 Data Storage Functions
Display and Event Data Recording Methods
For configuration instructions, see section 4.1. For operating instructions, see section
4.4.
• Types of Recorded Data
You can choose to record display data only, event and display data, or event data
only.
Choosing What Type of Data to Record
Record the type of data that meets your needs. Use the following examples for
reference.
Example 1 To record continuous waveform data only, just like conventional chart
recorders:
Record display data.
Example 2To record waveform data continuously and record more detailed data
before and after an alarm event:
Record display data continuously and use an alarm to trigger the
recording of event data.
Example 3To continuously record data that is as detailed as possible:
Set the sampling interval and record event data.
Example 4If there is no need to record data continuously but you want to record
data when an alarm occurs:
Use an alarm to trigger the recording of event data.
• Internal Memory
Measured data is partitioned and saved to files at set intervals. The capacity of the
file-storage part of the internal memory is 80 MB, or 200 MB with large memory. If the
memory is filled, or if the total number of display and event data files exceeds 400,
older files will be overwritten.
• Display Data Recording Conditions
Item
Channel type
Sampling interval
File generation
Description
You can set the channel type to measurement, computation, or
(only with the RD-MV2000) external input.
Determined by setting the Trend/Storage interval. Choices are
available in the range of 5 s to 10 h. You cannot choose an
interval that is faster than the scan interval.
Files are generated at the set file save interval.
Time
File
Memory start/stop
1-28
File
File
Adding data
Files are also generated in these cases:
• When you generate a file manually.
• When there is a memory stop.
• When a file is generated using the event action function.
• After recovering from a power failure.
Pressing START/STOP starts recording (memory start). Pressing
START/STOP again stops recording (memory stop).
M-4660
1.5 Data Storage Functions
• Event Data Recording Conditions
File generation
Modes
Description
Same as with display data.
Choices are available in the range of 25 ms to 600 s. However, you
cannot choose an interval that is faster than the scan interval.
A file is generated when the set data length is reached.
Files are also generated in these cases:
• When you generate a file manually.
• When there is a memory stop.
• When a file is generated using the event action function.
• After recovering from a power failure.
Recording varies depending on the mode. The following modes are
available:
Free
Pressing START/STOP starts recording. Pressing START/STOP again
stops recording.
Time
File
File
File
1
Feature Overview
Item
Channel type
Sampling interval
2
3
4
5
Adding data
Single
Pressing START/STOP puts the MV into a trigger-wait state. After a
trigger event occurs, the MV will record data for the set time (Data
length). The MV will not record again even if a trigger occurs afterwards.
Trigger condition met
6
7
Time
File
Repeat
Pressing START/STOP puts the MV into a trigger-wait state. After a
trigger event occurs, the MV will record data for the set time (Data
length). After that, the MV will return to a trigger-wait state and will
record data for the set time (Data length) whenever a trigger event
occurs. To stop the recording of event data, press START/STOP again.
Trigger condition met
Trigger condition met
8
9
Time
File
10
File
Event Data Pre-trigger
The event data pre-trigger can be configured for use with triggers.
It is a function that records the data before a trigger event as event data. It is useful for
when you want to record the data before the occurrence of an alarm or other event.
The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the event data recording time (data length).
You can set it to 0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, or 100%. If you set the pre-trigger to 0%, the MV
will only record the data after the trigger event.
Trigger condition met
Pre-trigger data
12
13
Time
11
Post-trigger data
App
Event Data Recording Start Triggers
You can configure a variety of conditions as triggers for starting event data recording.
Example: Key operations, alarm occurrence, time, remote control
M-4660
1-29
Index
1.5 Data Storage Functions
• Key Initiated File Generation
You can use key operations to tell the MV to generate a file.
Key operation
Time
File
File
File
Previous files
Current file
Manually Sampled Data
Manually sampled data is stored to internal memory. When the number of manually
sampled data files exceeds 400, the oldest data files are overwritten.
Time
Manually sampled data
Report Data
Report data is stored to internal memory. When the number of report data files
exceeds 100, the oldest data files are overwritten.
Time
Report data
1-30
M-4660
1.5 Data Storage Functions
Saving to External Storage Media
• Types of external storage media
1
Feature Overview
For configuration instructions, see section 4.2. For operating instructions, see section
4.4.
2
• CF card (32 MB or more)
• USB flash memory
• Auto Save
The data in the internal memory is automatically saved to a CF card as long as the
card is left in the drive.
3
Auto Save Timing
Data Type
Display data
4
Description
Files are saved as soon as they are generated.
Time
File
File
5
File
Saved to an external storage medium
Same as display data.
A manually sampled data file is generated on the CF card when manual
sampling first occurs. Data is added to that file whenever manual sampling
occurs. A file is created every 100 data values. For operating instructions,
see section 4.4.
Report data
Report data is stored in a report data file that is generated on the CF card
when report data is first produced. Report data is added to this file at the
report filing time.
Report File Division
At the set time, the MV stops recording to the current file and begins
recording to a new file. Files can be divided in the following ways.
Report
Report File
Type
Single File
File for Each Type
Hourly
One day’s hourly report data
Daily
One month’s daily report data
Hourly and
One day’s hourly and daily
A file for each daily report
daily
report data
One day’s hourly report data
Daily and
One week’s daily and weekly
A file for each weekly report
weekly
report data
One week’s daily report data
Daily and
One month’s daily and
A file for each monthly report
monthly
monthly report data
One month’s daily report data
Event data
Manually
sampled data
6
7
8
9
10
Save Destination
CF card
11
Directory That Data is Saved To
You can specify the name of the directory that data will be saved to (the default
directory is “DATA0”). The MV will create the directory on the CF card and save data
to it.
12
Save Operation (when not using media FIFO)
If there is not enough free space on the CF card, internal memory data cannot be
saved. Before the internal memory data is overwritten, change CF cards and save the
data.
13
Save Operation (always retain most recent data file/media FIFO)
When the MV saves data files automatically, it can save files so that the newest data
files are always retained. With this method, the MV can be used continuously, and the
CF card does not need to be changed.
App
Index
M-4660
1-31
1.5 Data Storage Functions
• Operation
Old
Deleted
Date Last Updated
File 1
File 2
New
File 3
Saved
File 4
Medium
When saving data to the CF card, if there is not enough space to save a new file,
the oldest files are deleted and then a new file is saved. This operation is referred
to as FIFO (First In First Out).
• FIFO is only used when the following files are saved automatically. When files
are saved using other methods, FIFO is not used.
Display data files, event data files, report data files, manually sampled data files,
and screen snapshot data files.
• Files subject to deletion
All files in the destination directory, except for the ones listed below, are subject
to deletion.
Files not subject to deletion: Hidden files, read-only files, and files contained
within subdirectories in the destination directory.
• The most recent 1000 files are retained. If there are more than 1000 files in the
destination directory, even if there is enough free memory, older files will be
deleted so that the file number remains at or below 1000.
• When there are already more than 1000 files in the destination directory, one or
more files are deleted before the new file is saved. In this case, the number of
files is not kept at or below 1000.
• Manual Save (collectively storing unsaved data)
Unsaved data in the internal memory is saved to an external storage medium
connected to the MV when a certain operation is carried out.
Save operation
Time
File
File
Previously saved
File
Saved this time
When using manual save, it is important that you save the data in the internal memory
to the external storage medium before the data is overwritten. Be aware of the
condition of the internal memory, and save data to the external storage medium at the
appropriate times.
Save Destination
You can select a CF card or USB flash memory.
Directory That Data Is Saved To
You can specify the name of the directory that data will be saved to (the default
directory is “DATA0”).
1-32
M-4660
1.5 Data Storage Functions
• File Names
Type
Date
Description
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Report data
7-digit
2
. Extension
Date
Specified string
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633.DAD
7-digit
3
Type . Extension
Date
Specified string
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633HD.DAR
Sequence
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Report data
7-digit
. Extension
Specified string
4
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.DAD
7-digit
Specified string
Type . Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA0HD.DAR
Batch name
Display data
Event data
Report data
7-digit
5
. Extension
Batch name
Ex.: 000123_BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB.DAD
7-digit
Date
Type . Extension
6
Ex.: 000123_050928_174633HD.DAR
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Item
7-digit
Date
7-digit
Date
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_050928_174633.DAM
Description
Consists of a 6-digit number and 1-character delimiter.
6-digit
A sequence number in the order of occurrence. The number ranges from
number
000001 to 999999. If the number reaches 999999, it returns to 000001.
1-character Starts with ‘_’ and takes on the following values: A to Z and 0 to 9.
If a file with the same name exists in the specified directory, the file is
delimiter
saved by changing the delimiter to prevent overwriting.
Example: If a file named “000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.DAD” already exists,
the file is saved to the name “000123AAAAAAAAAAAA.DAD.”
YYMMDD_hhmmss
1
Feature Overview
The MV can name measured data files automatically saved to the CF card in one of
the following three ways.
YY: Year (lower two digits), MM: Month, DD: Day
hh: Hour, mm: Minute, ss: Second
Specified string AAAAAAAAA•••A
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used
Batch name
BBBBBBBBBBB•••B
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used
Type
H_, D_, W_, M_,
HD, DW, DM
Report data type
H_: Hourly, D_: Daily, W_: Weekly, M_: Monthly,
HD: Hourly and daily, DW: Daily and weekly,
DM: Daily and monthly
Extension
Display data:
Event data:
Manual sampled data:
DAD, TDD
DAE, TDE
DAM
Report data:
Snapshot data:
Setup data:
7
8
9
10
11
DAR
PNG
PDL
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-33
1.5 Data Storage Functions
• Saving Data with Key Operations (DATA SAVE MODE)
The following data save operations can be performed whether in auto save or manual
save mode.
For operating instructions, see section 5.9.
Data Save Type
SELECT SAVE
ALL SAVE
M.SAMPLE SAVE
REPORT SAVE
Description
Saves the selected display data or event data file.
Saves all data in the internal memory.
Saves all manually sampled data in the internal memory.
Saves all report data in the internal memory.
You can switch to DATA SAVE MODE immediately after connecting USB flash
memory.
For operating instructions, see section 4.10.
Save Destination
You can select a CF card or USB flash memory.
Directory That Data Is Saved To
A directory is made with the same name as the destination directory plus the date and
time added on at the end. Then, data is saved to that directory.
Directory name: [Specified directory name]_YYMMDD_HHMMSS
Example: If a file is saved on January 30, 2008 at 17:06:42, the file will be saved to a
directory with the name DATA0_080130_170642. (If DATA0 is the ordinary destination
directory name).
Note
The number of directories that can be created on an external storage medium depends on the
length of the directory names. When the specified directory name is five characters long, about
170 directories can be created. When it is 20 characters long, about 120 directories can be
created. An error will occur if the limit is exceeded.
Other Types of Saveable Data
• Setup Data
You can save the MV setup data to a CF card or to USB flash memory. The setup data
is saved to the root directory.
Setup data file name
Specified
. PDL
Example: ABCD10005.PDL
For operating instructions, see section 4.9.
• Snapshotdata
The MV display is saved to the CF card as a PNG file. It is saved in the same directory
as display and event data. For information about file naming, see the previous page.
Time
CF card
Snapshot
Data file
For operating instructions, see section 4.6.
Saving Data via an Ethernet Network
Using the FTP client function, display data, event data, report data (/M1 or /PM1 option),
and screen image data (snapshot data) can be automatically transferred and saved to
an FTP server via an Ethernet network. The MV can also function as an FTP server. You
can access the MV from a personal computer and retrieve and store data files from both
internal and external memory.
See the Communication Interface User’s Manual IM RD-MV1000-17E.
1-34
M-4660
1.6
1
Batch Function
Batch Information
Feature Overview
You can add the batch information listed below to display data and event data files. You
can use batch information to manage display and event data files.
For configuration and operation instructions, see section 4.3.
2
3
• Batch Number and Lot Number
Display data and event data files can be recognized by their batch and lot numbers.
The lot number does not have to be specified.
• Batch number (up to 32 characters)
• Lot number (up to eight digits)
• Automatic Lot Number Incrementation
The lot number can be automatically incremented when memory sampling is stopped.
4
5
• Text Field
You can enter eight text fields into a file. Each text field consists of the following:
• Field title (up to 20 characters)
• Field string (up to 30 characters)
6
Text fields can be shown on the MV screen with key operations.
• Batch Comment
You can enter three comments into a file. Each comment can be entered once while
memory sampling is in progress.
• Comment 1, Comment 2, and Comment 3 (up to 50 characters each)
7
8
Using the Batch Function
See the figure below. You could enter the operator and administrator in the text field.
Batch number + lot number
Memory
start
9
Memory
stop
Comment
Time
Text field
10
Comment
Data file
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-35
1.7
Event Action Function
The event action function performs a specified action when a specified event occurs. The
remote control function (/R1 option) is configured using the event action function.
For configuration instructions, see section 7.1.
Event
• List of Events
You can choose from the following events:
Event
Remote
Relay
Switch
Timer
MatchTimeTimer
Alarm
UserKey
Level/edge*
Level/edge
Level/edge
Level/edge
Edge
Edge
Level/edge
Edge
Description
Remote control input ON or OFF.
Alarm output relay activation or deactivation.
The internal switch value (0 or 1).
Timer timeout
When a specified time is reached.
An alarm is occurring/no alarms are occurring
When the USER key is pressed.
* For a description of level and edge, see “Miscellaneous” in this section.
• Timers
There are four kinds of timers. They are also used with the TLOG computation
function (/M1 and /PM1 options).
Types of Timers
Absolute timer
Relative timer
Timer set
Ref. time
A
Timeout
A
A
Time
A
Timer set
Timer reset
B
A: Interval
Time
B
B: Interval
• Absolute Time Mode
The timer expires at the times determined by the reference time and the interval.
The reference time can be set to the hour (00 to 23).
Example:Reference time: 00:00
Interval:
10 min
The timer expires at 00:00, 00:10, 00:20, ... 23:40, and 23:50. For
example, if the timer is set at 09:36, the timer expires at 09:40, 09:50,
10:00, and so on.
• Relative Time Mode
Timing begins when the timer is set, and the timer expires and then begins timing
again at each interval. With this mode, the timer will stop when there is a power
failure and will not resume afterwards.
Example: Interval: 00:15
The timer expires every 15 minutes.
1-36
M-4660
1.7 Event Action Function
• Match Time Timer
Specified Date/Time
Month, day, hour
Day and hour
Day of the week and hour
Hour
Description
Occurs once a year.
Occurs once a month.
Occurs once a week.
Occurs once a day.
1
Feature Overview
You can set four match time timers. Specify the date/time using the method described
below. For each timer, you can select whether to use the timer once or continuously.
The timers are also used with the TLOG computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options).
2
3
Actions
• List of Actions
4
You can choose from the following actions.
Action
MemoryStart/Stop
MemoryStart
MemoryStop
Trigger
Level/Edge*
Level
Edge
Edge
Edge
AlarmACK
Edge
MathStart/Stop**
MathStart**
MathStop**
MathReset**
Level
Edge
Edge
Edge
SaveDisplay
Edge
SaveEvent
Edge
Message
Edge
Snapshot
DisplayRate1/2
Edge
Level
ManualSample
TimerReset
Edge
Edge
DisplayGroupChange
Edge
Flag**
Level
PanelLoad
Edge
TimeAdjust
Edge
Description
Starts or stop memory sampling.
Starts memory sampling.
Stops memory sampling.
Triggers the recording of event data. Valid
when recording event data in a triggered
mode. See the next page for more details.
Stops alarm output.
Valid when the MV is configured to use the
alarm output release (AlarmACK) operation.
Starts or stops computation.
Starts computation.
Stops computation.
Resets the values on all computation
channels.
Saves the display data currently being
recorded to internal memory. This is the
same as saving data by pressing FUNC.
Saves the event data currently being
recorded to internal memory. This is the
same as saving data by pressing FUNC.
Writes a message.
Can be executed during memory sampling.
Saves an image of the screen.
Switches between the first and second trend
update intervals.
Valid when the MV is set to be able to switch
between trend intervals.
Executes manual sampling.
Resets the relative timer. Timing begins
again from the point where the timer is reset.
See the next page for more details.
Changes the display group in the trend,
digital, or bar graph display.
0 (normal) or 1 (when an event occurs).
Flags can be used in computation channel
expressions.
Reads the setup data file in the root directory
of the CF card and uses it to configure the
MV. See the next page for more details.
Sets the time to the closest hour. See the
next page for more details.
* For a description of level and edge, see “Miscellaneous” in this section.
**This is an option.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-37
1.7 Event Action Function
About TimerReset
If Event is set to Relay, Switch, MatchTimeTimer, or Alarm, TimerReset will not result
in a timeout (an action will not be executed even if the timer is used as an event).
If Event is set to Remote or UserKey, a timeout will occur (if the timer is used as an
event, an action will be executed).
About PanelLoad
PanelLoad can only be specified as an action when Event is set to Remote.
PanelLoad loads a setup data file, LOAD1.PDL, LOAD2.PDL, or LOAD3.PDL, in
the root directory of the CF card onto the MV, and uses it to configure the MV. Only
settings that pertain to Setting Mode are updated.
You must create a setup file and save it to the CF card in advance.
Event Trigger Operation
When Event is set to Relay, Switch, or Alarm:
The Trigger action will always occur when an output relay is activated, when an
internal switch is set to 1, or when an alarm occurs. However, the number of times the
trigger is activated depends on the event data mode (Single or Repeat).
About TimeAdjust
TimeAdjust can only be specified as an action when Event is set to Remote.
TimeAdjust sets the MV internal clock to the closest hour.
• Operation When the MV is Not Memory Sampling
Difference from the Nearest Hour
0 s to 1 min 59 s
2 min to 57 min 59 s
58 min to 59 min 59 s
Operation
Truncates the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00
min 00 s.
The time is not changed.
Rounds up the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00
min 00 s.
• O
peration When the MV is Memory Sampling (See section 1.11 for
details.)
If the time difference between the time when the remote control signal is applied
and the nearest hour is within the preset time, the time is gradually corrected.
Otherwise, the time is corrected immediately.
1-38
M-4660
1.7 Event Action Function
1
Miscellaneous
The checked combinations are valid.
Event
Action
AlarmACK
TimerReset
PanelLoad
TimeAdjust
Other actions
Remote





Relay
Switch
Timer





MatchTime
Timer


Alarm
UserKey







Feature Overview
• Limitations on Event and Action Combinations
2
3
• Level and Edge
The levels and edges of events affect the levels and edges of actions as shown below.
Type
Event
Operation
Edge
Edge
5
Level
Action
Level
4
Status 1
Edge
Status 2
Operation
executed
6
Operation
executed
Level and Edge of the Remote Control Input Signal
Level
7
Edge
ON
OFF
8
250 ms or more
For contact inputs, the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to
closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open. For open collector
signals, the remote signal rises when the collector signal (voltage level of the remote
terminal) goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes from low to
high.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-39
1.8
Security Functions
Key Lock
The Keylock function prohibits key operations. You must enter a password to release the
key lock.
For configuration instructions, see section 8.1.
Key Lock Item
Keys
Access to memory devices
PanelLoad
Action of Function
1-40
Description
The following keys can be locked independently.
START/STOP, MENU, USER, DISP/ENTER (prohibits switching
operation screens), HISTORY, and T/DIV.
Prohibits all operations listed below.
• The manual saving of data
• The loading of display and event data files
• The loading of setup data files
• The listing of files stored to memory
• The deletion of files stored to memory
• The formatting of memory devices
Only prohibits the loading of a setup file from a media device.
The following FUNC key operations can be locked
independently.
• AlarmACK
•Message, Free message, Batch, Add message, Add free
message, and Text field
• Math start, Math stop, Math reset, and Math ACK
•Save display, Save event, Manual sample, Trigger, Snap
shot, Timer reset, and Save stop
•E-Mail start, E-Mail stop, FTP test, and operations to request
or release network information
• SNTP and Time settings (Setting Mode operations)
•Favorite regist, 4Panel, Standard display, Second speed,
Normal speed, Pause Display, LCD Saver
M-4660
1.8 Security Functions
Login Function
• Login and Logout
You enter your user name and password to log into the MV in the following cases.
MV Access Method
Keys
2
3
When the Method is Required
• When the power is turned ON
• When logging in after exiting Basic Setting Mode
• When logging in after logging out
When accessing the setting/measurement server, FTP server,
maintenance/test server, or Web server.
Communication
1
Feature Overview
With the login function, only registered users can operate the MV. Access from
communication functions can also be limited to users registered here.
For configuration instructions, see section 8.2. For operating instructions, see section
8.3.
4
Auto Logout (when logged in using keys)
After logging in by using keys, you are automatically logged out when there is no key
operation for a specified time. If you are automatically logged out from Setting Mode,
the setting changes are cancelled. Automatic logout does not occur while in Basic
Setting Mode.
5
6
Operations Available while Logged Out
When logged out, you can switch operation screens by using DISP/ENTER, and
HISTORY.
7
• User Levels
There are two user levels: “Admin,” and “User.”
Administrator
Administrators can perform all operations on the MV. At least one administrator must
be registered to use the login function.
8
Item
Number of users that
can be registered
Limitations
Login method
ID information
9
Description
5
No limitations.
Select key operation, via communication, or Web server login.
User name and password
10
User
Item
Number of users that
can be registered
Limitations
Item
30
Key operations
Operation
Basic Setting Mode
Setting Mode
Menu customize
Other operations
Operation mode
Key operation
11
Limitations
Not allowed
Not allowed
Specified with user
privileges
Specified with user
privileges
12
•
Login method
ID information
User privileges
You can set operation privileges for each user. The available
settings are the same as those available for the key lock function.
Operations via communication
See the Communications Interface User’s Manual.
Select key operation, via communication, or Web server login.
User name and password
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-41
1.9
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /
PM1 options)
Computation Functions
Expressions can be defined in special computation channels by using measured data or
computed data as variables. The computation channel data can be displayed or saved.
For configuration instructions, see section 10.1.
• Dedicated Computation Channels
Model
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, RD-MV2008
RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024
RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RDMV2040, RD-MV2048
Number of
Channels
12
24
60
Channel
Numbers
101 to 112
101 to 124
101 to 160
• Operations
In the table below, [001] represents the measured value of channel 001.
Type
Basic
arithmetic
Power
Square root
Absolute
value
Common
logarithm
Natural
logarithm
Exponent
Relational
computation
Example
001+002
001–002
001*002
001/002
001**002
SQR(001)
ABS(001)
Description of the Example
Determines the sum of [001] and [002].
Determines the difference between [001] and [002].
Determines the product of [001] and [002].
Divides [001] by [002].
n
Determines [001] to the power of [002]. y=X
Determines the square root of [001].
Determines the absolute value of [001].
LOG(001)
Determines the common logarithm of [001]. y=log10x
LN(001)
Determines the natural logarithm of [001]. y=lnx
EXP(001)
001.LT.002
Determines e to the power of [001]. y=e
The result is 1 when [001] is less than [002] and 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is less than or equal to [002]
and 0 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is greater than [002] and 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is greater than or equal to [002]
and 0 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is equal to [002] and 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is not equal to [002] and 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] and [002] are nonzero and 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] or [002] is nonzero and 0 when
neither of them are.
The result is 0 when [001] and [002] are both zero or both
nonzero, and 1 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is zero and 0 otherwise.
Determines the sum of [001].
Determines the maximum value of [001].
Determines the minimum value of [001].
Determines the average value of [001].
Determines the difference between the maximum value
and minimum value of [001].
001.LE.002
001.GT.002
001.GE.002
001.EQ.002
001.NE.002
Logical
computation
001AND002
001OR002
001XOR002
TLOG
computation*
NOT001
TLOG.SUM(001)
TLOG.MAX(001)
TLOG.MIN(001)
TLOG.AVE(001)
TLOG.P-P(001)
x
* See page 1-43 for information on how to use this function.
1-42
M-4660
1.9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Special
computation:
Example
Description of the Example
CLOG.SUM(001.002.003)
Determines the sum of [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.MAX(001.002.003)
Determines the maximum value among [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.MIN(001.002.003)
Determines the minimum value among [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.AVE(001.002.003)
Determines the average value of [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.P-P(001.002.003)
Determines the difference between the maximum value and
the minimum values among [001], [002], and [003].
PRE(001)
Determines the previous value of [001].
101=HOLD(001.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried out to
derive the computed value. When [001] exceeds K01, the
previous computed value is held.
Explanation
HOLD(a):b
When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value is held.
RESET(101.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried out to
derive the computed value. When [101] exceeds K01, the
previous computed value is reset, and TLOG.SUM(001) is
carried out.
3
4
6
7
Reset
Explanation
RESET(a):b
When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value is reset, and b is
carried out to derive the computed value.
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried out
to derive the computed value. When the computed value is
greater than or equal to K01, the computed result is the excess
(computed value – K01).
8
9
10
K01
Explanation
CARRY(a):b
Conditional
equation
2
5
K01
K01
1
Feature Overview
Type
CLOG
computation
Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the computed value
X of b is less than a, the computed result is X. If X is greater
than or equal to a, the computed result is the excess (X – a).
[001.GT.K01?001:001+002]
When [001] is greater than K01, the computed value is set to
the value of [001].[001]Otherwise, the computed value is set to
the value of [001] + [002].
Explanation
If the computed result of a is nonzero, b is carried out.
[a?b:c]
Otherwise, c is carried out.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-43
1.9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• Data That Can Be Used in Equations
The data listed below can be used in equations.
Data
Measurement channel data
Computation channel data*
External input channel data*
Constants
Communication input data
Status of remote control*
input
Pulse input*
Notation
001, etc.
101, etc.
201, etc.
K01 to K60
C01 to C60
D01 to D08**
Internal switch status
Alarm output relay* status
P01 to P08
Q01 to Q08**
S01 to S30
I01 to I36
Flag
F01 to F08
* This is an option.
Description
Specify by channel number.
Specify by channel number.
Specify by channel number.
Set to numeric values.
Data set through communications.
The value is 1 when remote control input is
ON and 0 when it is OFF.
Counts the number of pulses per scan interval.
Counts the number of pulses per second.
1 or 0.
The value is 1 when activated and 0 when
deactivated.
1 or 0. Set the flag using the event action
function (for details, see section 1.7).
** Values such as 01 are terminal numbers.
The table below shows the data that can be used with TLOG, CLOG, and PRE.
Checked data is usable.
Data Meas.
CH
Math Func.
TLOG

CLOG

PRE

Other Functions

Comp.
CH
Ext.
input CH








Constant Comm.
Input
Remote Pulse Internal
Switch













Relay Flag


For example, TLOG.SUM(S01), CLOG.AVE(001.002.K01), and PRE(S01) are not allowed.
• Order of Operation
Computation functions are performed every scan interval, starting with the smallest
channel number.
Example: If you specify 102 = 101 + 103, the value of the previous scan interval is
used for the 103 value.
• How Computation Functions Handle Units
In computations, measured values are handled as values without units. For example,
if the measured data from channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel
002 is 20 V, the computed result of 001 + 002 is 40.
• How Computed Data Is Displayed
You can set a span for the computed data displayed on each computation
channel. Computation channels can be displayed on all operation screens, just like
measurement channels.
For configuration instructions, see section 10.3.
• Alarms
You can set a maximum of four different alarms on each computation channel. The
alarm types are high limit alarm (H), low limit alarm (L), delay high limit alarm (T), and
delay low limit alarm (t).
• How Computed Data Is Saved
Just as with measured data, computation channel computed data can be saved as
display data, event data, manually sampled data, and report data.
• Computation Data Dropout
A computation data dropout occurs if a mathematical operation is not completed within
the scan interval.
• The computation icon in the status display section turns yellow.
• When a computation data dropout occurs, the computed data of the scan interval in
which the dropout occurred is set to the same value as the data immediately before
the dropout.
• If computation data dropout occurs frequently, reduce the load on the CPU by
reducing the number of computation channels or by setting a longer scan interval.
For operating instructions, see section 10.4.
1-44
M-4660
1.9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• How Numeric Values Are Displayed and Recorded
Display/Recorded Value
+Over
-Over
Computed Data Status
• +Display range-out: When the computed result exceeds 99999999
•+Computation range-out: When the value exceeds approximately
3.4×1038 in the middle of computation.
• When a computation error* occurs (You can select +Over or –Over.)
• –Display range-out: When the computed result is less than -9999999
•–Computation range-out: When the value goes below approximately
–3.4×1038 in the middle of computation.
• When a computation error* occurs (You can select +Over or –Over.)
* Computation errors occur when the following computations are carried out.
• X/0, SQR(–X), or LOG(–X)
• When a channel number set to Skip or Off is used in an expression
1
Feature Overview
The range of displayable values for computed data, ignoring the decimal point, is
–9999999 to 99999999. The decimal place is determined by the location of the
decimal point on the computation channel’s minimum span value. Regardless
of maximum and minimum span value settings, all computed values within the
aforementioned range of displayable values will be displayed. Non-numeric values are
displayed in these circumstances.
2
3
4
5
• Rolling Average
The computation channel’s computed value is the rolling average of the computed
result of the expression specified for the channel. The number of samples and the
sampling interval can be specified for each computation channel. The rolling average
is applied over the time corresponding to: the number of data samples × the sampling
interval. The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour, and the maximum number of
samples is 1500.
• Starting Computation Operations
You can configure the MV to start computation operations when you press START/
STOP.
6
7
• TLOG Computation
8
Timer Assignment
9
TLOG computation determines the sum, maximum value, minimum value, average,
or the difference between the maximum and minimum values of a specific channel for
each interval determined by a timer.
Timers are assigned separately to each channel.
Units in Sum Operations
When using the sum operation (TLOG.SUM), set the unit (referred to as sum scale) of
the values to be summed.
You can select from Off, /s, /min, and /h. For details, see the next page.
10
Resetting the TLOG Computed Value
11
You can select whether or not to reset the TLOG computed value at every interval.
The figure below illustrates the reset operation for sum computation (TLOG.SUM).
Example: Result of the TLOG.SUM computation
Timer timeout
Reset: On
1
2
3
Reset
Reset
Reset
12
13
Reset: Off
When reset is On, the sum is calculated over each interval. When reset is Off, the sum
of all values since the beginning of computation is calculated.
App
Power Failure Operation, Handling of Abnormal Data, and Handling of
Overflow Data
See “Special Data Handling Cases and Exceptions” in this section.
M-4660
Index
1-45
1.9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Report Function
This function is used to create hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports.
For configuration instructions, see section 10.5.
• Report Data Types
You can select four of the following types of report data: maximum value, minimum
value, average value, sum value, and instantaneous value.
• Report Types
Type
Hourly report
Daily
Weekly report
Monthly report
Description
Produces report data for the previous one hour every hour on the hour.
Produces report data for the previous day every day at a specified time.
Produces report data for the previous week every week at a specified time on
a specified day of the week.
Produces report data for the previous month at a specified day and time.
• Combinations of Reports That Can Be Produced
The MV can produce hourly reports, daily reports, hourly and daily reports, daily and
weekly reports, and daily and monthly reports.
• Source Channels
You can select the source channels from measurement channels, computation
channels, and external input channels. Report data is not produced for channels that
are set to Skip or Off.
Model
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, RD-MV2008
RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024
RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040,
RD-MV2048
Number of Report Channels
12
24
60
• Units in Sum Operations
With sum operations, data is summed over the scan interval. However, for flow rate
values and other values whose units are time based (/s, /min, /h, or /day), a simple
summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result, because
the scan interval and the time unit of the input value are different. In such cases, set
the sum unit, (the Sum scale parameter in the MV interface), to match the unit of the
input value so that a sum with the same unit as the input value is calculated.
For example, if the scan interval is 2 s, and the input value is 100 m3/min, a simple
summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute. However, if
the sum unit is set to /min, then 2 s/60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the
value is added giving a result that has the right time based (m3/min) unit.
The following conversion equations are used to compute the sum. The scan interval
unit is seconds.
Off: Σ(the measured data at every scan interval)
/s: Σ(the measured data at every scan interval) × the scan interval
/min: Σ(the measured data at every scan interval) × the scan interval/60
/h: Σ(the measured data at every scan interval) × the scan interval/3600
/day: Σ(the measured data at every scan interval) × the scan interval/86400
• Displaying Report Data
You can display report data by using key operations.
For configuration instructions, see sections 5.5 and 5.6.
• Saving Report Data
See section 1.5.
• Report Data Values
1-46
The range of displayable values for report data, ignoring the decimal point, is
38
38
–9999999 to 99999999 (except –3.4×10 to 3.4×10 for sum values).
For special cases and exceptions, see “Special Data Handling Cases and
Exceptions” in this section.
For details on the report file format, see appendix 3.
M-4660
1.9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Special Data Handling Cases and Exceptions
• Power Failure Data Handling (for TLOG and reports)
If a power failure occurs when the report function is enabled or in the middle of a
TLOG operation, the report and TLOG operations resume when the MV recovers from
the power failure. The operation executed after recovery varies depending on whether
the MV recovers from the power failure before or after the report or TLOG data
production time.
Time of Recovery
After the data
production time
Before the data
production time
Operation
The report or TLOG data is produced immediately after the MV
recovers. The measured data up to the time of the power failure
is used. When the next report or TLOG is produced, the data after
recovery from the power failure is used.
After the MV recovers, the report or TLOG is produced at the data
production time. The measured data is used with the data for the
power failure period left out.
1
Feature Overview
This section explains special data handling cases and exceptions for TLOG computation,
CLOG computation, and reports.
2
3
4
5
• Handling of Abnormal Data (TLOG, CLOG, and reports)
If an error occurs in channel or other data, the abnormal data is discarded, and the
computation continues. If all of the data is abnormal, an error message is produced.
The following result in abnormal data:
• When channels are set to Skip or Off.
•When an error value is returned as a measured result on a measurement channel (A/
D converter failure, etc.).
• When a measurement channel is in a burnout condition
• When an error value is returned as the computed result on a computation channel.
• When an external input channel is Off or when data is not being received from it (in
cases such as when communication is prohibited).
6
7
8
• How Overflow Data Is Handled
*
Overflow data refers to range-out values on measurement, computation, and external input
channels.
For TLOG, CLOG, and reports
9
Channel overflow data is handled in the following ways:
Operation
Average, Sum
Description
You can choose from three methods of handling the data: ERROR,
SKIP, and LIMIT.
ERROR: Treats the data as a computation error.
SKIP:
Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
LIMIT:
Replaces the data with the limit value and continues the
computation.
The limit value is the span upper or lower limit, or the scale
upper or lower limit of the channel.
Maximum, minimum, You can choose one of two methods of handling the data: OVER, or
maximum-minimum SKIP.
OVER:
Performs the computation using the overflow data.
SKIP:
Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
For Multiplication, and Relational Computations EQ and NE
Operation Type
Multiplication
.EQ.
.NE.
M-4660
Calculated Values
0*(+Over)
0*(-Over)
(+Over)*0
(-Over)*0
(+Over).EQ.(+Over)
(-Over).EQ.(-Over)
(+Over).NE.(+Over)
(-Over).NE.(-Over)
10
11
12
13
Computed Result
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
App
Index
1-47
1.10 FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 Option)
FAIL Output
When a failure occurs in the MV CPU, the MV outputs a relay contact signal (1 signal).
The relay is energized when the CPU is normal and de-energizes when a CPU failure
occurs. Therefore, relay output is carried out when the power is turned OFF (or when
there is a power failure). You cannot change this behavior.
Relay Operation
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
During normal operation
When a failure occurs
When power is turned OFF
* NO: Normally Opened, C: Common, NC: Normally Closed
If a failure occurs, contact your nearest Omega dealer for repairs.
1-48
M-4660
1.10 FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 option)
Device Status Output
Status
Description
Status of the internal
memory or CF card
Measurement error
Communication error
Memory stop
*
Corrective Action
Internal memory error.
Contact your nearest Omega
dealer for repairs.
When the auto save to the CF card function is On.
•The free space on the CF card has Replace the CF card.
dropped to 10% of the total size.
(only when FIFO is disabled. For
details on FIFO, see section 1.5.)
•CF card error.
•Replace the CF card.
•Use the MV to format the CF
card (the CF card data will
be deleted).
However, the status of the internal
Insert a CF card.
memory is output when the CF card
is not inserted.
*
•10 MB or less of available space
remaining in internal memory.
•The number of files in internal
memory for which Auto Save to the
CF card has not been completed
has exceeded 390.
When the auto save to the CF card function is Off.
*
Save the data in the internal
•10 MB or less of available space
remaining in internal memory.
memory to the CF card.
•The number of files in internal
memory that have not been
manually saved has exceeded
390.
A/D converter error.
Contact your nearest Omega
dealer for repairs.
Burnout detected.
Replace the thermocouple
that has burned out.
Modbus master or Modbus client
Check the error by using the
communication error.
Modbus master or Modbus
client display and perform
corrective actions.
FTP file transmission error.
Check the FTP log and
perform corrective actions.
Memory sampling has stopped.
Start memory sampling.
The internal memory’s “available space” refers to the following areas:
• Unused areas of internal memory
•Data areas for which Auto Save or Manual Save (see section 1.5 for details) has been
completed.
1
Feature Overview
The following status notifications are output with a relay contact signal. You can choose
whether or not to output each kind of status notification. The relay is energized when the
status occurs. This cannot be changed.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.6.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Relay Operation
13
NO
C
NC
During normal
operation
NO
C
NC
When specified
status occurs
NO
C
NC
When power is
turned OFF
App
Index
M-4660
1-49
1.11 Other Functions
Time Related Functions
• Time Correction
The MV internal clock can be changed in the following ways.
Method
Key operation
Event action function
SNTP client function
Description
Use to set the MV to a specified time.
Sets the MV internal clock to the closest hour.
Sets the MV internal clock to the time retrieved from an SNTP server.
Time Correction Operation
The time correction operation varies depending on whether or not memory sampling is
in progress.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.1.
Status
No memory sampling
Memory sampling
Operation
The MV internal clock is changed immediately.
The MV internal clock is gradually corrected. While the time is being
gradually adjusted, the date/time in the status display section is
displayed in yellow.
Gradual Correction of the Internal Clock
If the time deviation between the time of the MV internal clock and the correct time (the
specified time) is within a specified value, the MV clock is adjusted gradually at 40 ms
for each second. Otherwise, the clock is corrected immediately. The maximum value
of time deviation (referred to as tm in the figure below) can be selected from within the
range of 10 s to 5 min.
Time when a remote control
signal is applied (Time on the MV)
Time specified manually or retrieved
from an SNTP server
Time on the MV
Time deviation
tm
tm
Range in which the time is
gradually adjusted
Nearest hour
Time deviation
tm
tm
Range in which the time is
gradually adjusted
Example: When changing the time to 12 hours 55 minutes 35 seconds when the time
on the internal clock is 12 hours 55 minutes 32 seconds
The time deviation of 3 seconds is adjusted by 40 ms per second. The internal
clock will be fully synchronized to the specified time after 75 seconds.
• Date Format
You can select from the following ways of displaying the year, month, and day:
2008/01/23, 01/23/2008, 23/01/2008, and 23.01.2008.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.1.
• Time Zone
You can set the time difference between the location where the MV is used and GMT.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.1.
• Daylight Saving Time (DST)
If the MV is used in a region that has DST, the time is switched automatically between
DST and standard time at two user-specified times. For configuration instructions, see
section 9.1.
1-50
M-4660
1.11 Other Functions
System Display
Language
The displayed language can be set to English, Japanese, German, French, Chinese, or
Korean.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.4.
1
Feature Overview
This function displays the total number of inputs on the MV, the size of the internal
memory, the communication functions, the external storage drive, the options, the MAC
address, and the firmware version number.
For operating instructions, see section 9.3.
2
3
4
USB Interface
You can connect USB devices, such as keyboards and USB flash memory, to the two
USB ports located on the front and back of the MV.
• You can operate the MV with a keyboard.
• You can save and load measured data and setup data from USB flash memory.
Connectable devices: 109/104 keyboards and USB flash memory
For configuration instructions, see sections 4.10 and 9.7.
5
6
24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply (/TPS2, or /TPS4 option)
Provides 24-VDC power to up to two (/TPS2) or four (/TPS4) two-wire system
transmitters. Transmitters output 4- to 20-mA current signals. You can connect these
signals to an MV input terminal and display measured values.
MV
Transmitter power
supply output
terminal
Input terminal
+
7
Current
–
8
Transmitter
+
–
9
Shunt resistor: 250 Ω
External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
These channels handle measured data that is received from other devices through
communication functions. 240 channels are available. External input channel data can be
displayed and saved in the same ways as measurement channel data.
For configuration instructions, see sections 11.1 and 11.2.)
Temperature Unit
When measuring temperature with a thermocouple or RTD, you can set the unit to °C or
°F.
For configuration instructions, see section 9.2.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
1-51
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
2.1
1
Where and How to Install
Location
2
Install the MV indoors in an environment that meets the following conditions:
Install the MV in a location where the temperature is 0 to 40°C, and the humidity is 20
to 80% RH (5 to 40°C). Only use the MV when there is no condensation on it.
Note
Condensation may form when moving the MV from a low temperature/humidity environment to
a high temperature/humidity environment, or when there is a sudden change in temperature.
Temperature/humidity changes may also result in thermocouple measurement errors. In these
kinds of circumstances, wait for at least an hour before using the MV, to acclimate it to the
surrounding environment.
Installation and Wiring
• Temperature of 0 to 40°C
3
4
5
• Altitude of 2,000 m or below
• Good ventilation
To prevent overheating, install the MV in a well-ventilated area. We recommend that
you leave 50 mm or more of space around the top, left, and right of the MV.
• Not much mechanical vibration
Install the MV in a location without much mechanical vibration. Placing the MV in a
place that is subject to large levels of mechanical vibration will not only put added
stress on its components, it may also impede ordinary measurement.
6
7
• Flat surface
Install the MV on a flat surface, neither leaning to the left nor to the right. The MV can
be tilted if the stand is used.
8
Do not install the MV in the following places:
• Outdoors
• In an environment with flammable or explosive gases, steam, or dust
(dangerous places)
• In direct sunlight or near heating devices
9
Install the MV in a place that is near room temperature (23°C) and that is not subject
to very much temperature fluctuation . Placing the MV in direct sunlight or near
heating devices can cause adverse effects on the internal circuitry.
• In an environment with excessive amounts of soot, steam, moisture,
dust, or corrosive gases
10
11
Soot, steam, moisture, dust, and corrosive gases will adversely affect the MV and
should be avoided.
• Near strong magnetic fields
Install the MV in a place with a magnetic field of less than 400 A/m. Do not bring
magnets or instruments that produce electromagnetic fields close to the MV. Operating
the MV near strong magnetic fields can cause measurement errors.
12
• Where the display is difficult to see
The MV uses an LCD screen so viewing of the display from an extreme angle is
difficult. Install the MV so that the user can view the display directly from the front.
13
App
Index
M-4660
2-1
2.1 Where and How to Install
Installation
Install the MV on a flat surface.
Note
•
•
You cannot put the MV in a stack.
You can put rubber feet on the bottom of the RD-MV2000. Please use the ones that come
with the RD-MV2000.
• Using the stand
When using the stand, push it out until it locks into place. When retracting the stand
on the RD-MV2000, fold the stand back while pushing inward on it.
2-2
M-4660
2.2
1
Signal Input Terminal Wiring
Wiring to the Signal Input Terminals
WARNING
• To prevent electric shock, make sure that the power source is turned OFF.
Installation and Wiring
WAR
2
3
CAUTION
• Exposing the input and output signal cables connected to the MV to high tension
may damage the cables and the MV terminals. Do not stretch the cables to their
limit, and make sure that the terminals are not being pulled on.
• To prevent fire, only use signal cables with a temperature rating of 70°C or
above.
• Do not run a current through any of the input terminals that exceeds the voltages
below. Doing so may damage the MV.
• Maximum input voltage: ±60 VDC
•Maximum common mode voltage: ±60 VDC (under measurement category II
conditions)
• The MV is an installation category II product.
4
5
6
7
Wiring Precautions
Take the following precautions when wiring the input signal cables:
When using a screw terminal, we recommend that you use a crimp-on lug with an
insulation sleeve (designed for 4-mm screws).
8
Crimp-on lug (designed for 4 mm screws) with an insulation sleeve
When using a clamp terminal, we recommend that you use the following kind of cable:
• Conductive cross-sectional area: 0.08 mm2 to 1.5 mm 2(AWG28 to 16)
• Stripped section: Approx. 7 mm
Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit.
• Move the measurement circuit away from the power cable (power circuit) and ground
circuit.
• Ideally, the object being measured should not generate noise. However, if this is
unavoidable, isolate the measurement circuit from the object. Also, ground the object
being measured.
• Shielded wires minimize the noise caused by electrostatic induction. Connect a shield
to the ground terminal of the MV as necessary (make sure you are not grounding at
two points).
• To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction, twist the measurement circuit
wires at short, equal intervals.
• Make sure to ground the protective ground terminal through minimum resistance (less
than 100 Ω).
When using internal reference junction compensation on a thermocouple input,
take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal.
• Always use the terminal cover.
• Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation (we recommend a
cross-sectional area of 0.5 mm2 or less).
• Make sure that the ambient temperature remains reasonably stable. Large
temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF.
M-4660
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
2-3
2.2 Signal Input Terminal Wiring
Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal
degradation, affecting all connected devices. If you have to make a parallel
connection, then
• Turn the burnout detection function OFF.
• Ground the instruments to the same point.
• Do not turn other instruments ON or OFF during operation. This can have adverse
effects on the other instruments.
• Do not connect RTDs in parallel.
Wiring Procedure
There is a terminal cover screwed onto the signal input terminal block on the rear panel.
It has a label indicating the terminal arrangement on it.
1. Turn the MV OFF and remove the terminal cover.
2. Connect the signal wires to the terminals.
3. Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws. The appropriate tightening
torque for the screws is 0.6N/m.
Note
It may be difficult to firmly secure input signal wires with diameters of 0.3 mm or less to clamp
terminals. To secure the wires, try folding the conductive parts over when you connect them to
the clamp terminal.
Input Terminal Arrangement
Location of the Input Terminal Blocks
• RD-MV1000
Input terminal block 1
Input terminal block 2
• RD-MV2000
2-4
Input terminal block 3
Input terminal block 1
Input terminal block 4
Input terminal block 2
M-4660
2.2 Signal Input Terminal Wiring
1
Input Terminal Block Channel Assignments
The following table shows which channels are assigned to which terminal blocks.
Input
terminalblock
Input
terminalblock
1
2
3
4
RD-MV2000 Channel Assignment
RDRDRDRDMV2008 MV2010 MV2020 MV2030
1–4
1-10
1-10
1-10
5-8
11-20
11-20
21-30
RDMV1024
1–12
13-24
RDMV2040
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
2
Installation and Wiring
1
2
RD-MV1000 Channel Assignment
RDRDRDRDMV1004 MV1006 MV1008 MV1012
1–4
1-4
1-6
5-8
1-12
3
RDMV2048
1-12
13-24
25-36
37-48
4
This picture shows where the channel inputs are located on each terminal block.
Screw terminal
Input terminal block of
the MV1004, MV1008,
and MV2008.
MV1006 input
terminal block
CH4 CH2
CH3 CH1
CH3 CH1
/b
+/A
–/B
CH6 CH4 CH2
CH5 CH3 CH1
/b
+/A
Input terminal block of
the MV1012, MV1024,
and MV2048.
CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
CH9 CH7
CH5 CH3 CH1
+/A
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
CH10 CH8
6
7
8
/b
+/A
–/B
9
CH6 CH4 CH2
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
/b
+/A
–/B
/b
+/A
–/B
CH6 CH4 CH2
/b
–/B
/b
+/A
–/B
CH4 CH2
CH5 CH3 CH1
–/B
Input terminal block of
the MV2010, MV2020,
MV2030, and MV2040
5
Clamp terminal
/b
+/A
–/B
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
2-5
2.2 Signal Input Terminal Wiring
Screw Terminal Wiring
TC input
DC voltage input/DI (ON/OFF) input
Compensating leadwire
+
+
+
DC voltage input
–
–
–
RTD input
DC current input
b
+
A
B
B
A
–
b
+
DC current input
–
Shunt resistor
Example: For 4 to 20 mA input, use a
shunt resistor of 250 Ω ± 0.1%.
Lead wire resistance per wire of
10 Ω or less. Make the resistance
of the three wires equal.
Clamp Terminal Wiring
Connect the wires
Remove the terminal block
Recommended length
of stripped wire:
7 mm
Connect the terminal block
Flat-blade
screwdriver
Recommended wire size
0.08 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG28 to 16)
Hold both ends of the terminal
block and pull straight.
Input signal wire
First, loosen the screw at the front using
a flat-blade screwdriver. Insert the input
signal wire into the slit on the left side of
the terminal block, and fasten the screw
at the front.
Hold both ends of the terminal
block, align it with the connector,
and then push it in.
Note
RTD input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel. Terminal b is shorted internally
across all channels. On models with the /N1 option (Cu10, Cu25 RTD input/3-wire isolated
RTD) or the /N2 option (3-wire isolated RTD), terminal b is also isolated on each channel.
2-6
M-4660
2.3
1
Optional Terminal Wiring
Wiring to Optional Terminals
2
• To prevent electric shock, make sure that the power source is turned OFF.
• If you are going to apply a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC to the
output terminals, use round crimp-on lugs with insulation sleeves on all output
terminals to connect the signal cables so that the wires won’t slip out even if the
screws loosen. Also, use cables that comply with double insulation requirements
(dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more). For voltages below 30 VAC/ 60 VDC,
use cables that comply with basic insulation requirements (dielectric strength
of 1390 VAC or more). To prevent electric shock, attach the terminal cover after
wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals.
Installation and Wiring
WARNING
3
4
5
6
CAUTION
• Use the following circuit voltages for the connection to the alarm/FAIL/status
output terminal.
• When the connection is to Mains Circuits (primary AC power source circuits):
150 V or less
• When the connection is to circuits derived from Mains Circuits (secondary
circuits): 250 V or less
(keep the Mains Circuit voltage at less than 300 V, and use an isolation
transformer.)
• To prevent fire, only use signal cables with a temperature rating of 70°C or
above.
• Exposing the input and output signal cables connected to the MV to high tension
may damage the cables and the MV terminals. Do not stretch the cables to their
limit, and make sure that the terminals are not being pulled on.
• Do not short the transmitter power supply output terminal or apply external
voltage to it. Doing so may damage the MV.
• When using the transmitter power supply output terminal, do not use current that
exceeds the maximum output current (25 mADC). Doing so may damage the
MV.
7
8
9
10
11
Note
For remote control wiring, use shielded wires to reduce noise. Connect the shield to the
functional ground terminal or to the ground terminal of the MV.
12
We recommend that you use crimp-on lugs (designed for 4 mm screws) with
insulation sleeves to connect to the optional terminals.
13
Wiring Precautions
Crimp-on lug (designed for 4 mm screws) with an insulation sleeve
App
Index
M-4660
2-7
2.3 Optional Terminal Wiring
Wiring Procedure
As shown in the figure below, the optional terminal block is located on the rear panel. The
MV is only equipped with an optional terminal block when an option that requires input/
output, such as the alarm output relay (/A options), FAIL/status output relay (/F1 option),
and remote control function (/R1 option), is installed . There is a terminal cover screwed
onto the optional terminal block. It has a label indicating the terminal arrangement on it.
1. Turn OFF the MV and remove the terminal cover.
2. Connect the signal wires to the terminals.
3. Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws. The appropriate tightening
torque for the screws is 0.6N/m.
Optional Terminal Arrangement
Location of the Optional Terminal Blocks
• RD-MV1000
Optional terminal
block 1
• RD-MV2000
Optional terminal
block 2
Optional terminal
block 1
2-8
M-4660
2.3 Optional Terminal Wiring
1
Optional Terminal Block Assignment
Symbols
NC Letters such as NC: Indicate the terminal's functions.
Pulse input
H, L: See “Pulse Input
Terminals (/PM1)”
in this chapter.
Transmitter power supply output
+ , –: See “24VDC Transmitter
Power Supply Output
Terminal (/TPS2, /TPS4)”
in this chapter.
Unused terminal (screws included).
2
Installation and Wiring
Alarm, FAIL, status output Remote
NC: Normally closed
1 to 8: Remote control
C: Common
terminal numbers
NO: Normally opened
C:
Common
3
Unused terminal (no screws included).
Options that only use terminal block 1
4
1
1
5
/A1
/A2
Alarm
/A3
Alarm
Alarm
02
01
04
03 02
01
06
05 04
03 02
01
NC
NC
NC
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO NO
NO
/A1/R1
C
NO NO
C
C
NO NO
/A2/R1
Alarm
01
NC
NC 6
3
C
C
7
4
NO
NO 8
5
C
Remote
04
03 02
01
NC
NC NC
NC 6
1
C
C
2
NO
NO NO
/R1
C
C
3
7
4
NO 8
5
C
1
2
Alarm
Remote
6
7
8
3
4
5
C
1
2
03 02
01
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC 6
3
C
C
C
C
C
7
4
NO
1
NO NO
NO 8
5
2
C
C
NO NO
02
01
Status output
FAIL
04
Alarm
03 02
01
NC
NC
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
NO
NO
NO NO
NO
8
9
/A2/F1
Alarm
NC
NO
Remote
05 04
NC
NO
7
06
/A1/F1
Status output
FAIL
C
NO
/A3/R1
Alarm
Remote
02
C
6
C
C
NO NO
10
11
NO
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
2-9
2.3 Optional Terminal Wiring
(Continued from previous page)
FAIL
Status
output
/F1 /R1
/A1 /PM1
Alarm
output
Remote
control
input
NC
NC
6
3
C
C
7
4
NO
NO
8
5
02
FAIL
02
01
8
NC
H H H 3
C
C
C
L
NO
NO NO
+ +
- -
Transmitter
power
supply
+ +
- -
7
L
NO
/A1 /TPS2
Alarm
output
02
01
NC
NC
C
C
NO
NO
/TPS2
6
C
NC
H H H 3
C
1
C
C
L
1
2
NO
NO
L
L
4
5
Remote
control
input
Pulse
input
NC NC
Transmitter
power
supply
7
2
L
Remote
control
input
8
7
04
03 02
01
NC NC
NC
H H H 3
C
C
C
C
L
4
NO
1
NO NO
5
2
H H H 3
4
1
L
5
2
L
/A1 /R1 /TPS2
+ +
- -
Transmitter
power
supply
Alarm
output
L
C
4
1
5
2
C
8
7
L
6
L
NO
01
NC
NC 6
3
C
C
C
7
4
1
NO
NO 8
5
2
+ +
- -
Status
output
Remote
control
input
Pulse
input
8
7
6
NC
NC
H H H 3
C
C
C
L
4
NO
1
NO
5
2
L
L
Remote
control
input
02
/R1 /TPS2
FAIL
6
C
Transmitter
power
supply
Remote
control
input
Pulse
input
/F1 /PM1
Pulse
input
6
/A2 /PM1
NC
/PM1
NC
C
8
NC
/A1 /F1 /PM1
Status
output Alarm
output
01
Alarm
output
Remote
control
input
Pulse
input
Remote
control
input
6
3
C
7
4
1
8
5
2
Option that only uses terminal block 2
/TPS4
2
Transmitter power supply output
+ + + +
- - - -
2-10
M-4660
2.3 Optional Terminal Wiring
1
Options that use terminal blocks 1 and 2
/A3/F1
2
Alarm
1
15 14
13 12
11
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
NO
C
NO NO
C
NO NO
2
NO
Status output
NC
NC
C
C
NO
NO
1
3
/A3/F1/R1
Alarm
16
15 14
13 12
11
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
NO
C
NO NO
C
NO NO
FAIL
NC
2
NO
Status output
Remote
NC
C
6
3
C
C
NO
7
4
1
NO
8
5
2
1
Alarm
Pulse input
15 14
13 12
11
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
NO
NO NO
C
C
NO NO
8
2
/A3/F1/PM1
16
15 14
13 12
11
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
C
NO NO
C
NO NO
FAIL
2
NO
16
15 14
NC NC
C
C
NO
C
NO NO
13 12
4
1
5
2
L
7
H H H 3
C
C
C
L
4
NO
1
NO
5
2
01
NC NC
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
C
C
NO
NO NO
NO NO
NO
C
/A4/R1
13 12
11
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC
C
C
C
C
C
NO NO
NO
2
1
8
9
Alarm
03 02
2
L
6
7
Remote
NC
L
1
6
NC
05 04
C
L
Pulse input
06
15 14
NO NO
L
NC
16
C
C
11
Alarm
NO
H H H 3
8
/A4
Alarm
NC
Status output
Remote
6
NO
Alarm
NO
7
4
5
/A3/PM1
16
2
Installation and Wiring
16
NC
FAIL
C
NO NO
1
NO
Alarm
11
Remote
06
05 04
03 02
01
NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC 6
3
C
C
7
4
1
NO 8
5
2
C
C
NO
NO NO
C
C
C
NO NO
10
1
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
2-11
2.3 Optional Terminal Wiring
Alarm Output Terminal, FAIL Output Terminal, and Status Output Terminal (/A1, /
A2, /A3, /A4, and /F1)
NC
Output format:
Relay contact
Contact rating:
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistor load)
Withstand voltage: 1600 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
(between output terminals and the ground terminal)
C
NO
Remote Control Input Terminal (/R1)
• Relay contact input
(voltage-free contact)
Contact closed at 200 Ω
Contact open at 100 kΩ or greater
6
3
C
7
8
4
5
1
2
• Transistor input (open collector)
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (30 mADC)
Leakage current when turned OFF:
0.25 mA or less
6
3
C
7
8
4
5
1
2
Withstand voltage: 1000 VDC for one minute between
input terminals and the ground terminal
Internal circuit
5V
1~ 8
C
Input format:
Photocoupler isolation
Shared common (C)
Allowable input voltage:
5 VDC
Pulse Input Terminal (/PM1)
• Relay contact input
(voltage-free contact)
Contact closed at 200 Ω or less
Contact open at 100 kΩ or greater
8
H
L
6
H
H
L
L
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (30 mADC)
Leakage current when turned OFF:
0.25 mA or less
8
7
6
H
H
H
L
L
L
Withstand voltage: 1000 VDC for one minute between
input terminals and the ground terminal
H
L
2-12
7
•Transistor input (open collector)
Internal circuit
5 V Input format:
Photocoupler isolation
Shared common (L)
Allowable input voltage:
30 VDC
M-4660
2.3 Optional Terminal Wiring
1
24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Terminal (/TPS2, /TPS4)
Connect the MV to the transmitter as shown below:
MV
2
Current
+
Installation and Wiring
Transmitter power
supply output
–
terminal
Transmitter
3
+
Input terminal
–
4
Shunt resistor: 250 Ω
Note
To reduce noise, use a shielded cable for wiring. Connect the shield to the functional ground
terminal or to the ground terminal of the MV.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
2-13
2.4
Connecting the Power Supply
Connecting the Power Cord (if the power supply voltage suffix code is -1)
• Precautions to Be Taken While Connecting the Power Supply
Make sure to follow the warnings below when connecting the power supply. To prevent
electric shock and damage to the MV, observe the following warnings.
WARNING
• Make sure that the power supply voltage matches the MV rated supply voltage
and is within the maximum voltage range specified for the power cord.
• Confirm that the power switch is OFF before connecting the power cord.
• To prevent electric shock, be sure to use a power cord provided by Omega for
use with the MV.
• To prevent electric shock, make sure to ground the MV. Insert the desktop power
cord into a grounded 3-prong outlet.
• Do not use an ungrounded extension cord. If you do, the device will not be
grounded.
Use a power supply that meets the following conditions:
Item
Rated supply voltage
Operating supply voltage
range
Rated supply frequency
Power supply frequency range
Maximum power consumption
Condition
100 to 240 VAC
90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz ± 2%
RD-MV1000:45 VA (100 V), 60 VA (240 V)
RD-MV2000:65 VA (100 V), 90 VA (240 V)
Note
Avoid using a power supply voltage of 132 to 180 VAC with the MV because such a power
supply voltage may reduce measurement accuracy.
• Connection Procedure
1. Check that the power switch is OFF.
2. Connect the MV power cord to the power inlet on the rear panel.
3. Make sure that the power outlet meets the conditions listed above and that the
power supply voltage is within the maximum voltage range specified for the power
cord. Then, plug the power cord into the power outlet. Use a grounded 3-prong
outlet.
2-14
M-4660
2.4 Connecting the Power Supply
1
Wiring to the Power Terminal (if the power supply voltage suffix code is -2)
When Using an AC Adapter
• Precautions to Be Taken While Connecting the Power Supply
Make sure to follow the warnings below when connecting the power supply. To prevent
electric shock and damage to the MV, observe the following warnings.
• To prevent electric shock, make sure that the power source is turned OFF.
• Only use the power cord that Omega provides for use with the MV.
• Confirm that the power source voltage matches the specifications of the AC
adapter before connecting the power cord.
• When you do not plan on using the MV for a while, remove the AC adapter cord
from the AC outlet.
• Only use a Omega AC adapter.
• Do not place objects on top of the AC adapter or power cord, and keep them
away from heat sources.
• When removing the plug from the power outlet, do not pull on the cord. Pull from
the plug. If the power cord is damaged, contact your nearest Omega dealer.
Installation and Wiring
WARNING
2
3
4
5
6
Use a power supply that meets the following conditions:
Item
Rated supply voltage
Operating supply voltage
range
Rated supply frequency
Power supply frequency range
Maximum power consumption
Condition
100 to 240 VAC
90 to 264 VAC
7
50/60 Hz
48 to 62Hz
RD-MV1000: 45 VA (100 V), 60 VA (240 V)
RD-MV2000: 65 VA (100 V), 90 VA (240 V)
8
9
• Connection Procedure
1. Check that the power switch is OFF.
2. Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power terminal.
Use a round crimp-on lug (designed for 4-mm screws) with an insulation sleeve.
The appropriate tightening torque for the screws is 1.4 to 1.5 N/m.
Note
10
11
Functional ground terminal
Do not wire the protective grounding
cord to the functional ground terminal.
12
Power cord
Protective
grounding cord
13
3. Attach the power terminal cover (transparent), and fasten it with screws.
App
Index
M-4660
2-15
2.4 Connecting the Power Supply
When Using a DC Power Supply
• Precautions to Be Taken While Connecting the Power Supply
Make sure to follow the warnings below when connecting the power supply. To prevent
electric shock and damage to the MV, observe the following warnings.
WARNING
• To prevent electric shock, make sure that the power source is turned OFF.
• To prevent fire, use cables with a cross-sectional area of 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) or
more.
• Use crimp-on lugs (designed for 4 mm screws) with insulation sleeves to
connect both the power cord and the protective ground.
• To prevent electric shock, be sure to attach the electrical wiring cover
(transparent).
Use a power supply that meets the following conditions:
Item
Rated supply voltage
Operating supply voltage range
Maximum power consumption
Specification
12 or 24 VDC
10 to 28.8 VDC
RD-MV1000: 24 VA
RD-MV2000: 35 VA
• Wiring Procedure
1. Make sure that the power source is OFF. Open the power terminal cover
(transparent).
2. Follow the instructions in “When using an AC adapter” and connect the positive
and negative cables and the protective ground cable to the power terminal.
3. Attach the power terminal cover (transparent), and fasten it with screws.
2-16
M-4660
Chapter 3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
3.1
Setting the Scan Interval and the A/D Converter
Integration Time
This section explains how to set the scan interval and the A/D converter integration time.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.2.
1
2
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > A/D,
Memory.
3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
4
5
6
Settings
• Scan interval>Scan mode
Normal: Measures at the normal mode scan interval.
Fast:Measures at a scan interval of 25 ms (RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, and RDMV2008) or 125 ms (RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024, RD-MV2010,
RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, RD-MV2048). Fast sampling mode
is not available on models equipped with external input channels (/MC1). For
details, see section 1.2.
7
8
• Scan interval>Scan interval
The selectable settings appear.
9
• Scan interval>A/D integrate
When the scan mode is set to Normal, select an appropriate A/D integration time. Only
the selectable settings are displayed.
Setting
Auto
50Hz
60Hz
100ms
600Hz
Description
The MV automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the integration
time to 16.7 ms for 60Hz and 20 ms for 50 Hz. The integration time is fixed at 20 ms
(50 Hz) if you are using a 12-VDC power supply.
Sets the integration time to 20 ms.
Sets the integration time to 16.7 ms.
Sets the integration time to 100 ms (when the scan interval is 2 s or 5 s).
The A/D integration time for fast sampling mode. You cannot change this value.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-1
3.2
Setting Burnout and Reference Junction
Compensation
This section explains how to set the function that detects sensor burnouts in
thermocouple and 1-5V inputs as well as how to set the reference junction compensation
method of the thermocouple.
Display
Press MENU then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Burnout, RJC.
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.
• Burnout > Mode
Detects thermocouple and 1-5V input sensor burnouts.
Setting
Off
Up
Down
Description
Does not detect sensor burnouts.
When the MV detects a burnout, it sets the measured result to “+Over.” The
measured value is displayed as “Burnout.”
For 1-5V input, the MV detects a sensor burnout when the measured value exceeds
the scale upper limit by 10% of the scale width. (Example: With a scale of 0 to 100,
burnout is detected at values above 110.)
When the MV detects a burnout, it sets the measured result to “–Over.” The
measured value is displayed as “Burnout.”
For 1-5V input, the MV detects a sensor burnout when the measured value goes
below the scale lower limit by 5% of the scale width. (Example: With a scale of 0 to
100, burnout is detected at values below –5.)
• RJC > Mode
Select either Internal or External as the thermocouple input reference junction
compensation method.
Setting
Internal
External
Description
Uses the MV reference junction compensation function.
Uses an external reference junction compensation function. When the method is set
to External, the Volt setting is displayed.
• RJC > Volt
If you set Mode to External, enter the compensation voltage.
Setting
Voltage
3-2
Description
The compensation voltage that is added to the input. Set the value in the range of
–20000 μV to 20000 μV.
M-4660
3.3
1
Setting the Input Range
This section explains how to set the input range for each channel.
2
Display
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Range, Alarm.
3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
4
5
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
6
Select the target channels.
• Range > Mode
Setting
Skip
Volt, TC, RTD, DI, 1-5V
Description
Not measured.
Input type. Represents DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD,
ON/OFF input, and 1-5V inputs, respectively.
Difference computation, linear scaling, and square root
computation.
Delta, Scale, Sqrt
7
8
Select the checked settings for the modes listed below.
Setting
Volt
Type
Range
Span Lower
Span Upper
Scale Lower
Scale Upper
Unit
Ref. CH
Low-cut
Low-cut value



TC
RTD






DI



Mode
Delta Scale












9
Sqrt
1-5V
Skip












10



11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-3
3.3 Setting the Input Range
• Range > Type
Input type when Mode is set to Delta or Scale. See the explanation of Mode.
• Range > Range
These are specific input settings.
Setting
20mV
60mV
200mV
2V
6V
20V
50V
Pt
JPt
Level
Contact
1-5V
Input Type
–20,000 mV to 20.000 mVDC
–60.00 mV to 60.00 mVDC
–200.00 mV to 200.00 mVDC
–2.0000 V to 2.0000 VDC
–6.000 V to 6.000 VDC
–20.000 V to 20.000 VDC
–50.00 V to 50.00 VDC
Pt100
JPt100
ON/OFF (Voltage)
ON/OFF (Contact)
0.800 V to 5.200 V
Note
Standard
Setting
R
S
B
K
E
J
T
N
W
L
U
WRe
Input Type
Type R
Type S
Type B
Type K
Type E
Type J
Type T
Type N
Type W
Type L
Type U
Type WRe
Note
Standard
Setting
Input Type
Note
Setting
Input Type
Note
K
PLATI
PR
NiMo
W/WRe
N2
Pt50
Ni1
Ni2
Ni3
J263
Cu53
Cu100
Pt25
Kp vs Au7Fe
PLATINEL
PR40-20
NiNiMo
W/WRe26
Type N (AWG14)
Pt50
Ni100 (SAMA)
Ni100 (DIN)
Ni120
J263*B
Cu53
Cu100: a = 0.00425 at 0°C
Pt25
/N3 option
Cu1
Cu2
Cu3
Cu4
Cu5
Cu6
Cu25
Cu10 (GE)
/N1 option
Cu10 (L&N)
Cu10 (WEED)
Cu10 (BAILEY)
Cu10: a = 0.00392 at 20°C
Cu10: a = 0.00393 at 20°C
Cu25: a = 0.00425 at 0°C
• Range > Span Lower,Span Upper
The input range. The range of available settings will be displayed on the screen.
Note
•
•
You cannot set Span Lower and Span Upper to the same value.
When Mode is set to 1-5V or Sqrt, you can only set Span Lower to a value that is less than
Span Upper.
• Range > Scale Lower, Scale Upper
The input range after unit conversion.
You can set the scale values to anywhere from –30000 to 30000. The decimal place is
determined by the Scale Lower setting. It can be set to the following positions: X.XXXX,
XX.XXX, XXX.XX, XXXX.X, or XXXXX.
Note
•
•
•
3-4
The MV converts the measured value to a value within the range set by the Scale Lower
and Scale Upper values with their decimal points removed. For example, if you set the scale
range to –5 to 5, the range of converted values will be 10, but if you set the scale range to
–5.0 to 5.0, the range of converted values will be 100. The resolution of values converted
within the range of 10 will be less than that of values converted within the range of 100. For
a clear view, set the scale values so that the range of converted values is greater than 100.
You cannot set Scale Lower and Scale Upper to the same value.
When Mode is set to 1-5V or Sqrt, you can only set Scale Lower to a value that is less than
Scale Upper.
M-4660
3.3 Setting the Input Range
1
• Range > Unit
Set the unit (up to six characters,
Aa#1)
• Range > Ref. CH
2
The reference channel for difference computation.
• Range > Low-cut
3
Select On to use the low-cut function.
*
The low-cut value for 1-5 V input is fixed at 0% of the input span.
With square root computation, set the low-cut value in the range of 0.0% to 5.0% of
the input span.
Measured value
Measurement Channels and Alarms
• Range > Low-cut value
4
5
Result of square root computation
Low-cut value
6
Input value
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-5
3.4
Setting the Moving Average of the Input
This section explains how to set the measurement channel moving average function.
This function suppresses the effects of noise.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.2.
Display
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Moving average.
Settings
Scan Interval
Average value
Average value
Count
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.
• Moving average > On/Off
Select On to use the moving average function.
• Moving average > Count
Set the number of moving average data points from within the range of 2 to 400.
3-6
M-4660
3.5
1
Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function
This section explains how to configure alarm display and output relays.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.3.
2
Display
RD-MV1000
3
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Alarm
settings > Basic setting > Switch, Relay or Hysteresis.
Measurement Channels and Alarms
4
5
6
7
8
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Hysteresis.
9
10
11
12
Settings
13
• Basic setting > Reflash
To set the reflash operation on alarm output relays, select On. The reflash function
affects the first three output relays.
App
Index
M-4660
3-7
3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function
• Basic settings > Rate of change
• Decrease
Set the interval for the rate-of-change calculation of the low limit on rate-of-change
alarm by the number of sampled data points (1 to 32). The actual interval is
obtained by multiplying the value specified here by the scan interval.
• Increase
Set the interval for the rate-of-change calculation of the high limit on rate-of-change
alarm in the same manner as the interval for the low limit on rate-of-change alarm.
• Basic settings > Indicator
You can choose to make the alarm displays behave in the following ways.
Setting
Nonhold
Hold
Description
Stop when the alarm condition is released (return to normal condition).
Continue until an alarm output release (AlarmACK) operation is performed.
• Switch, Relay
• Internal Switch > AND
Select the internal switches you want to set to AND logic. Select how many
switches after and including the first switch will be set to AND logic. All other
switches will be set to OR logic.
• Relay > AND
Select the relays you want to set to AND logic. Select how many relays after and
including the first alarm output relay will be set to AND logic. All relays after the
selected last relay will be set to OR logic. Available settings are None, I01 (I01
only), I01-I02 (I01 and I02), I01-I03 (I01 to I03), etc. Only alarm output relays that
are installed are valid.
Note
When reflash is turned ON, the operation of the first three output relays is fixed to OR logic.
Specifying AND produces no effect.
• Relay > Action
Select whether to energize or de-energize the alarm output relay when an alarm
occurs. This setting applies to all alarm output relays.
• Relay > Hold
You can choose to make the alarm output relays behave in the following ways. This
setting applies to all relays.
Setting
Nonhold
Hold
Description
Stop when the alarm condition is released (return to normal condition).
Stay ON until an alarm output release (AlarmACK) operation is performed
Note
When reflash is turned ON, the operation of the first three output relays is fixed to Nonhold.
Specifying Hold produces no effect.
• Relay > Relay Action on ACK
You can select the relay output status that is enabled after the AlarmACK operation
from the following two settings.
Setting
Normal
Reset
3-8
Description
The relay output is deactivated when the AlarmACK operation is executed. If the
condition for activating the alarm output relay is met in the next scan interval, the
relay output is activated.
The operation only applies when the alarm output relay is set to Hold.
The relay output is deactivated when the AlarmACK operation is executed. If a
new condition for activating the alarm output relay is met, the relay is activated.
M-4660
3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function
An example of the relay action when AlarmACK is executed is shown below. This
example is for the case when the output relay AND item is set to None.
1
Normal
Alarm Alarm ACK
occurrence
Alarm 1
2
Alarm
occurrence
Alarm 2
Alarm output relay
3
Activated
Measurement Channels and Alarms
Deactivated
Relay is activated at the next scan interval
4
Reset
Alarm Alarm ACK
occurrence
Alarm 1
Alarm
occurrence
5
Alarm 2
Alarm output relay
Activated
6
Deactivated
Relay is activated on the next alarm occurrence
• Hysteresis > Meas CH
• High/Low
The hysteresis width for alarm occurrence/release of the high/low limit alarm that is
set for measurement channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span or scaling width.
• Delta High/Low
The hysteresis width for alarm occurrence/release of the difference high/low limit
alarm that is set for measurement channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span.
7
8
9
• Hysteresis > Math CH (/M1 and /PM1 options), Ext. CH (/MC1 option)
The hysteresis width for the alarm occurrence/release of the high/low limit alarm that
is set for computation channels and external input channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the measurement span.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-9
3.6
Hiding the Alarm Indication
This section explains how to select whether or not to hide alarm indication.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.3.
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Input, Alarm.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message, Input, Alarm.
Settings
• Alarms > No logging
Select On to hide alarm indication. Detect will appear in the alarm setting screen (see
section 3.7).
This function disables the alarm indicator and the logging of alarm events to the alarm
summary.
• How to set for each channel and each alarm
See section 3.7
3-10
M-4660
3.7
Setting Alarms on Channels
1
Display
2
3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
Configure alarms after you have set the range. A channel’s alarm settings are reset when
the following occur:
• When the input type (Volt, TC, etc.) is changed.
• When the input range is changed.
• When the upper or lower limit of the span or scale is changed on channels that are set
to linear scaling, square root computation, or 1-5V input (this includes changes in the
decimal place).
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.3.
4
• Alarms for Each Channel
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Range, Alarm.
5
6
7
• Alarm Delay
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Tag, Memory, Delay.
8
9
10
RD-MV2000
ress MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Tag, Memory sample,
P
Alarm delay.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-11
3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. All of the alarm settings selected here will be applied to
these channels.
• Alarm > 1, 2, 3, 4
Select On for the Alarms that you want to use.
• Alarm > Type
Select the alarm type.
Setting
H
L
h
Name
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm
Difference high limit alarm
l
Difference low limit alarm
R
r
T
t
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Delay high limit alarm
Delay low limit alarm
Description
−
−
You can use this alarm on measurement
channels set to difference computation.
You can use this alarm on measurement
channels set to difference computation.
−
−
−
−
The alarms for channels set to difference computation can be activated by the values
at the positions indicated below.
H, L, T, t
Input value
-
R, r, h, l
Measured value
Measured value on the reference channel
• Alarms > Value
Set the value depending on the type of alarm.
When the Channel Mode Is Volt, TC, RTD, or DI
Type
H, L
R, r
T, t
Value
Within the measurable range.
Min: The smallest number expressible, given the
decimal place. Max: The value that is equal to the
width of the measurable range (but cannot exceed
30000 after removing the decimal point)
Same as H and L
Alarm Value Range Example
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
0.0001 to 3.0000 V for 2 V range
0.1 to 1760.0°C for type R
thermocouples
Same as H and L
When the Channel Mode Is Delta
Type
H, L
h, l
R, r
T, t
Alarm Value
Within the measurable range.
Within the measurable range.
Alarm Value Range Example
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
–1760.0 to 1760.0°C for type R
thermocouples
Min: The smallest number expressible, given the
0.0001 to 3.0000 V for 2 V range
decimal place. Max: The value that is equal to the 0.1 to 1760.0°C for type R
width of the measurable range (but cannot exceed thermocouples
30000 after removing the decimal point)
Same as H and L
Same as H and L
When the Channel Mode Is Scale, Sqrt, or 1-5V
3-12
Type
H, L
Alarm Value
From –5% to 105% of the scale width.
But within the range of –30000 to
30000, ignoring the decimal point.
R, r
Within the range of 1 to 30000,
ignoring the decimal point.
T, t
Same as H and L
Alarm Value Range Example
–5.0 to 105.0 for a scale of 0.0 to 100.0.
–120.00 to 300.00 for a scale of –100.00 to
300.00.
0.1 to 3000.0 for a scale of 0.0 to 100.0.
0.01 to 300.00 for a scale of –100.00 to 300.00.
Same as H and L
M-4660
3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels
1
• Alarms > Relay
Turn relay output On or Off.
• Alarms > No.
2
Select the output relay or internal switch number when Relay is On.
• Alarms > Detect
• Alarm delay > Time (for delay high/low limit alarms)
Set the alarm delay time to an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
•
4
5
Note
•
3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
The Detect setting is displayed if the alarm hide function (for details, see section 3.6)
is enabled. To display notifications when alarms are activated, select On. If you select
Off, when an alarm is activated, a signal will be sent to the alarm output relay and
internal switch, but no notification will be displayed. And the alarm will not be recorded
in the alarm summary.
The alarm delay time takes on a value that is an integral multiple of the scan interval. For
example, if the alarm delay time is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s, the actual delay
time is 6 s.
The delay alarm has the following special operations.
• If a delay alarm is set on a computation channel and computation is stopped when the
computed value exceeds the alarm setting, the alarm is turned On after the specified
period (delay period) elapses.
• The alarm detection operation is reset if a power failure occurs. The operation restarts
after the power recovers.
• If the alarm setting of the delay high limit alarm is changed when an alarm is
already activated and the input is greater than or equal to the new setting, the alarm
continues. For all other cases, the alarm detection operation starts using the new
setting. This is also true for the delay low limit alarm.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-13
3.8
Releasing Alarm Output
This operation is valid when:
• Indicator is set to Hold in Basic Setting Mode
• Relay Hold is set to Hold and Relay Action on ACK is set to Normal in Basic Setting
Mode
• Relay Action on ACK is set to Reset in Basic Setting Mode.
For Hold and Relay Action on ACK configuration instructions, see section 3.5.
Procedure
Perform this operation after an alarm occurs.
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the AlarmACK soft key.
The alarm output is released.
Explanation
• Alarm Output Release (AlarmACK)
When an AlarmACK operation is carried out, the indications and outputs (relays and
switches) of all activated alarms are cleared.
3-14
M-4660
3.9
1
Calibrating Input Values (/CC1 option)
This section explains how to calibrate input values to produce measured values.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.2.
2
Display
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Calibration correction.
3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
4
5
Settings
Y4
6
Condition
X1 < X2 < X3 < X4 < X5
Y5
MES val
Y1
7
Calibration set points
Y3
Y2
Number of set points
X1 X2
X3 X4
X5
True val
8
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. You can set consecutive channels whose range is set to
the same value as that of the first channel.
9
• Number of set points
Select the number of points (including the start and end points) that will be used to
divide segments, from within the range of 2 to 16.
To disable calibration correction, select Off.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-15
3.9 Calibrating Input Values (/CC1 Option)
• Number of set points > Mes val, True val
Press the Input soft key and enter the value.
For Mes val (measured value), set a value that is greater than the previous value.
Press the Measure soft key to set the current measured value to Mes val. If you press
the Measure soft key when you are setting the calibration function for more than one
channel, the measured value of the channel set to First-CH is used as the Mes val for
all channels.
Range of Selectable Values for Mes val and True val
• On Channels Set to Linear Scaling
–30000 to 30000 (decimal place is the same as that set for the scale)
• On All Other Channels
The measurable range
Example: If the range is 2 V, –2.0000 to 2.0000
Note
•
•
3-16
If you change the Mode or Range settings, calibration correction (the Number of set points
setting) is switched Off.
You cannot set calibration correction for a channel that is set to Skip.
M-4660
1
3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 option)
This section explains how to use computation channels to count pulses that are received
from pulse input terminals.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.2.
2
Display
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Math channel > Calculation expression,
Alarm.
3
Measurement Channels and Alarms
4
5
6
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.
7
• Math range > Math On/Off
Select On.
8
• Math range > Calculation expression
You can use the following variables in equations.
Q01 to Q08: The number of pulses per second.
P01 to P08: The number of pulses per scan interval.
*
9
The numbers 01 to 08 refer to the pulse input terminal numbers.
For computation channel configuration instructions, see section 10.1.
There are examples on the next page to help explain configuration options.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
3-17
3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 option)
• Example 1: Pulse Sum
Display the sum of the pulses from pulse input terminal 6.
Pulse input
Time
Scan interval
P6
Number of pulses
per scan interval
(Sum)
TLOG.SUM
Pulse sum value
Calculation Expression
Select the channel and set the calculation expression. Set an appropriate Span
Lower, Span Upper, and Unit.
Channel
101
Calculation Expression
TLOG.SUM(P6)
Description
The sum of the number of pulses in each scan
interval.
• Example 2: Pulses Per Minute
Using the RD-MV2008 (scan interval 250 ms), count the number of pulses received by
pulse input terminal 6, and calculate the number of pulses per minute.
(Moving average over a minute)
Pulse input
Time
Sampling interval
(250 ms)
101ch
Number of pulses
per second
(60x)
102ch
Number of pulses
per minute
Calculation Expression
This table shows which calculation expressions to assign to which channels. Set an
appropriate Span Lower, Span Upper, and Unit.
Channel
101
102
Calculation Expression
Q6
101*K01
Constant
K01
Value
60
Channel
101
Rolling Average
Interval: 1 s
Number of samples: 60
Description
Number of pulses per second
Number of pulses per minute
Description
The coefficient for converting pulses per
second to pulses per minute.
Description
Moving average over a minute
Channel
Computation starts with the smallest channel number at every scan interval.
Assign larger channel numbers to computation channels that calculate pulses per
minute than you assign to computation channels that calculate pulses per second.
3-18
M-4660
3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 option)
• Example 3: Reset if the Pulse Sum Exceeds a Set Value
If the pulse sum exceeds a set value (the reset value), reset the sum and carry over
the value that exceeds the reset value. Count the number of resets, and calculate the
total pulse sum.
Calculation Expression
1
2
This table shows which calculation expressions to assign to which channels and what
constants to set.
Calculation Expression
((102+P01).GE.K01)+101
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(P01)
K01*101+102
Variable
P01
K01
Description
The number of pulses per scan interval.
A constant. The reset value. Values that exceed it are reset.
3
Description
Number of pulse sum resets
Pulse sum
The total pulse sum
4
Pulse input
Time
Scan interval
P01
Number of pulses
per scan interval
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
7
(Sum)
102ch
Sum value
8
(Resets the value below the reset value)
9
Channel 101: Reset Count
Calculates the number of pulse sum resets.
((102+P01).GE.K01) returns a value of 1 when the value of the previous pulse sum
(102) + the current pulse count (P01) is greater than or equal to the reset value
(K01). Otherwise, it returns a value of zero. The value of Channel 101 increases by 1
whenever the pulse sum exceeds the reset value.
Channel 102: Pulse Sum
10
Calculates the pulse sum.
This channel normally calculates the pulse sum, TLOG.SUM(P01). If the pulse sum
goes above the reset value (K01), the excess value is set as the new pulse sum.
11
Channel 103: Total Pulse Sum
12
This channel multiplies the reset value (K01) by the reset count (101) and adds the
pulse sum (102) to get the total pulse sum.
Note
•
•
•
M-4660
5
6
101ch
Reset count
K01
Reset value
Measurement Channels and Alarms
Channel
101
102
103
Computation starts with the smallest channel number at every scan interval. If a channel
number in a calculation expression is greater than or equal to the number of the channel
that contains the expression, the previous computed result (the previous value) of the
channel with that number will be used in the expression.
Because the computation function uses single-precision floating-point representation, we
recommend that you set the reset value below 107.
The MV will not compute values correctly if the pulse input value of a scan interval is larger
than the reset value.
3-19
13
App
Index
3.11 Setting Range-Out Detection for Linearly
Scaled Measurement Channels
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU > then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab > Input,
Alarm
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message, Input, Alarm.
Settings
• Input > Value on over-range
Setting
Free
Over
Description
Ignoring the decimal point, less than –30000 is a negative range-out, and above
30000 is a positive range-out. They are displayed as –Over and +Over.
A value less than –5% of the scale is a negative range-out, and a value greater than
105% of the scale is a positive range-out. They are displayed as –Over and +Over.
Example:If the scale is 0.0 to 200.0, a value less than –10.0 is a negative rangeout, and a value greater than 210.0 is a positive range-out.
Note
With computation and report functions such as TLOG and CLOG, you can specify how the MV
will handle scale range out values.
See section 10.1.
3-20
M-4660
Chapter 4
4.1
Measurement and Recording
Setting the Recording Conditions of Measured
Data
This section explains how to select a method for recording measured data.
For an explanation of the recording function, see section 1.5.
1
2
Display
• Data Type
3
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > A/D, Memory.
4
Measurement and Recording
5
• Measurement Channels
RD-MV1000
6
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Tag, Memory, Delay.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Meas channel > Tag, Memory sample,
Alarm delay.
7
8
9
10
• Trend/Storage interval and Save interval (for display data)
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > Disp data.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-1
4.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of Measured Data
• Event Data Recording Conditions
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > Event data.
Settings
• Memory > Data Kind
Setting
Display
E+D
Event
Description
Records display data.
Records display data and event data. You cannot select this setting if the
trend update interval switching function (Trend rate switching) is set to on
On (see section 6.3 for details)
Records event data.
• Memory sample > On/Off
Select On for the target channels.
• Disp data > Trend/Storage interval
Set the display trend/storage interval. For the trend/storage intervals that can only be
set on high-speed input models, 5 s/div and 10 s/div, 1 division (div) is equal to 40
dots.
You can only set trend/storage intervals that are longer than the scan interval you set
in Basic Setting Mode.
• Disp data > Save interval (when recording display data)
Set the size of recorded data files. Recorded data is divided into files of the size
specified here. The values that you can set here vary depending on the Trend/Storage
interval setting.
Trend/Storage
interval1
Sampling interval
Selectable Save
Interval Values
Trend/Storage
interval1
Sampling interval
Selectable Save
Interval Values
Trend/Storage
interval1
Sampling interval
Selectable Save
Interval Values
5s2
10s2
15s3
30s
1min
125ms
10 min to 12 h
2min
250ms
10 min to 1
day
5min
500ms
10 min to 3
days
10min
1s
10 min to 7
days
15min
2s
10 min to 14
days
20min
4s
10 min to 14
days
30min
10s
10 min to 31
days
1h
20s
10 min to 31
days
2h
30s
10 min to 31
days
4h
40s
1 h to 31 days
1h
1 h to 31 days
2h
1 h to 31 days
4h
2 h to 31 days
8h
4 h to 31 days
20h
8 h to 31 days
10h
1 You can only set a data interval that corresponds to a sampling interval that is slower than
the scan interval.
2 Only available on high-speed input models of the MV.
3 Selectable in fast sampling mode on medium-speed input models of the MV.
4-2
M-4660
4.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of Measured Data
1
• Event Data
• Sample rate
Select the data recording interval. Use the table under “Data length” for reference.
2
• Mode
Setting
Free
Single
Repeat
Description
Records data continuously.
Records data when a trigger condition is met.
Records data whenever a trigger condition is met.
3
• Data length
Set the size of recorded data files. Recorded data is divided into files of the size
specified here. The data lengths that you can set here vary depending on the
Sample rate setting.
1
25ms
10 min to 4 h
2s
10 min to 14
days
2min
1 h to 31 days
125ms
10 min to 1
day
5s
10 min to 31
days
5min
1 h to 31 days
250ms
10 min to 2
days
10s
10 min to 31
days
10min
1 h to 31 days
500ms
10 min to 3
days
30s
1 h to 31 days
4
1s
10 min to 7
days
1min
1 h to 31 days
Measurement and Recording
Sample rate
Selectable data
lengths
Sample rate1
Selectable data
lengths
Sample rate1
Selectable data
lengths
2
5
6
1 You cannot choose an interval that is faster than the scan interval.
2 Only available on high-speed input models of the MV.
• Pre-trigger
7
Select the amount of data before each trigger activation that you want to record.
You can select 0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, or 100% of the set Data length. If you do not
want to record any data before trigger activations, choose 0%.
8
• Trigger signal > Key
To activate a trigger with key operations, select On.
Note
•
•
You can activate triggers with the event action function (see section 7.1 for details).
If a trigger condition is met when the START/STOP key is pressed, recording will begin.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-3
4.2
Setting the Save Method for Measured Data
This section explains how to select a method for saving measured data to memory.
For an explanation of the save function, see section 1.5.
Display
• Auto save
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save, Batch.
• Display/Event Data File format, File header, and Data file name
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > File settings.
4-4
M-4660
4.2 Setting the Save Method for Measured Data
1
• Save directory
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > Save directory.
2
3
4
Settings
Setting
On
Off
Description
Automatically saves measured data to a CF card. Set to On when Media FIFO is
enabled.
Does not automatically save measured data. Manually save measured data to a
CF card or to USB flash memory.
• Save > Media FIFO
The Media FIFO box appears when you set Auto save to On.
Setting
On
Off
Description
Uses Media FIFO. With this save method, the newest data files are always kept.
Does not use Media FIFO. If the free space on the CF card is low, you will need
to change to a different CF card.
5
6
7
8
• Disp/Event File > File format
Select either Binary or Text as the format for saving display and event data.
• File header > Characters
Enter a comment to be written into data files (up to 50 characters,
Measurement and Recording
• Save > Auto save
9
A a # 1 ).
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-5
4.2 Setting the Save Method for Measured Data
• Data file name > Structure
Set the structure used for generating file names.
Setting
Date
Serial
Batch
Description
Serial number + user-specified character string + date
Serial number + user-specified character string
Serial number + batch (when using the batch function)
• Data file name > Identified strings
Set the user-specified character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 ).
You can use these symbols: # % ( ) + – . @ ° _
For an explanation of the file naming function, see section 1.5.
• Save directory > Directory name
Set the name of the directory to be saved to. (up to 20 characters, A a # 1 ).
You can use these symbols: # % ( ) + – . @ ° _
You cannot use these character combinations: “AUX” “CON” “PRN” “NUL” “CLOCK”
“COM1” to “COM9” “LPT1” to “LPT9”.
4-6
M-4660
4.3
1
Using the Batch Function
This section explains how to configure the batch function.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.6.
2
• Batch Function
RD-MV1000
3
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Batch.
4
Measurement and Recording
5
6
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save, Batch.
7
8
9
10
• Data file name
11
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > File settings.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-7
4.3 Using the Batch Function
• Text Field
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > File settings > Batch text.
Settings
• Batch > On/Off
Select On to use the batch function.
• Batch > Lot-No. digit
You can set the lot number to 4, 6, or 8 digits. Select Off to disable lot numbers.
• Batch > Auto increment
Setting
On
Off
Description
Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to the current lot
number + 1.
Turns auto increment off.
• Data file name > Structure
Batch: Creates display and event data filenames by combining the batch number
with the serial number.
For an explanation of the file naming function, see section 1.5.
• Data file name > Identified strings
For an explanation of the file naming function, see section 4.2.
• Text field number
Select a number from 1 to 8.
• Text field number > Title of field, Text field number > Characters
Enter a character string.
Title of field: Up to 20 characters,
4-8
A a # 1 . Characters:
Up to 30 characters,
Aa # 1.
M-4660
4.3 Using the Batch Function
1
Procedure
• Setting Batch Names and Comments
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
2
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Batch soft key.
The window for entering the batch number, lot number, and comments appears.
3. Set the batch number (up to 32 characters,
A a # 1 ).
3
You can use these symbols: # % ( ) + – . @ ° _
You can also set the lot number.
4. Set batch comments 1, 2, and 3 (up to 50 characters,
A a # 1 ).
4
5. Press DISP/ENTER.
•
•
•
•
After memory sampling begins, the batch number and lot number cannot be changed.
You can change comments freely before memory sampling starts. After memory sampling
starts, you can only set comments that have not yet been set. While the window for entering
comments is displayed, you can change the comments freely, but after the window is closed
the comments are fixed.
When memory sampling stops comments are cleared.
Batch numbers, lot numbers, and comments are saved in event and data files, but not in
setup files.
Measurement and Recording
Note
5
6
7
• Displaying Text Field Settings
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
8
2. Press the Text field soft key.
The text field settings appear.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-9
4.4
Starting/Stopping Recording, and Saving
Measured Data
This section explains how to start recording and save measured data to external storage
media.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.5.
Procedure
• Starting Recording (memory start)
Press START/STOP. The internal memory icon in the status display section changes
from the icon that indicates that there is no memory sampling to the icon that indicates
memory sampling.
• If you are recording display or event data in Free mode, recording will start.
• If you are recording event data in a triggered mode (Single or Repeat), the MV will
enter a trigger-wait state.
• Activating the Trigger to Start Recording
This operation can be performed while the MV is in a trigger-wait state. The MV will
display “Waiting” in the status display section.
Activating the Trigger Using Keys
This operation can be performed when you are recording event data in a triggered
mode (Single or Repeat) and you have set the trigger so that it can be activated with
key operations.
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Trigger soft key.
Recording begins.
Activating Triggers with Events (The event action function must be set.
See chapter 7.)
Recording will start when an event occurs.
• Saving Automatically
Automatic saving takes place when Auto save is set to On (see section 4.2 for
details).
Data is saved to the CF card.
Leave the CF card in its slot. During memory sampling, measured data in the internal
memory will be automatically saved to the CF card.
When you are not using Media FIFO, if the external storage media cannot be saved to
due to a lack of free space or some other problem, unsaved data will be saved along
with the current data the next time that data is automatically saved.
Using Key Operations to Save Display or Event Data during Memory
Sampling
Data is saved to the CF card.
This operation can be performed when you are recording display data or when you
are recording event data in Free mode. This operation saves the unsaved measured
data in the internal memory to the CF card.
*
If you perform this operation when the Auto save setting is Off, the data in the internal
memory will be saved as an individual file.
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Save display or Save event soft key.
The display or event data will be saved to the CF card.
Save operation
Time
File
File
File
Saved the previous time
4-10
Saved this time
M-4660
4.4 Starting/Stopping Recording and Saving Measured Data
1
• Saving Manually (collectively storing unsaved data)
Perform this operation when Auto save is set to Off (see section 4.2 for details).
You can save to a CF card or to USB flash memory.
For instructions on how to save to USB flash memory, see section 4.10.
2
1. Insert the CF card.
A confirmation window containing the message “There is data which is not saved to media.
Do you want to store to media?” appears.
The CF card icon appears in the status display section.
2. Select Yes, then press DISP/ENTER. A menu appears.
3
The unsaved data in internal memory will be saved to an external storage medium.
3. Follow these steps to remove the external storage medium.
Note
•
If there is not enough space on the storage medium, the message “Not enough free space
on media” appears, and the data is not saved. When this message appears, switch to
another external storage medium and try saving again.
You cannot cancel a data save operation as it is taking place.
•
• Stopping Recording (Memory stop)
4
Measurement and Recording
Press FUNC (to display the Function menu) > Media eject soft key > CF soft key.
When the message “Media can be removed safely” appears, remove the storage
medium.
5
6
7
1. Press START/STOP. A confirmation window appears.
8
9
10
2. Select Yes using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
If the MV is equipped with computation functions (/M1 and /PM1 options), select
Mem+Math or Memory and press DISP/ENTER.
The internal memory icon in the status display section changes to the icon that indicates
that there is no memory sampling.
11
• Using Keys to Save Selected Data or All Data in Internal Memory
See section 5.9.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-11
4.4 Starting/Stopping Recording and Saving Measured Data
Explanation
• O
perations That Begin at the Same Time as Memory Sampling (Memory
start)
• Waveform display updating on the trend display
• Reporting (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• Computation functions (/M1 and /PM1 options), if they are configured to do so.
For details, see section 10.4.
• O
perations That Stop at the Same Time as Memory Sampling (Memory
stop)
• Waveform display updating on the trend display
• Reporting (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• Computation operations (/M1 and /PM1 options), if they are being performed.
• Save Problems
The following problems may arise when the MV is continually accessing internal or
external memory. If these problems arise, the storage media access indicator will light
frequently.
• External storage media file save error
• Access timeout
These problems can be dealt with in the following ways.
• If you are using the event action function and saving small consecutive files,
increase the size of the files being saved.
• If you are saving multiple files to the same directory on an external storage
medium, change the name of the Save directory, making sure that the number of
files in the directory does not exceed 1000.
• If data recording and display are using up resources (for example if you are
recording on multiple channels using a fast sampling rate, and displaying four trend
displays on the 4-panel display), use a slower sampling rate or change the display.
4-12
M-4660
4.5
1
Saving Measured Data Manually
This section explains how to save the current values of all channels (except for channels
set to Skip or Off) through key operations.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.5.
2
Procedure
3
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Manual sample soft key.
Manual sampling begins.
4
• Manually Sampled Data in Internal Memory
You can check the number of manually sampled data files in internal memory on the
Memory Summary display (see section 1.4 for details).
• Saving to a CF Card
• If Auto save is set to On, manually sampled data will be automatically saved to a
CF card when manual sampling takes place.
• If Auto save is set to Off, use a manual save operation (see section 4.4 for details)
to save manually sampled data to a CF card or to USB flash memory.
• No matter what Auto save is set to, you can always save manually sampled data to
a CF card or to USB flash memory using a manual save operation (see section 5.9
for details).
Measurement and Recording
Explanation
5
6
7
8
Setting Which Channels to Save Manually (only on the RD-MV2000)
On models of the RD-MV2000 equipped with external input channels (/MC1 option), you
can set which channels’ (120 channels or less) current values to save.
Display
Available on models equipped with external input channels (/MC1 option).
Press MENU and then select > Menu tab > Data save > Manual sample.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-13
Settings
• Manual Sample number
Select a number from 001 to 120. Current channel values will be saved in this order.
• Manual Sample
• On/Off
To assign a channel to the set Manual Sample number, select On.
• Channel
Enter the channel number of a measurement, computation (/M1 and /PM1 options),
or external input (/MC1 option) channel.
4-14
M-4660
4.6
1
Saving Screen Image Data (Snapshot)
This section explains how to save the image data from the active display to a CF card.
This operation is referred to as Snapshot, and screen image data files are referred to as
Snapshot data files.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.5.
Procedure
1
2
3
In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Snap shot soft key.
4
Note
If you assign the Snapshot function to the USER key, you can take snapshots in all modes
(Operation Mode, Setting Mode, and Basic Setting Mode). However, error messages will not be
saved.
Measurement and Recording
The MV saves a snapshot data file to the CF card.
Displayed soft keys and message windows will not be saved.
5
6
Explanation
• File Format, Size
7
Snapshot data files are saved in PNG format.
The maximum snapshot data file size is about 15 KB per screenshot.
• File Names
8
For details, see section 1.5.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-15
4.7
Managing Stored Files
This section explains how to display a list of stored files and the amount of available
memory, how to delete files and directories, and how to format storage media.
Procedure
• Displaying Files, Deleting Files, and Checking Available Memory
To access the display:
Press MENU then select File tab > File list, delete. Press the CF or USB soft key*
then DISP/ENTER.
*
When using a CF card and USB flash memory.
Displaying a List of Files in a Directory and Checking Available Memory
Use the arrow keys to select a directory, and then press DISP/ENTER. The files in the
directory will appear in a list. / is the root directory.
Changing Files and Directory Display Order
You can arrange files by the date when they were last updated.
Pressing the Sort soft key will switch between displaying files or directories in
ascending or descending order. A marker indicating the sort order is displayed next to
Date/Time.
Deleting Files
Use the arrow keys to select a file, and then press the Delete soft key. A confirmation
window will appear. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER.
The file is deleted.
Deleting Directories
First, delete all of the files in the directory.
Select the directory. The remaining steps are the same as those for deleting a file.
Checking Available Memory
The amount of available memory is indicated at the lower right of the display.
4-16
M-4660
1
• Formatting Storage Media
Formatting will remove the contents of the storage media.
1. To access the display:
Press MENU then select File tab > Format. Press the CF or USB soft key* then
DISP/ENTER.
*
2
When using a CF card and USB flash memory.
3
4
Measurement and Recording
5
2. Enter the Volume name (up to 11 characters,
A 1 ),
and press DISP/ENTER.
A confirmation window appears.
6
3. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER.
The storage device will be formatted.
7
Explanation
• Format Types
Memory Size
Storage media with less than 512 MB of memory.
Storage media with more than 512 MB of memory.
Type
FAT16
FAT32
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-17
4.8
Loading and Displaying Measured Data from
External Storage Media
This section explains how to display the waveforms of display and event data that have
been saved in binary format to external storage media. Loaded data will be displayed on
the historical trend display.
For historical trend display operating instructions, see section 5.3.
Procedure
• Loading a File
1. To access the display:
Press MENU and then select File tab > Load display data or Load Event data.
Press the CF or USB soft key* and then DISP/ENTER.
*
When using a CF card and USB flash memory.
2. Use the arrow keys to select a directory, and then press DISP/ENTER. The files in
the directory will appear in a list. / is the root directory.
3. Select a file using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
The MV loads the file and displays its historical trend.
Note
•The extension for display data files saved in binary format is .DAD. The extension for binary
event data is .DAE.
• For details on using the Sort soft key, see section 4.7.
4-18
M-4660
4.9
1
Saving and Loading Setup Data
This section explains how to save and load setup data from external storage media.
2
Procedure
• Saving Setup Data
1. To access the display:
Press MENU and then select File tab > Save settings. Press the CF or USB soft
key* and then DISP/ENTER.
*
3
When using a CF card and USB flash memory.
4
Measurement and Recording
5
6
2. Enter the file name (up to 32 characters,
A a # 1 ).
You can use these symbols: # % ( ) + – . @ ° _
You cannot use these character combinations: “AUX” “CON” “PRN” “NUL”
“CLOCK” “COM1” to “COM9” and “LPT1” to “LPT9”.
To cancel the operation, press ESC.
7
8
3. Press DISP/ENTER.
The setup data is saved.
• Loading Setup Data
The MV loads all Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode settings. When setup data is
loaded, the previous settings are erased and the MV restarts with the loaded settings.
9
1. To access the display:
*
Press MENU and then select File tab > Load settings. Press the CF or USB soft
key* and then DISP/ENTER.
*
10
When using a CF card and USB flash memory.
11
12
13
Note
For details on using the Sort soft key, see section 4.7.
App
Index
M-4660
4-19
2. Select the setup file to be read by using the arrow keys and DISP/ENTER.
*
The setup data file is in the root directory (/).
To cancel the operation, press ESC.
3. Press the DISP/ENTER key.
The setup data is loaded.
Explanation
• Setup Data Files
• The setup data file extension is .PDL.
• The maximum setup data file size is about 200 KB.
• The following settings are also saved.
• The current monitor display condition.
• The Jump default display setting.
• Favorite display key data.
• Loading Setup Data
• The monitor display condition, Jump default display setting, and favorite display key
settings are also loaded.
• If the loaded setup data is not applied, check the error log (see section 5.10).
• While setup data is being loaded, key operations, communication operations, and
remote control operations cannot be executed.
4-20
M-4660
4.10 Using USB Flash Memory
1
Connecting and Removing USB Flash Memory
2
Procedure
• Connecting USB Flash Memory
1. Connect a USB flash memory device to the MV USB port. The message, “USB
device is connected. Please choose operation.” appears, and you are able to use
the USB flash memory.
2. In Operation Mode, selectable operations are displayed. Use the arrow keys to
select an operation, and then press DISP/ENTER.
When saving automatically
3
4
Measurement and Recording
5
6
7
When saving manually
8
9
Setting
Save Manual
DATA SAVE MODE
Description
Saves unsaved data in the internal memory to USB flash memory.
Switches to the DATA SAVE MODE display. For instructions on how to
save internal memory data to an external storage medium, see section
5.9. This option is only displayed when it is available.*
*You can use DATA SAVE MODE when there is display, event, report, or
manually sampled data.
Load Settings
Cancel
You can change the option that is displayed here with the menu
customize function. Displayable options: DATA SAVE MODE, SELECT
SAVE, M. SAMPLE SAVE, REPORT SAVE, ALL SAVE.
Switches to the Setting Mode setup data load display. For instructions
on how to load setup data, see section 4.9.
Load Settings will not be displayed:
• During memory sampling.
• During computation.
• During computation and memory sampling.
• When Media/USB loading is locked (see chapter 8 for details).
• When the MV is accessing storage media (formatting, saving, or FTP
communication).
• When there are no setup files in the root directory.
Closes the operation selection window.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
4-21
4.10 Using USB Flash Memory
• Removing USB Flash Memory
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Media eject soft key, and then the USB soft key.
The message “Media can be removed safely.” appears.
3. Remove the USB flash memory.
Note
•
•
You can connect one USB flash memory device.
When disconnecting a USB flash memory device, be sure to follow the procedure listed
above. If you remove the USB memory without performing the above procedure, the data
stored on it could be damaged.
Saving and Loading Data
For information on:
Saving and loading setup data files, see section 4.9.
Saving display and event data files, see sections 5.9, and 4.4.
Loading display and event data files, see section 4.8.
Listing and deleting files, see section 4.7.
Formatting storage media, see section 4.7.
4-22
M-4660
Chapter 5
5.1
Screen Operations
1
Switching Between Displays
Switching between Displays Using the Arrow Keys and DISP/ENTER
Using DISP/ENTER and the arrow keys, you can open the display selection menu and its
submenus and switch between displays. The following flowchart illustrates the operations
that you can perform.
3
DISP/ENTER key and arrow keys
TREND
Section 5.2
GROUP 1
4
GROUP n
5
Sec 5.2
DIGITAL
GROUP n
GROUP 1
6
Display selection
menu
Submenu
Sec 5.2
BAR
Screen Operations
GROUP 1
2
GROUP n
7
About tag name display
Long tag names may not fit into their display areas.
When this is the case, they are displayed as follows:
• After the screen is displayed, the tag name
automatically scrolls through the display area
once.
• Press ESC to scroll the tag name through the
display area once.
OVERVIEW
Section 5.4
8
9
INFORMATION
ALARM
SUMMARY
Section 5.7
TREND HISTORY
MESSAGE
SUMMARY
Section 5.8
MEMORY
SUMMARY
Section 5.9
REPORT DATA
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
MODBUS
MASTER
MODBUS CLIENT
10
RELAY
11
COLUMN BAR
Section 5.5
Section 5.6
12
Section 5.3
LOG
Section 5.10
Login log, error log, communication log, FTP log,
Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log, DHCP log, and
Modbus status log
4-PANEL
13
(Not displayed with the default settings.
To display, see section 6.17.
App
Section 5.11
Index
M-4660
5-1
5.1 Switching Between Displays
Operations Using Other Keys
RD-MV1000
START/STOP key
HISTORY key
ESC key
MENU key
FUNC key
USER key
T/DIV key
Section 4.4
Section 6.15
Section 6.17
Section 7.4
Sections 5.2 and 5.3
Soft key
RD-MV2000
START/STOP key
HISTORY key
ESC key
MENU key
FUNC key
USER key
T/DIV key
Section 4.4
Section 6.15
Section 6.17
Section 7.4
Sections 5.2 and 5.3
Soft key
5-2
M-4660
5.1 Switching Between Displays
FUNC Key Operations
Press FUNC to bring up the function menu at the bottom of the screen. Press the Next
soft key to scroll through the function menu. Select the appropriate soft key for the
operation you want to perform.
1
2
3
4
Next soft key
Function menu
(Select using the soft keys)
5
Screen Operations
Sec. 5.1 Sec. 6.4 Sec. 6.4 Sec. 4.4 Sec. 4.6
Sec. 4.10
Sec. 4.5 Sec. 3.8 Sec. 9.8 Sec. 4.4 Sec. 4.4
Sec. 4.4 Sec. 5.9Sec. 10.4Sec. 10.4Sec. 10.4
Sec. 7.2 Sec. 7.3 Sec. 8.1 Sec. 8.3 Sec. 8.3
Sec. 6.3Sec. 4.3 Sec. 4.3Sec. 6.15Sec. 5.11
Sec. 9.3 Sec. 9.3 Comm.* Comm.* Comm.*
6
7
8
Comm.*
Sec. 5.11 (Only MV2000)
* MV1000/MV2000 Communication Interface User’s Manual.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-3
5.1 Switching Between Displays
Pausing the Display
You can pause the screen display.
The display pause icon is displayed
Memory sampling continues even while the screen display is paused.
The Pause Display function pauses the following displays.
Display
Trend
Digital
Bar graph
Overview
Information
Log
Paused Parts of the Display
Trend waveform
Digital values
—
Bar graphs
Digital values
—
Alarm summary
Message summary
Memory summary
Modbus client
Modbus master
Relay status display
Login
Error
Communication
FTP
Mail
WEB
SNTP
DHCP
MODBUS
Procedure
Press the Pause Display soft key listed under “FUNC Key Operations” in this section.
The screen display will pause and an icon will appear in the status display section.
To unpause the display, press any key other than the USER key. If you are using a USB
keyboard, press any key besides the key corresponding to the USER key (Ctrl+U).
Menu Customization
You can change the contents of the function menu, which appears when you press the
FUNC key, and the display selection menu, which appears when you press the DISP/
ENTER key.
For details, see section 6.17.
5-4
M-4660
5.2
1
Displaying Measured Data with Waveforms
(trend), Numbers (digital), or Bar Graphs
This section explains how to use the trend, digital, and bar graph displays.
For an explanation of these displays, see section 1.4.
2
Procedure
• Opening a Display
3
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Select TREND, DIGITAL, or BAR using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/
ENTER.
4
The selected display appears.
• Changing Display Settings
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
5
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
Screen Operations
Sub menu of the trend display
6
Group name:
Displays the group.
ALL CHANNEL:
Displays the waveforms of all
channels.
GROUP CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of the
channels registered to groups.
AUTOZONE ON: Displays trend waveforms separately
by assigning each channel in the group
its own display area (zone).
AUTOZONE OFF: Displays trends using the set range.
SCALE ON: Displays a scale.
SCALE OFF: Clears the scale.
FINE GRID ON: Displays a fine grid.
FINE GRID OFF: Clears the fine grid.
DIGITAL ON: Displays the numeric display section.
DIGITAL OFF: Clears the numeric display section.
7
8
9
10
MESSAGE DISP1: Displays messages using display
method 1.
MESSAGE DISP2: Displays messages using display
method 2.
TREND SPACE ON: Inserts a space at the right edge
(horizontal display) or the top edge
(vertical display) in the waveform
display section.
TREND SPACE OFF: Does not insert a space.
(To show these items on the menu, see section 6.17.)
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the displayed
groups.
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch the
displayed groups.
EXPAND: Enlarges one of the four panels in the 4-panel
display (MV2000 only).
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-5
5.2 Displaying Measured Data with Waveforms (Trend), Numbers (digital), or Bar Graphs
Digital display submenu
Group name: Displays the group.
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the
displayed groups.
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch
the displayed groups.
EXPAND: Enlarges one of the four panels in the
4-panel display (MV2000 only).
Bar graph display submenu
Group name: Displays the group.
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the
displayed groups.
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch
the displayed groups.
EXPAND: Enlarges one of the four panels in the
4-panel display (MV2000 only).
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display settings, press ESC.
• S
TART/STOP Recording Measured Values and Displaying Waveforms on
the Trend Display
Press START/STOP to start recording measured values and displaying waveforms on
the trend display. Press START/STOP again to stop recording measured values and
updating waveforms.
• Writing Messages
For details, see section 6.4.
• Switching Display Groups Using the Arrow Keys
Press the right arrow key to switch from group 1, to 2, to 3, and so on. Press the left
arrow key to switch groups in the opposite order.
• S
witching between the Trend, Digital and Bar Graph Displays Using the
Arrow Keys
When you are in the trend, digital, or bar graph display, press the down arrow key to
switch from trend, to digital, to bar graph, to trend, and so on. Press the up arrow key
to switch displays in the opposite order.
5-6
M-4660
5.2 Displaying Measured Data with Waveforms (Trend), Numbers (digital), or Bar Graphs
1
• Changing the Trend Update Rate
1. Press T/DIV to display the trend interval configuration screen.
2
3
4
2. Select the interval using the soft keys. Waveforms will be displayed at the set
trend update rate.
5
• Trend Display: GROUP CHANNEL Display/ALL CHANNEL Display*
GROUP CHANNEL displays the waveforms of the selected group’s channels. ALL
CHANNEL displays the waveforms of all channels that have been set to be recorded.
*
On the RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, and RD-MV2048, if the device
is equipped with external input channels (/MC1 option), all channel display is not possible
with trend update rates of 15 s/div or 30 s/div.
Screen Operations
Explanation
6
7
• AUTO ZONE
Displays trend waveforms separately by evenly dividing display areas (zones) among
a group’s channels.
With AUTO ZONE OFF
With AUTO ZONE ON
8
9
10
11
• FINE GRID
Display the fine grid when the normal grid is too wide for reading measured values.
The fine grid can be used in the trend and historical trend displays. The fine grid
places an additional four lines between the normal grid lines.
With FINE GRID OFF
12
With FINE GRID ON
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-7
5.2 Displaying Measured Data with Waveforms (Trend), Numbers (digital), or Bar Graphs
• Trend Display: SCALE: ON/OFF, DIGITAL: ON/OFF
Select whether or not to display the scale and the numeric display section.
• AUTO SCROLL
When AUTO SCROLL is ON, the MV automatically scrolls through the displayed
groups at the set interval. The MV scrolls from group 1, to 2, to 3, and so on.
For instructions on how to set the scrolling interval, see section 6.13.
• Trend Display: MESSAGE DISP 1, MESSAGE DISP 2
Select which message display method to use.
• Conditions for Changing the Trend Update Rate
When the displayed trend data type is Display or Event, the trend update rate can be
changed. It cannot be changed when the displayed data type is E+D (Event+Display).
The trend update interval can be changed regardless of memory sampling conditions.
The trend update rate can be changed on the following kinds of displays.
• A display with an open menu
• Trend display
• Digital display
• Bar graph display
• Overview display
• 4-panel display
• All information displays accessible from the display selection menu
5-8
M-4660
5.3
Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND
HISTORY)
There are five ways that you can display previously measured data.
For an explanation of the historical trend display, see section 1.4.
From the display selection menu. This method is explained in this section.
By pressing HISTORY. This method is explained in this section.
From the alarm summary. For details, see section 5.7.
From the message summary. For details, see section 5.8.
From the memory summary. For details, see section 5.9.
By displaying measured data that has been saved to an external storage medium. For
details, see section 4.8.
Procedure
• D
isplaying Previously Measured Data by Using the Display Selection
Menu
1
2
3
4
5
Perform this operation during memory sampling or when there is measured data.
2. Select TREND HISTORY using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
Screen Operations
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
6
The TREND HISTORY display appears.
• Opening the Display Registered to the HISTORY Key
Press HISTORY. The display switches to TREND HISTORY. Press HISTORY again to
return to the previous display.
For instructions on how to register a display to the HISTORY key, see section 6.15.
7
8
• Changing Display Settings
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
9
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-9
5.3 Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND HISTORY)
TREND HISTORY submenu
Group name: Displays the group.
ALL CHANNEL:
Displays the waveforms of all channels.
GROUP CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of the channels
registered to groups.
AUTOZONE ON: Displays trend waveforms separately
by assigning display areas (zones) to
the set channels.
AUTOZONE OFF: Displays trends using the set range.
SCALE ON: Displays a scale.
SCALE OFF: Clears the scale.
FINE GRID ON: Displays a fine grid.
FINE GRID OFF: Clears the fine grid.
MESSAGE DISP2: Switches to message display 2.
MESSAGE DISP1: Switches to message display 1.
DIGITAL MAX/MIN: Displays the maximum and minimum
values at the cursor point as well as the
maximum and minimum values within the
screen, in the digital value display area.
CURSOR VALUE: With display data, shows the maximum
data value at the cursor position. With
event data, shows the data at the cursor
position.
CURSOR TIME ON: Displays the time at the cursor position
in the lower right.
CURSOR TIME OFF: Displays the date/time of the data at the
right edge of the screen.
RELATIVE TIME:
ABSOLUTE TIME:
Shows the time that has elapsed since
memory start.
Shows the time when data was recorded.
EXPAND: Enlarges one of the four panels in the 4-panel
display (MV2000 only).
Switches to the specified display.
Returns to the display that was shown before the historical trend.
ALARM SUMMARY:
Displays the alarm summary in the
loaded data file.
MESSAGE SUMMARY: Displays the message summary in the
loaded data file.
INFORMATION:
Displays the information of the loaded
data file.
TOP CHANNEL
Displays the trend waveform and scale markers of the selected
channel in front of all the others.
AUTO SCALE
Adjusts the display span of the selected channel.
OFF
No AUTO SCALE display.
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
5-10
M-4660
5.3 Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND HISTORY)
1
• Moving the Cursor
Cursor
2
3
Moves the cursor to the left by 1 dot.
Moves the cursor to the right by 1 dot.
Hold down an arrow key to move
the cursor by 2 divisions at a time.
* Use the up and down arrow keys on the vertical trend display.
4
5
• Scrolling through Continuous Data
Displayed
Screen Operations
The trend display shows a portion of the complete data waveform on the screen. Use
the following operations to scroll through continuous data.
6
7
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and
press the arrow key again to shift half a page
and display the continuing data.
8
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and
press the arrow key again to shift half a page
and display the continuing data.
* Use the up and down arrow keys on the vertical
trend display.
9
• Selecting What Portion of the Data to Display
Perform the following operations to select what data to display. Use the items in
parenthesis if you are using vertical display.
10
1. Press the up (right) arrow key.
At the top (right) of the display, a complete data waveform appears.
11
Complete data waveform
All of the data in the display memory.
Frame indicating the display range
Displayed highlighted.
These icons are not displayed if the scale is
displayed.
12
13
2. Use the left and right (up and down) arrow keys to move around the frame that
indicates the display range, and select the portion of the data that you want to
display.
3. Press the down (left) arrow key.
App
The portion of the data that you selected is displayed.
Index
M-4660
5-11
5.3 Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND HISTORY)
• When Not All of the Data Fits in the Complete Data Waveform
Move through the complete data waveform to the part that you want to display.
As an example, this is how you would display data that is older than the data that you
are currently displaying. Items in parenthesis are for vertical display.
1. Press the up (right) arrow key.
At the top (right) of the display, the complete data waveform appears. The data portion that
can be loaded from internal memory also appears. If there is more than 8 MB of data, the
MV will indicate the 8 MB worth of data displayed in the complete data waveform with a
square frame that will appear in the data portion that can be loaded from internal memory.
Loadable data in the
internal memory
All data display
All of the data in the display
memory (up to 8 MB)
A frame indicating the range
shown in the screen.
The green arrow indicates
that loadable data exists in
the arrow direction.
A frame indicating the 8 MB
of memory that is shown in
the complete data waveform.
2. Use the left (down) arrow key to move the frame that represents the portion of the
data that will be displayed to the beginning of the complete data waveform. Press
the left (down) arrow key to move the frame beyond the edge of the waveform.
The message “Overwrite old data?” will appear.
3. Select Yes using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
The 4 MB worth of memory used for the display will be overwritten, and the data will be
displayed.
4. Use the left and right (up and down) arrow keys to move around the waveform
and select the portion of the data to display.
5. Press the down (left) arrow key.
The portion of the data that you selected is displayed.
• Splitting the Display in Two and Viewing the Current Trend and the
Historical Trend Together
You can only do this with the historical trend of display data. Items in parenthesis are
for vertical display.
*
You cannot view the two trends together when the scale is displayed.
Press the down (left) arrow key.
The current trend appears on the right (top) half of the screen. The historical trend
appears on the left (bottom) half of the screen.
Present trend
Historical trend
To return to the previous display, press the up (right) arrow key.
5-12
M-4660
5.3 Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND HISTORY)
1
• Writing Added Messages
For instructions on how to use this function, see section 6.4.
• Changing the Time Axis Zoom
2
1. Press the T/DIV key to open the display for setting the time axis zoom.
3
4
2. Select the time axis zoom using the soft keys. The waveform will appear with the
new time axis zoom.
Screen Operations
Historical trend display rate
of the zoomed display.
5
6
Set time axis zoom
7
8
Explanation
• ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL Display
Switches between displaying the waveforms of the selected group’s channels and
displaying the waveforms of all channels that have been set to be recorded.
9
• SCALE ON/OFF
Select whether or not to display the scale. The scale’s current value mark indicates
the value at the cursor location.
10
• MESSAGE DISP 1, MESSAGE DISP 2
Select which message display method to use.
11
• AUTO SPAN
For details, see section 1.4.
• Changing the Time Axis Zoom
Displays a historical trend with a zoomed time axis.
If the display interval with the new time axis is 5 s/div or 10 s/div, 1 division is equal to
40 dots.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-13
5.3 Displaying Previously Measured Data (TREND HISTORY)
• INFORMATION (information about the displayed measured data)
The following information is displayed.
Page switch mark
When using the batch function,
a comment field and a text field
are displayed on the second
and third pages.
Use the left and right arrow
keys to switch the page.
Item
Filename
File type
Serial number
Batch number, Lot number
Start time, End time
User name
Description
Displays “Memory” for data stored to internal memory. Displays
the file name for data stored to an external storage medium.
Displays “Display” for display data or “Event” for event data.
The serial number of the MV that was used.
Displayed for files that use batch functions.
The time when recording started/stopped.
The name of the user that operated the MV. This item is displayed
if the login function was used.
Note
If you display the measured data from an external storage medium, the serial number displayed
will be that of the MV that saved the data.
• Historical Trend Background Color
You can change the background color of the historical trend display.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.12.
• TOP CHANNEL
The displayed scale marker and grid are those of the channel selected as the top
channel.
If you switch from TREND HISTORY display to another display, the TOP CHANNEL
setting is cleared. Channels other than the top channel are displayed in the order set
within their display groups. (Set in Group set, Trip line which can be opened from the
MENU tab after pressing MENU.)
5-14
M-4660
5.4
1
Viewing All Channels on One Display
(OVERVIEW)
This section explains how to use the OVERVIEW display.
For an explanation of this display, see section 1.4.
2
Procedure
• Opening the Display
3
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Select OVERVIEW using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
The OVERVIEW display appears.
4
• Changing Display Settings
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
5
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
OVERVIEW submenu
Screen Operations
6
CURSOR ON: Displays the cursor.
CURSOR OFF: Clears the cursor.
7
JUMP TO ALM SUM: Switches to the alarm summary.
JUMP TO TREND:
Switches to the trend display of the
smallest group number that includes
the channel selected with the cursor.
JUMP TO DIGITAL: Switches to the digital display of the
smallest group number that includes
the channel selected with the cursor.
JUMP TO BAR:
Switches to the bar graph display of
the smallest group number that
includes the channel selected with
the cursor.
8
9
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 6.17.)
EXPAND: Enlarges one of the four panels in the 4-panel
display (MV2000 only).
10
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display settings, press ESC.
11
• S
witching to a Trend, Digital, or Bar Graph Display that Contains the
Selected Channel
1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and select a channel.
12
13
Cursor (white frame)
App
2. Use the operations outlined in “Changing Display Settings” to switch to the trend,
digital, or bar graph display.
M-4660
Index
5-15
5.5
Displaying Various Information
This section explains how to display reports (/M1 and /PM1 options) and how to use the
various status displays.
For an explanation of these displays, see section 1.4.
Procedure
• Opening the Display
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Select INFORMATION with the up and down arrow keys.
3. Press the right arrow key to open the INFORMATION submenu.
4. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
INFORMATION submenu
ALARM SUMMARY:
Displays an alarm summary.
Section 5.7
MESSAGE SUMMARY: Displays a message summary.
Section 5.8
MEMORY SUMMARY: Displays a memory summary.
Section 5.9
MODBUS CLIENT: Displays the Modbus client status.
MODBUS MASTER: Displays the Modbus master status.
RELAY:
Displays the relay status.
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 6.17.)
REPORT DATA: Displays report data.
COLUMN BAR:
Displays the report in a stacked bar graph.
Section 5.6
5. Press DISP/ENTER.
The selected display appears.
5-16
M-4660
5.5 Displaying Various Information
1
• Report Display
• Switching Displayed Report Data
“ The displayed report data number/the number of report data entries in internal
memory” is displayed next to Index. The report with the largest report data number
is the most recent report.
2
Displayed report data number
Number of report data entries in internal memory
3
4
5
Screen Operations
You can switch the displayed report data with the following operations.
Up arrow key:
Switch to the next greatest report number.
Down arrow key: Switch to the next lowest report number.
Left arrow key: Switch to the report number that is greater than the current
number by 10.
Right arrow key: Switch to the report number that is lower than the current
number by 10.
6
7
Note
The display will not be updated while a report is displayed, even if new report data is created.
You can update the display by performing one of the following operations.
• Holding the left arrow key until the display is updated.
• Pressing DISP/ENTER and reselecting REPORT DATA from the display selection menu.
8
9
• Changing Report Channels
You can display up to 30 report channels on one display. If the number of report
channels in the report is greater than 30, you can change the displayed report
channels.
10
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
11
3. Select CHANGE REPORT CH. with the up and down arrow keys.
4. Press DISP/ENTER.
The displayed report channels change.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-17
5.5 Displaying Various Information
• Relay Status Display
Displays the status of alarm output relays and internal switches. You cannot perform
operations in this display.
Red:
ON
Green: OFF
• Modbus Status Display
Displays a list of Modbus client or Modbus master command statuses.
For configuration instructions, see the Communication Interface User’s Manual (IM
RD-MV1000-17E).
Communication conditions
Communication destination
MV channels
Status
Command
5-18
M-4660
5.6
1
Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (COLUMN
BAR)
This section explains how to use the bar graph display (COLUMN BAR).
2
Procedure
• Changing Display Settings
3
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
4
5
SINGLE GRAPH:
DUAL GRAPH:
Displays a single graph.
Displays two graphs.
SELECT GROUP: Use the arrow keys to switch between
displayed report groups.
SELECT COLUMN: Use the arrow keys to select a bar graph.
REPORT GROUP 1 to 6*: Switch between displayed
report groups.
* Varies according to model. For more information about report
channels, see section 10.5.
Screen Operations
Display name: Switches to the specified display.
6
7
8
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
• Changing Groups, Selecting Bar Graphs, and Moving the Cursor
The amount of data that the up and down arrow keys scroll through depends on the
type of report data. For example, with an hourly + daily (Hour+Day) report, you can
use the arrows to scroll through the data one day at a time.
If set to SELECT GROUP:
Switches to the display for the report
group with the next smallest number.
If set to SELECT COLUMN: Moves the bar graph selection cursor
to the left.
10
11
Switches to the previous day, week or month's data.
9
If set to SELECT GROUP:
Switches to the display for the report
group with the next highest number.
If set to SELECT COLUMN: Moves the bar graph selection cursor
to the right.
12
Switches to the next day, week or month's data.
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-19
5.6 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (COLUMN BAR)
Explanation
• SINGLE GRAPH/DUAL GRAPH
You can display one or two bar graphs. The periodic sums of the first channel in a
group and of all other channels that have the same unit as it are displayed.
• SINGLE GRAPH display
Numeric display section
Display area 1
Display area 2
The report data displayed in display areas 1 and 2 vary depending on the report
data type.
Report Data Type
Hour + Day
Day + Week
Day + Month
Display Area 1
Hourly data
Daily data
Daily data
Display Area 2
Daily data
Weekly data
Monthly data
Note
When in 4-panel display, the numeric display section only contains channel names or tag
names.
• DUAL GRAPH display
Shows the data from two consecutive periods at the top and bottom of the display.
Channel number or tag name
Numbers are abbreviated.
Display area 4
Display area 3
Display area 1
Display area 2
The report data displayed in display areas 1, 2, 3, and 4 vary depending on the
report data type. Display areas 1 and 2 contain the same report data listed above
for SINGLE GRAPH display.
Report Data Type
Hour + Day
Day + Week
Day + Month
5-20
Display Area 4
The hourly and daily data of the day before the data in
display area 3
The daily and weekly data of the week before the data
in display area 3
The daily and monthly data of the month before the
data in display area 3
M-4660
5.6 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (COLUMN BAR)
Note
•
•
The numbers on the vertical axis of display area 4 (the top display area) and the dates on
the horizontal axis are abbreviated.
Display area 4 can only display the data from the period immediately preceding that of
display area 3.
1
2
• Selecting a Bar
When in SINGLE GRAPH display, you can move the cursor to a bar that you want to
check, and view the sums of each channel.
3
4
Displays the sums of all channels
at the cursor position.
5
Screen Operations
6
Cursor
• Power Failure and Time Adjustment Indication
7
Indicates a power failure.
Time adjustment is indicated by a C.
8
9
• Power Failure
A “P” indicates when a power failure occurred and a report was supposed to be
filed. A “P” also indicates when the MV recovered from a power failure and the next
report was filed.
• Time Adjustment
When a time adjustment causes a report to be filed twice because the time was
moved back, the time adjustment is marked with a “C,” and the bar graph of the
report that was filed first is used.
If the data for a period does not exist because of a power failure or time adjustment, a
bar graph for the period will not be displayed.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-21
5.7
Using the Alarm Summary
This section explains how to use the alarm summary.
For an explanation of this display, see section 1.4.
Procedure
• Changing Display Settings
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
Sort symbol
Ascending sort
Descending sort
Display name:
Switches to the specified display.
TO HISTORY (EV):
Switches to the historical trend display.
TO OVERVIEW:
Switches to the overview display.
CHANGE SORT KEY: Sorts the alarm information by
channel or alarm time.
ASCENDING ORDER: Sorts in ascending order.
DESCENDING ORDER: Sorts in descending order.
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
• Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling through Alarms
Scrolls the alarm information up by half a page
Moves the cursor up
Scrolls the alarm information down by half a page
Moves the cursor down
• Opening the Historical Trend of an Alarm Occurrence
1. Select the alarm with the cursor.
2. Use the operations outlined in “Changing Display Settings” to open the historical
trend display.
Explanation
• Changing the Sort Key and the Sort Order
You can set the sort key to one of the following items and sort in either ascending or
descending order. A sort symbol appears next to the sort key (see the figure above).
• Channel number:You can sort by channel number even if you use tags. The
alarms of each channel are sorted by their alarm numbers.
• Alarm activation/release
5-22
M-4660
5.8
1
Using the Message Summary
This section explains how to use the message summary.
For an explanation of this display, see section 1.4.
2
Procedure
• Changing Display Settings
3
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
4
Sort symbol
Ascending sort
Descending sort
Switches to the specified display.
TO HISTORY (EV):
Switches to the historical trend
display.
CHANGE SORT KEY:
Sorts messages by message
number, time, group, or user
name.
Screen Operations
Display name:
5
6
7
ASCENDING ORDER: Sorts in ascending order.
DESCENDING ORDER: Sorts in descending order.
CHANGE DISP ITEM:
Switches between displaying
time and group, and displaying
user name.
8
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
9
• Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling through Messages
Scrolls the message list up by half a page
Moves the cursor up
10
Scrolls the message list down by half a page
Moves the cursor down
• Opening the Historical Trend of the Period When a Message Was Written
11
1. Select the message with the cursor.
2. Use the operations outlined in “Changing Display Settings” to open the historical
trend display.
Explanation
12
13
• Switching Displayed Items
You can switch between displaying the following sets of items.
• Message, time, group
• Message, user name
App
• Changing the Sort Key and the Sort Order
You can set the sort key to any of the listed items and sort in either ascending or
descending order. A sort symbol appears next to the sort key (see the figure above).
M-4660
5-23
Index
5.9
Using the Memory Summary
This section explains how to use the memory summary.
For an explanation of this display, see section 1.4.
Procedure
• Changing Display Settings
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
3. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
The displayed data type is indicated
with a green mark.
Display name: Switches to the specified display.
TO HISTORY: Switches to the historical trend display.
DATA SAVE MODE:
Switches to the data save mode
display.
CHANGE DATA KIND: Switches between display
data and event data.
FILENAME DISPLAY: Displays the file name.
For a description of file names, see section 1.5.
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
• Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling through Memory Information
Scrolls the memory information up by half a page
Moves the cursor up
Scrolls the memory information down by half a page
Moves the cursor down
• Opening the Historical Trend of the Specified Data
1. Select the data with the cursor.
2. Use the operations outlined in “Changing Display Settings” to open the historical
trend display.
• Saving Data
To save the data in the internal memory to a CF card or to USB flash memory
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.4.
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
3. Select DATA SAVE MODE with the up and down arrow keys.
4. Press DISP/ENTER.
The display switches to DATA SAVE MODE.
5-24
M-4660
5.9 Using the Memory Summary
1
5. To save a specified file, select it with the cursor.
2
Cursor
(Move with the arrow keys)
3
6. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
Saves the selected file.
ALL SAVE:
Saves all data.
5
M.SAMPLE SAVE: Saves all manually sampled data.
REPORT SAVE:
6
Saves all report data.
CHANGE DATA KIND: Switches between display
data and event data.
TIME DISPLAY:
Switches between displaying the times of the first and
last data entries in the file and displaying the file name.
7. Use the up and down arrow keys to select SELECT SAVE, ALL SAVE, M.
SAMPLE SAVE, or REPORT SAVE.
*
Screen Operations
SELECT SAVE:
4
If you are using a CF card and USB flash memory, the message “Which media do you want
save to?” appears. Use the arrow keys to select which medium you want to save to, and
press DISP/ENTER.
The measured data is saved.
7
8
9
ALL SAVE Progress Indicator
If you select ALL SAVE* from the memory summary, a progress indicator for the ALL
SAVE operation will appear.
*
This function saves all of the data in the internal memory to a CF card or USB flash memory
device.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-25
5.9 Using the Memory Summary
Note
•
•
The progress indicator only appears in the memory summary.
Pressing ESC will remove the progress indicator for about 10 seconds, but it will reappear
after that.
The estimated times for the completion of the ALL SAVE operation (when the internal
memory is full) are listed below. The operation may take longer depending on what other
operations the MV is performing.
•
Memory Option
Standard memory
(internal memory suffix code -1)
Large memory
(internal memory suffix code -2)
•
Time for ALL SAVE Completion (estimated)
CF Card
USB Flash Memory
About 4 min
About 5 min
About 10 min
About 15 min
To cancel the ALL SAVE operation,
Press FUNC and then the Save Stop soft key.
Explanation
• Saving Data
• Each time you save data, the MV will create a new directory to store the data in.
The directory name structure is: Specified character string_YYMMDD_HHMMSS
(The values of YY to SS are determined by the date and time of operation)
File list example
Save directory
• You cannot save display or event data when it is being recorded.
• The save operation simply copies the data in the internal memory. It does not
change the classification of data in the internal memory from unsaved to saved (see
section 1.5, “Saving to External Storage Media,” for details).
• Saving will stop if there is not enough space in the external storage medium. When
saving data, make sure that the external storage medium has enough free space.
• When saving a single file:
•
•
•
•
5-26
The generated folder name is: name of the destination directory_date_time
The file is saved after you select SELECT SAVE in DATA SAVE MODE.
You cannot switch save folders while in DATA SAVE MODE.
If a file with the same name already exists, an overwrite confirmation window appears.
M-4660
1
5.10 Viewing Operation History Logs
You can view the following kinds of logs.
Login log, error log, communication log, FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log, DHCP
log, and Modbus status log
2
• Opening the LOG display
3
Procedure
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Select LOG with the up and down arrow keys.
*
4
LOG is not displayed by default.
To display LOG on the menu, see section 6.17.
3. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
4. Select a submenu item with the up and down arrow keys.
5. Press DISP/ENTER.
The selected display appears.
Explanation
5
Screen Operations
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
Submenu: LOGIN, ERROR, COMMUNICATION, FTP, MAIL, WEB, SNTP, DHCP,
MODBUS
6
7
• LOGIN Log
The log number of the last line and
the total number of logs
8
9
User name
Operation method (see the table below)
Operation (see the table below)
Date and time
Action
Login
Logout
NewTime
TimeChg
PowerOff
PowerOn
TrevStart
TRevEnd
SNTPtimset
Description
Login
Logout
Time adjustment while memory is stopped
Time adjustment through key operation
Power OFF (power failure occurred)
Power ON (recovered from a power failure)
The start of the operation of gradually adjusting the time
The end of the operation of gradually adjusting the time
Time adjustment by SNTP
Factor
KEY
COM
REM
ACT
SYS
Description
Key operation
Operation using communication
Operation using remote control function
Operation caused by event action
System operation
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-27
5.10 Viewing an Operation History Log
• Error Log
Error message*
Error code*
Date and time
*
For details, see section 12.1, “List of Messages.”
• Communication Log
Message*
Input/output symbol (>: Input, <: Output)
User ID number (0: Serial, 1 to 3: Ethernet)
Date and time
*
See the Communication Interface User’s Manual (IM RD-MV1000-17E).
• FTP Log
File name
FTP connection destination
(P: Primary, S: Secondary)
Error message (detail code)*
Date and time
*
For details, see section 12.1, “List of Messages.”
• Web Log
Operation (see the table on the next page)
Error code*
Requested operation (see the table below)
Date and time
*
For details, see section 12.1, “List of Messages.”
Request
Screen
Key
Message
Makefile
5-28
Description
Screen switch
Key operation
Message assignment/write
Event file/display file
M-4660
5.10 Viewing an Operation History Log
Parameter
TREND
DIGIT
BAR
HIST
OV
DISP
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
HISTORY
Messages
1
Description
Trend display
Digital display
Bar graph display
Historical trend display
Overview display
DISP/ENTER key
Up arrow key
Down arrow key
Left arrow key
Right arrow key
Historical trend display/Favorite display selection
Written message character strings
2
3
4
• E-mail Log
5
Screen Operations
6
Recipient (mail address, message)
Recipient (1: Recipient 1, 2: Recipient 2)
Error code*
E-mail type (see the table below)
Date and time
*
7
For details, see section 12.1, “List of Messages.”
Type
Alarm
Time
Report
Fail
Full
Test
Error
Description
Alarm e-mail
Scheduled e-mail
Report timeout mail
Power failure recovery e-mail
Memory full e-mail
Test e-mail
Error message e-mail
8
9
10
• SNTP Log
11
Error message (detail code)*
Error code*
Date and time
*
12
For details, see section 12.1, “List of Messages.”
13
App
Index
M-4660
5-29
5.10 Viewing an Operation History Log
• DHCP Log
Error message (detail code)*
Error code*
Date and time
*
For details, see section 12.1, “List of Messages.”
• Modbus Status Log
Command number, command type
(R: Read, W: Write)
Communication status*
Communication type (C: Client, M: Master)
Date and time
*
5-30
See the Communication Interface User’s Manual (IM RD-MV1000-17E).
M-4660
1
5.11 Using the 4-Panel Display (RD-MV2000 only)
This section explains how to use the 4-panel display.
For an explanation of this display, see section 1.4.
2
Procedure
• Opening the Display
3
1. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
2. Use the arrow keys to select 4Panel and then select MIX, ALL TREND, ALL
DIGITAL, or ALL BAR. Press DISP/ENTER. If you have changed the display
names, select the name that the display was changed to (see “Changing the
4-Panel Display Configuration Names” on the next page for details).
4
The selected display appears.
• Switching between Displays
• Changing the 4-Panel Display Configurations
Perform these operations while in the 4-panel display.
5
Screen Operations
Press the right arrow key to switch from MIX, to ALL TREND, to ALL DIGITAL, to ALL
BAR, to MIX and so on. Press the left arrow key to switch displays in the opposite
order. If you have changed the display names, select the name that the display was
changed to (see “Changing the 4-Panel Display Configuration Names” on the next
page for details).
6
7
1. Press DISP/ENTER.
The title of one of the four displays will turn blue.
2. Use the arrow keys to move to the display you want to change (the display with
the blue title is the selected display).
8
9
10
The selected area’s
heading is displayed
in dark blue.
11
12
3. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
4. Use the arrow keys to select a new display.
5. Press DISP/ENTER to assign the new display to the old display’s location.
13
To close the menu without changing the display, press ESC.
• Registering a New Display Configuration
Perform the operation outlined under “Changing the 4-Panel Display Configuration
Names” on the next page.
*
If you do not perform this operation and switch to another display, the changes made to the
current display configuration will not be retained.
App
Index
M-4660
5-31
5.11 Using the 4-Panel Display (RD-MV2000 only)
• Expanding and Viewing a Single Display
1. Press DISP/ENTER.
The title of one of the four displays will turn blue.
2. Use the arrow keys to move to the display you want to expand (the display with
the blue title is the selected display).
3. Press DISP/ENTER to open the display selection menu.
4. Press the right arrow key to open the submenu.
5. Select EXPAND with the up and down arrow keys.
Select EXPAND
EXPAND is not displayed by default. You can display it by performing the following:
Press MENU and then select Menu customize > Display menu > EXPAND.
Then, press the Select soft key.
To display EXPAND on the menu, see section 6.17.
6. Press DISP/ENTER to view the single selected display.
To close the menu without expanding the display, press ESC.
• Changing the 4-Panel Display Configuration Names
If you change a display configuration’s name, the new name will appear in the display
selection menu.
Perform these operations while in the 4-panel display.
1. Press FUNC to open the function menu.
2. Press the 4Panel soft key to open a list of display configurations.
3. Choose a configuration and press its soft key (from 4Panel 1 to 4Panel 4). The
configuration name input window appears.
4. Enter the display configuration name (up to 16 characters,
A a # 1 ).
5. Press DISP/ENTER to set the configuration name to the name you entered. You
will return to the 4-panel display.
To cancel the configuration name change, press ESC.
5-32
M-4660
Chapter 6
Display Configuration
6.1
1
Setting a Display Group
This section explains how to assign channels to a display group and how to name the
group. It also explains how to set lines at specified positions in the waveform display
range on the trend display.
2
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Group set, Trip line.
3
Display
4
5
6
Settings
Select the target group number (from 1 to 10 on the RD-MV1000 and 1 to 36 on the
RD-MV2000).
• Group set
• On/Off
Select On to use the group.
7
8
• Group name
Set the group name (up to 16 characters,
Display Configuration
• Group number
A a # 1 ).
• CH set
Select measurement channels, computation channels (/M1 and /PM1 options), and
external input channels (/MC1 option) that you want to assign to the group. You
can set up to 6 channels on the RD-MV1000 and up to 10 channels on the RDMV2000.
• Enter channel numbers using two or three digits.
• Separate each channel number with a period.
• To specify a range of consecutive channels numbers, use a hyphen.
Example: To assign channel 1 and channels 5 through 8, enter “001.005-008.”
Note
•
•
•
The MV displays the channels in the specified order on the trend, digital, and bar graph
displays.
You can assign a channel to multiple groups.
You cannot assign a channel twice to the same group.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-1
6.1 Setting a Display Group
Note
You can copy the channel settings of a display group to another group.
Procedure
1. Select the CH set box of the copy source.
2. Press the Copy soft key.
3. Select the CH set box of the copy destination.
4. Press the Paste soft key. The copied channel settings are pasted.
• Trip line
You can set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range of the trend
display.
• 1, 2, 3, and 4
Select On for the trip lines you want to display.
• Position
Set the position in the range of 0 to 100% of the display width.
• Color
The default colors for 1, 2, 3, and 4 are red, green, blue, and yellow, respectively.
To change a color, select from the 24 available colors.
• Width
Set the line width of the trip line in dots (1 to 3).
6-2
M-4660
6.2
1
Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers
This section explains how to display channels using tags or channel numbers.
2
Display
• Tag/Channel
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Operating environment.
3
4
5
6
• Tag
RD-MV1000
Display Configuration
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Tag, Memory, Delay.
RD-MV2000
7
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Tag, Memory sample,
Alarm delay.
8
9
10
Settings
• Operating environment > Tag/Channel
Setting
Tag
Channel
11
Description
Displays tags. Channel numbers are displayed for channels that do not have
tags set.
Displays channel numbers.
12
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. The settings selected here will be applied to these
channels.
13
• Tag > Characters
Set the tag (up to 16 characters,
A a # 1 ).
App
Index
M-4660
6-3
6.3
Setting the Secondary Trend Update Interval
This section explains how to switch the trend update interval to the secondary interval
during memory sampling. You can configure the MV to automatically write a message
when the trend update interval is switched.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.4.
Display
• S
witching the Trend Update Interval and Writing a Message (when using
the secondary trend update interval)
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message, Input, Alarm.
• Second interval [/div]
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend.
6-4
M-4660
6.3 Setting the Secondary Trend Update Interval
1
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD,
Monitor.
2
3
4
5
Settings
6
• View > Trend rate switching
*
When the trend rate switching function is On, the MV cannot be configured to record both
display and event data (see section 4.1 for details).
• Message > Change message
On: W
rites a message containing the time and the new trend interval when the trend
interval is switched.
• Trend > Second interval [/div]
Select the time corresponding to a division of the time axis on the trend display from
below: You cannot set a trend update interval that is faster than the scan interval.
5s*, 10s*, 15s**, 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2h, 4h, 10h
* Available on high-speed input models.
** Available on high-speed input models and on medium-speed input models set to fast
sampling mode.
If the trend update interval on a high-speed input model is set to 5 s/div or 10 s/div, one division
Display Configuration
On: E
nables the switching of the trend interval during memory sampling. The Second
interval [/div] item appears in the Setting Mode menu.
7
8
9
10
is displayed with 40 dots.
11
Note
If the trend interval is set to greater than or equal to 1h/div, the MV displays the month, day, and
hour at the grid position. You can change the display format by changing the date format.
12
13
Month, day, and hour
at the grid position.
App
Index
M-4660
6-5
6.3 Setting the Secondary Trend Update Interval
Procedure
• Switching the Trend Update Interval
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Second speed soft key or the Normal speed soft key.
The trend display update interval is changed. A message appears on the trend display (when
the MV is configured to write a message).
Display example: 10:53 1min/div
Note
You can also switch the trend update interval by using the event action function. For event
action configuration instructions, see chapter 7.
6-6
M-4660
6.4
1
Writing a Message
This section explains how to write a message in the trend display.
2
Display
• Message Write Group
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message.
3
4
5
6
RD-MV2000
Display Configuration
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message, Input, Alarm.
7
8
9
10
• Registering Messages
Press MENU > select the Menu tab > Message.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-7
6.4 Writing a Message
Settings
• Message
• Write group
This setting applies only to messages that are written using keys.
Setting
Common
Separate
Description
Writes messages to all groups.
Writes messages to the displayed group.
• Power-fail message
See section 6.16 for details.
• Change message
See section 6.3 for details.
• Message No.
Select a message number (1 to 100). Message numbers 1 to 10 are used for free
messages.*If you set a free message, the corresponding message number will be
overwritten.
*
Messages that are created and written on the spot.
• Message > Characters
Set the message (up to 32 characters,
A a # 1 ).
Procedure
• Writing a Message
You cannot write a message when memory sampling has stopped.
1. Display the group that you want to write a message to.
•
•
Even when Write group is set to Separate, a message is written to all groups if the MV is
showing a display unrelated to a group (such as the overview display). When the MV is
showing a 4-panel display, a message is written to the displayed group.
When Write group is set to Common, a message is written to all groups.
2. Press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
3. Press the Message soft key.
4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired message number range (example:
[1-10]).
A list of messages appears.
6-8
M-4660
6.4 Writing a Message
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the number of the message you want to write.
A message mark, time, and message appear on the trend display.
1
2
Message
3
4
• Writing a Free Message
You can create and write a message on the spot.
5
1. Display the group that you want to write a message to.
2. Press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
3. Press the Free message soft key.
6
4. Press a message number soft key.
5. Enter a message (up to 32 characters,
A a # 1 ).
Display Configuration
The message entry window opens.
7
6. Press DISP/ENTER.
A message mark, time, and message appear on the trend display.
• Writing an Add Message
You can add a message to a previously measured data. You can do this on a
previously measured portion of a waveform that is currently being memory sampled.
8
1. Carry out the procedure below to display the historical trend of the data that is
currently being memory sampled.
Press DISP/ENTER and select TREND HISTORY > (group name) > DISP/ENTER.
2. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position where you want to write a
message.
9
10
3. Write a message according to the procedure given in “Writing a Message” or
“Writing a Free Message.” Use the Add Message or Add Free Message soft key.
11
Cursor (yellow line)
12
Added message
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-9
6.4 Writing a Message
Explanation
• Message Colors
The message colors on the trend display are shown below. You cannot change them.
No.
Color
1
Red
2
Green
3
Blue
4
Blue
violet
5
Brown
6
Orange
7
Yellowgreen
8
Light
blue
9
Violet
10
Gray
The colors for messages 11 to 100 are repetitions of the colors above.
• Add Message
• The message timestamp is the time when the message was written. It is not the
timestamp at the data position.
Message summary
display example
Added message
(displayed in blue)
• You can write up to 50 messages.
• You cannot add messages to data in the internal memory that has been saved to a
file or to data that has been loaded from an external storage medium.
6-10
M-4660
6.5
1
Changing Channel Display Colors
This section explains how to change channel display colors. The color settings are
applied to the trend and bar graph displays.
2
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Color.
3
4
5
Settings
6
• Group of channel
• Color
To change a color, select from the following 24 colors.
Red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark
gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green
Display Configuration
Select the target channels.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-11
6.6
Using Display Zones
This section explains how to assign each channel to a waveform display zone so that
waveforms do not overlap.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.4.
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Zone, Scale.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Zone, Scale, Bar graph.
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. The settings selected here will be applied to these
channels.
• Zone > Lower, Zone > Upper
Set the zone where waveforms will be displayed. Set Lower and Upper as
percentages of the maximum display width. Set Upper to a value greater than Lower,
and set the zone width (Upper – Lower) to greater than or equal to 5%.
Lower: 0 to 95%
Upper: 5 to 100%
6-12
M-4660
6.7
1
Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
This section explains how to display a scale on the trend display.
For an explanation of the trend display, see section 1.4.
2
• Scale Division, Scale Division
RD-MV1000
3
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Zone, Scale.
4
5
6
RD-MV2000
Display Configuration
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Zone, Scale, Bar graph.
7
8
9
10
• Scale Digit, Value Indicator
RD-MV1000
Press MENU select Menu tab > Display > Trend.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-13
6.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD,
Monitor.
• Showing a Scale
While in the trend display, press DISP/ENTER (to open the display selection menu) >
right arrow key (to open the submenu), and select SCALE ON (see section 5.2 for
details).
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. The settings selected here will be applied to these
channels.
• Position
Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 6 with the RD-MV1000
or from 1 to 10 with the RD-MV2000. Select Off to not display a scale.
• Scale > Division
Select the number of main scale marks on the trend display from 4 to 12 and C10.
C10: The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks, and scale
values are indicated at 0, 30, 50, 70, and 100% positions on the trend display.
The next figure contains examples of scales for different numbers of divisions when
the span is 0 to 100 and the unit is set to “unit.”
6-14
M-4660
6.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
1
Horizontal Trend Display
RD-MV1000
Scale display position
6
5
4
3
2
2
1
3
4
5
6
Number of scale divisions: 4
Number of scale divisions: 5
Number of scale divisions: 6
Number of scale divisions: 7
Number of scale divisions: 8
Number of scale divisions: 9
RD-MV2000
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
7
8
Scale display position
10 9
Display Configuration
Number of scale divisions: 10
Number of scale divisions: 11
Number of scale divisions: 12
Number of scale divisions: C10
1
9
10
11
12
13
Number of scale divisions: 4
Number of scale divisions: 5
Number of scale divisions: 6
Number of scale divisions: 7
Number of scale divisions: 8
Number of scale divisions: 9
Number of scale divisions: 10
Number of scale divisions: 11
Number of scale divisions: 12
Number of scale divisions: C10
M-4660
App
Index
6-15
6.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
Vertical Trend Display
RD-MV1000
Number of scale divisions: 4
Number of scale divisions: 5
Number of scale divisions: 6
Number of scale divisions: 7
Number of scale divisions: 8
Number of scale divisions: 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
Scale display position
Number of scale divisions: 10
Number of scale divisions: 11
Number of scale divisions: 12
Number of scale divisions: C10
RD-MV2000
Number of scale divisions: 4
Number of scale divisions: 5
Number of scale divisions: 6
Number of scale divisions: 7
Number of scale divisions: 8
Number of scale divisions: 9
Number of scale divisions: 10
Number of scale divisions: 11
Number of scale divisions: 12
Number of scale divisions: C10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Scale display position
Note
•
•
6-16
If the scales of multiple channels are set to the same position, the scale of the channel
assigned to the group first is displayed.
Example: If the channel assignment order to a group is 003.002.001, and the scale display
position is set to 1 for all channels, the scale of channel 3 is displayed at display
position 1.
Even if some of the scale display positions are skipped, the positions are shifted towards 1
so that there are no empty positions.
Example: Suppose the channel assignment to a group is 001.002.003, and the display
positions of the scales are set to 1, 3, and 6, respectively. The scales will actually
appear at positions 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
M-4660
6.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
•
•
The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections by the main scale marks. The section between
main scale marks is divided into 10 subsections by medium and small scale marks. Small
scale marks are not displayed if:
• The input range resolution is smaller than the total number of small scale marks.
• Zone display is enabled.
• Partially expanded display is enabled.
The scale values are displayed according to the following rules.
• If the number of scale divisions is 4 to 7 for the vertical trend display, values are
displayed at all main scale marks. If the number of scale divisions is 8 to 12, the
values are displayed at every other main scale mark.
• Scale upper and lower limits are displayed at the ends of the scale.
• Scale values are displayed up to three digits, ignoring the minus sign. However, if the
integer parts of the values at the ends of the scale are both one digit or both is zero,
two digits are displayed.
Example: If the scale is –0.05 to 0.50, the lower limit will be –0.0 and the upper limit
will be 0.5.
• If the integer part of either end of the scale is two or three digits, the fractional part is
truncated.
Example: If the scale is 0.1 to 100.0, the lower limit will be 0 and the upper limit will be
100.
• If the integer part of either end of the scale is four or more digits, the value is
displayed using a 3-digit mantissa and an exponent, “×10” or “×102” for example.
1
Example: If the scale is 10 to 2000, the lower limit will be 1 and the upper limit will be
200×10.
The unit is displayed near the center of the scale. If partially expanded display is enabled,
the display position will be offset from the center. For the vertical trend display, up to six
characters can be displayed. For the horizontal trend display, up to four characters can be
displayed.
Display Configuration
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Trend > Scale > Digit
Fine: If the scale value is displayed with two digits, it can be changed to three digits.
For example, if the scale range is 49.0 to 51.0, the scale values will be displayed with
three digits as shown below.
RD-MV1000
9
10
RD-MV2000
11
12
• Trend > Scale > Value indicator
The current value is indicated with a mark or a bar.
13
Bar
App
Index
M-4660
6-17
6.8
Displaying Alarm Value Marks and Color Scale
Bands
This section explains how to display alarm value marks on the scale and how to display
a color band over a specified range.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.4.
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Alarm mark or Color scale
band.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Alarm mark, Color scale
band.
Settings
Alarm value mark
Color scale band
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. All of the other settings selected here will be applied to
these channels.
6-18
M-4660
6.8 Displaying Alarm Value Marks and Color Scale Bands
• Alarm mark
Displays marks that indicate the values of the high and low limit alarms, delay high
and low limit alarms, and difference high and low limit alarms. These settings are
shared with the bar graph display.
• Alarm mark > Mark kind
Setting
Alarm
Fixed
Description
Displays green marks under normal conditions and red
marks when alarms are activated.
Displays marks in fixed colors.
1
2
Mark
or
3
• Alarm mark > Indicate on Scale
To display alarm value marks, select On.
4
• A
larm mark > Alarm mark color > Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm 3, and
Alarm 4
If Mark kind is set to Fixed, specify the alarm value mark colors.
• Color scale band
Displays a color band on the scale for a specified section of the measurement range.
These settings are shared with the bar graph display.
• Color scale band > Band area
6
Description
Displays a color band for the area inside the range.
Displays a color band for the area outside the range.
Disables this function.
Display Configuration
Setting
In
Out
Off
5
7
• Color scale band > Color
Set a color.
• Color scale band > Display position > Lower, Upper
8
Specify the display position. Specify a value within the span or scale range.
Lower: The lower limit of the area.
Upper: The upper limit of the area.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-19
6.9
Partially Expanding a Waveform
This section explains how to expand a portion of a waveform (and shrink the other
portion).
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.4.
Display
• Turning ON/OFF the Partially Expanded Display Function
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message, Input, Alarm.
• Partially Expanded Display Settings
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Partial.
6-20
M-4660
6.9 Partially Expanding a Waveform
1
Settings
• View > Partial
If you select On, the Partial item appears in the Setting Mode menu.
2
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.
• Partial > On/Off
3
To enable the partially expanded display function, select On.
• Partial > Expand
Set the position where the value specified by Boundary will be displayed as a
percentage of the display span from within the range of 1 to 99.
4
• Partial > Boundary
5
6
Display Configuration
Set the boundary value between the reduced section and the expanded section from
within the range of “the minimum span value + the smallest number expressible given
the decimal place” to “the maximum span value – the smallest number expressible
given the decimal place.” For channels that are set to scaling, the selectable range is
“the minimum scale value + the smallest number expressible given the decimal place”
to “the maximum scale value – the smallest number expressible given the decimal
place.”
Example: Input range: –6 V to 6V. Expand: 30. Boundary: 0
The –6 V to 0 V range is displayed in the 0% to 30% range, and the 0 V to
6 V range is displayed in the 30% to 100% range.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-21
6.10 Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the
Waveform at Start, Message Display Direction,
Waveform Line Width, and Grid
This section explains how to change the display layout, waveform line width, and grid. It
also explains how to clear waveforms when memory sampling starts.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.4.
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD, Monitor.
Settings
• Trend > Direction
Set the trend waveform display direction to Horizontal, Vertical, Wide, or Split.
• Trend > Trend clear
Setting
On
Off
Description
Clears the displayed waveforms when memory sampling starts.
Does not clear the displayed waveforms when memory sampling starts.
• Trend > Message direction
Sets the message display direction to Horizontal or Vertical. The message direction is
fixed to Horizontal if Trend Direction is set to Vertical.
• Trend > Trend line
Sets the line width of trends in dots (1 to 3).
6-22
M-4660
6.10 Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the Waveform at Start, Message Display Direction, Waveform
Line Width, and Grid
• Trend > Grid
Sets the number of grids that will be displayed in the trend waveform display area.
Setting
4 to 12
Auto
Description
Displays a grid that divides the display width into 4 to 12 sections.
Displays the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the
first-assigned channel of a group.
1
2
• Second interval
3
See section 6.3 for details.
4
5
6
Display Configuration
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-23
6.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method
This section explains how to change the bar graph display method.
For an explanation of the bar graph display, see section 1.4.
Display
• Display Direction
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Bar graph.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD,
Monitor.
• Base Position and the Number of Scale Divisions
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Bar graph.
6-24
M-4660
6.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Meas channel > Zone, Scale, Bar graph.
1
2
3
4
5
Settings
• Bar graph > Direction
Set the bar graph display direction to Horizontal or Vertical.
6
• First-CH, Last-CH
Display Configuration
Select the target channels. All of the other settings selected here will be applied to
these channels.
7
• Bar graph > Base position
Set the base position of bar graphs to Normal, Center, Lower, or Upper. A description
of how the MV displays bar graphs depending on this setting is given on the following
pages. This setting is applied to the bar graph display and to the bar that indicates the
current value on the scale in the trend display.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-25
6.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method
When the Bar Graph Display Direction Is Set to Vertical
• Normal
The value at the bottom of the bar graph: The span lower limit or span upper limit
(or scale lower limit or scale upper limit),
whichever is less
The value at the top of the bar graph:The span lower limit or span upper limit
(or scale lower limit or scale upper limit),
whichever is greater
Starting point of the bar:
Bottom edge
• Center
The value at the bottom of the bar graph: Same as with Normal.
The value at the top of the bar graph:
Same as with Normal.
Starting point of the bar:
Center
• Lower
The value at the bottom of the bar graph: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
The value at the top of the bar graph:
Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Starting point of the bar:
Bottom edge
• Upper
The value at the bottom of the bar graph: Same as with Lower.
The value at the top of the bar graph:
Same as with Lower.
Starting point of the bar:
Top edge
Normal
Center
Lower
Upper
VL
VL
Vupper
Vupper
VS
VS
Vlower
Vlower
Vupper:
Vlower:
VL:
VS:
:
Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
Vlower or Vupper, whichever is greater
Vlower or Vupper, whichever is less
Starting point of the bar
Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input
range are 0.0 and –100.0, respectively
Normal
Center
Lower
Upper
6-26
0.0
0.0
–100.0
–100.0
-100.0
-100.0
0.0
0.0
M-4660
6.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method
When the Bar Graph Display Direction Is Set to Horizontal
The span lower limit (or scale lower limit) is set to the left edge of the bar graph, and
the span upper limit (or scale upper limit) is set to the right edge of the bar graph.
• Starting point of the bar
Normal: The left edge or right edge, whichever is less
Center: Center
Lower: Left edge
Upper: Right edge
Normal
Vlower
(Vlower < Vupper)
Vupper
Lower
Vlower
Vupper
Upper
Vlower
5
Vupper
6
Display Configuration
Vupper: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Vlower: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
:
Starting point of the bar
Example: When the input range’ s span lower limit is 0.0,
and the span upper limit is –100.0
Normal
Center
Lower
Upper
0.0
–100.0
0.0
–100.0
0.0
–100.0
0.0
–100.0
7
8
9
When Displaying a Bar That Indicates the Current Value on the Scale in
the Trend Display
Normal
Center
Lower
Vlower
Upper
Vupper
Normal
(Vlower < Vupper)
10
Vupper
11
(Vlower > Vupper)
Center
3
4
Center
Vlower
2
Vupper
(Vlower > Vupper)
1
12
Lower
Vlower
13
Upper
• Bar graph > Division
App
Select the number of main scale marks from 4 to 12.
Index
M-4660
6-27
6.12 Changing the Display Background Color
This section explains how to change the display background color. This setting is applied
to the operation screen.
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Monitor.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD, Monitor.
Settings
• Monitor > Background > Display
Set the background color of the operation screen to White (default setting) or Black.
• Monitor > Background > Historical trend
Select the background color of the historical trend display from the following:
Settings: White, Black (default setting), Cream, and Lightgray
6-28
M-4660
1
6.13 Automatically Switching Display Groups
This section explains how to enable the automatic switching of the displayed group at
specified intervals.
2
Display
RD-MV1000
3
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Monitor.
4
5
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD, Monitor.
6
Display Configuration
7
8
9
10
Settings
• Monitor > Scroll time
Select a switching interval from 5 s to 1 min from the available choices. The displayed
group switches in ascending order.
Use the display selection menu to select whether or not to automatically switch the
display.
See section 5.2 for details.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-29
6.14 Automatically Returning to a Specified Display
This section explains how to configure the MV to automatically switch back to a specified
display if there is no user activity within a set time period.
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Monitor.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD, Monitor.
Settings
• Monitor > Jump default display
The MV will return to a specified display if there is no key operation within a set time
period.
Setting
1min to 1h
Off
Description
The time interval for switching the display.
Disables this function.
Procedure
• Specifying the Display
1. Switch to the operation screen that you want to register.
2. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
3. Press the Standard display soft key.
The display is registered.
6-30
M-4660
1
6.15 Registering Favorite Displays
This section explains how to register often-used displays to the HISTORY key for easy
access.
2
3
HISTORY key
4
Display
5
Press MENU and select Menu tab > Display > HISTORY Key action.
6
Display Configuration
7
8
Settings
• HISTORY key action > Action
Setting
History
Favorite
Description
Switches to the historical trend display when the key is pressed.
Switches to the favorite display that you registered when the key is pressed.
9
Select Favorite if you want to register favorite displays and switch to them.
• HISTORY key action > Group display
Setting
Current
Saved
Description
Displays a favorite display in the current group.
Displays a favorite display in the group that was selected when you registered
the favorite display.
10
11
• HISTORY key action > Time axis zoom
Setting
Current
Saved
Description
Displays a favorite display at the current time axis zoom rate.
Displays a favorite display at the time axis zoom rate that was selected when
you registered the favorite display.
12
13
Procedure
• Registering Displays
You can register up to eight displays.
App
1. Switch to the display that you want to register in Operation Mode.
2. Press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
Index
M-4660
6-31
6.15 Registering Favorite Displays
3. Press the Favorite regist soft key. Then, press a registration number soft key.
4. Press the Regist soft key.
A window opens for you to enter the display name.
* To delete a registration, press the Delete soft key.
5. Enter the display name (up to 16 characters,
A a # 1 ).
6. Press DISP/ENTER.
The display is registered.
• Switching the Display
Press the HISTORY key to switch the displays in the order of their registration.
Pressing the history key after switching to the last registered display will switch the
display back to the original display.
6-32
M-4660
1
6.16 Writing a Message When the MV Recovers
from a Power Failure
This section explains how to configure the MV to write a message to the trend display
when the MV recovers from a power failure that occurs during memory sampling.
2
• Power Recovery Message
RD-MV1000
3
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message.
4
5
6
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
View, Message, Input, Alarm.
Display Configuration
RD-MV2000
7
8
9
10
Settings
11
• Message > Power-fail message
Setting
On
Off
Description
Automatically writes a message when the MV recovers from a power failure that
occurs during memory sampling.
Display example: 15:12 Power Off 2008/01/23 15:12:57
Disables this function.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-33
6.17 Changing the Function Menu and the Display
Selection Menu
This section explains how to change the contents of the function menu, which is
displayed when you press the FUNC key, and the display selection menu, which is
displayed when you press the DISP/ENTER key.
Display
• Function Menu
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Menu customize > Function menu.
Number indicating
the display order
Menu name
White Used
Gray: Not used
• Display Selection Menu
Press MENU and select Menu tab > Menu customize > Display menu.
Separator
6-34
M-4660
6.17 Changing the Function Menu and the Display Selection Menu
1
Settings
• Enabling/Disabling the Function Menu Items
Menu items that are in white are shown.
2
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Hide or Select soft key.
If you press the Hide soft key, the menu item will be displayed in gray and will not appear in
the function menu.
• Changing the Displayed Order of Function Menu Items
Menu items are displayed in numeric order. Menu items appear when the
corresponding function can be used.
3
4
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Select soft key.
The menu item is enclosed in a red frame.
5
3. Press the arrow keys to select the destination.
4. Press the Transfer soft key.
The menu item moves to the selected number position.
6
• Description of the Function Menu Items
For a description of each item, see the respective section.
Display Configuration
7
Sec. 5.1 Sec. 6.4 Sec. 6.4 Sec. 4.4 Sec. 4.6
Sec. 4.10
8
Sec. 4.5 Sec. 3.8 Sec. 9.8 Sec. 4.4 Sec. 4.4
Sec. 4.4 Sec. 5.9 Sec. 10.4 Sec. 10.4 Sec.10.4
9
Sec. 7.2 Sec. 7.3 Sec. 8.1 Sec. 8.3 Sec. 8.3
10
Sec. 6.3 Sec. 4.3 Sec. 4.3 Sec. 6.15 Sec. 5.11
11
Sec. 9.3 Sec. 9.3 Comm.* Comm.* Comm.*
12
Comm.*
Sec 5.11 (only with the MV2000)
* MV1000/MV2000 Communication Interface User’s Manual
13
• Enabling/Disabling the Display Selection Menu and Submenu
Menu items that are in white are shown.
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
App
2. Press the Hide or Select soft key.
If you press the Hide soft key, the menu item will be displayed in gray and will not appear in
the display selection menu.
M-4660
6-35
Index
6.17 Changing the Function Menu and the Display Selection Menu
• Changing the Display Selection Menu/Submenu Positions
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Select soft key.
The menu item is enclosed in a red frame.
3. Press the arrow keys to select the destination.
4. Press the Transfer soft key.
The menu item moves to the selected position.
• Showing/Hiding Separators
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Separate soft key.
A separator (line) is displayed between the current item and the next lower item.
If the separator is already showing, pressing the key hides it.
You can set up to three separators in the display selection menu and each submenu.
• Description of the Display Selection Menu and Submenu Items
Items with an asterisk are set to Hide by default.
Display Selection
Menu
Trend
*
TREND HISTORY
DIGITAL
BAR
OVERVIEW
*
*
6-36
Submenu
Reference Section
GROUP 1 to GROUP 101/GROUP 362
ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL
AUTO ZONE ON/OFF
SCALE ON/OFF
FINE GRID ON/OFF
DIGITAL ON/OFF
MESSAGE DISP 1/2
TREND SPACE ON/OFF
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF
EXPAND2
GROUP 1 to GROUP 101/GROUP 362
GROUP 1 to GROUP 101/GROUP 362
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF
EXPAND2
GROUP 1 to GROUP 101/GROUP 362
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF
EXPAND2
CURSOR ON/OFF
JUMP TO ALM SUM
JUMP TO TREND
JUMP TO DIGITAL
JUMP TO BAR
EXPAND2
Section 5.2/6.12
Section 5.2/6.13
Section 5.2
Section 5.2/6.12
Section 5.2
Section 5.2/6.12
Section 5.2
Sections 5.2 and 6.12
Sections 5.2 and 6.12
Section 5.11
Section 5.3
Section 5.2
Section 5.2
Section 5.11
Section 5.2
Section 5.2
Section 5.11
Section 5.4
Section 5.4
Section 5.4
Section 5.4
Section 5.4
Section 5.11
M-4660
6.17 Changing the Function Menu and the Display Selection Menu
Display Selection
Menu
INFORMATION
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
LOG
4 PANEL2
*
EXPAND2
Reference Section
ALARM SUMMARY
MESSAGE SUMMARY
MEMORY SUMMARY
MODBUS CLIENT
MODBUS MASTER
RELAY
REPORT DATA
COLUMN BAR
TO HISTORY
TO HISTORY(DISP)
TO HISTORY(EV)
TO OVERVIEW
CHANGE SORT KEY
ASCENDING/DESCENDING ORDER
DATA SAVE MODE
SELECT SAVE
M.SAMPLE SAVE
REPORT SAVE
ALL SAVE
CHANGE DISP ITEM
CHANGE DATA KIND
FILENAME/TIME DISPLAY
CHANGE REPORT CH
DUAL/SINGLE GRAPH
SELECT COLUMN
REPORT GROUP1 to REPORT
GROUP41/REPORT GROUP62
EXPAND2
LOGIN
ERROR
COMMUNICATION
FTP
MAIL
WEB
SNTP
DHCP
MODBUS
MIX
ALL TREND
ALL DIGITAL
ALL BAR
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
Section 5.5
Section 5.6
Section 5.7/5.8/5.9
Section 5.7/5.8/5.9
Section 5.7/5.8/5.9
Section 5.7
Section 5.7/5.8
Section 5.7/5.8
Section 5.9
Section 5.9
Section 5.9
Section 5.9
Section 5.9
Section 5.8
Section 5.9
Section 5.9
Section 5.5
Section 5.6
Section 5.6
Section 5.6
Section 5.11
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.10
Section 5.11
Section 5.11
Section 5.11
Section 5.11
Section 5.11
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display Configuration
*
Submenu
7
8
9
10
1 RD-MV1000 only
2 RD-MV2000 only
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
6-37
Chapter 7
Event Action
7.1
1
Configuring the Event Action Function
This section explains how to configure the MV to execute a specified action when a
given event occurs. This function is called event action. This section also explains how to
configure the remote control function (/R1 option) and the USER key.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.7.
For event action configuration examples, see appendix 2.
Display
2
3
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > Event action.
4
5
6
Settings
• Logic box number
7
You can set up to 40 event actions.
Event Action
• Event
An event is a condition for executing an action.
Setting
None
Remote
Relay
Switch
Timer
Match T
8
Description
—
Select a remote control input terminal number.
Select an alarm output relay number.
Select an internal switch number.
Select a timer number.
A match time timer.
Select a match timer number.
—
—
Alarm
UserKey
9
10
• Action
An action that is executed when an event occurs.
Setting
RD-MV1000
Memory
Start
Stop
Trigger
RD-MV2000
Memory
Start
Stop
Trigger
AlarmACK
AlarmACK
Math
Math
MathStart
MathStop
MathReset
MathStart
MathStop
MathReset
11
Description
Memory start/stop
Memory start
Memory stop
An event trigger.
You can specify this when the MV is configured to record
event data.
You cannot specify this when the event is set to Relay,
Switch, or Alarm.
Computation start/stop. You can specify this on models with
the /M1 or /PM1 option.
You can specify this on models with the /M1 or /PM1 option.
You can specify this on models with the /M1 or /PM1 option.
You can specify this on models with the /M1 or /PM1 option.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
7-1
7.1 Configuring the Event Action Function
7-2
Setting
RD-MV1000
SaveDisp
RD-MV2000
SaveDisplay
Description
SaveEvent
SaveEvent
Message
Message
Snapshot
Rate1/2
Snapshot
DisplayRate1/2
ManualSample
TimerReset
ManualSample
TimerReset
Group
DisplayGroupChange
Flag
PanelLoad
Flag
PanelLoad
TimeAdjust
TimeAdjust
You can specify this when the MV is configured to
record display data.
You can specify this when the MV is configured to
record event data.
Set the message number and destination. Set
the message destination to all groups (All) or to a
specific group number.
—
A display rate switch.
You can specify this when trend update interval
switching is enabled.
—
A relative time timer reset.
You cannot specify this when the event is set to
Timer.
A display group switch.
Specify the number of the group you want to
display.
A /M1 or /PM1 option.
You can only specify this when the event is set to
Remote.
Time adjustment.
You can specify this only when the event is set to
Remote.
M-4660
7.2
1
Setting Timers
You can set timers on the events of the event action function. Timers are also used in
TLOG computation.
For an explanation of the event action function, see section 7.1.
2
Display
3
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > Timer.
• When relative time is selected
• When absolute time is selected
4
5
6
Settings
You cannot change these settings during memory sampling or computation.
7
• Timer No.
Event Action
You can set four timers (1 to 4).
When Using a Relative Timer
• Mode
8
Select Relative.
• Interval
Set the interval in the range of 00:01 (1 minute) to 24:00 (24 hours).
9
• Reset at Math Start
On: Resets the timer when computation is started. The resetting of the timer is not
considered a timeout. Even if the timer is used as an event, the action is not executed.
10
When Using an Absolute Timer
• Mode
Select Absolute.
11
• Interval
Set the interval from within the range of available settings (1min to 24h).
• Ref. time
Set the time in the range of hour 0 to hour 23.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
7-3
7.2 Setting Timers
Procedure
• Resetting a Relative Timer
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Timer reset soft key.
3. Press the timer soft key that you want to reset. Select All to reset all timers.
The relative timer is reset.
Explanation
• Resetting a Relative Timer
Restart the timer.
• The resetting of the timer is considered a timeout. (If the timer is used as an event,
the action is executed.)
• If the timer is used in TLOG computation (/M1 and /PM1 options) and MathReset is
specified, the computed result is reset.
7-4
M-4660
7.3
1
Setting the Match Time Timer
You can set the time match condition that is used for the event action function. These
timers are also used in TLOG computation.
For an explanation of the event action function, see section 7.1.
2
Display
3
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > MatchTimeTimer.
4
5
6
Settings
You cannot change these settings during memory sampling or computation.
• Timer number
7
You can set four match time conditions (1 to 4).
Setting
Day
Week
Month
Year
Event Action
• Kind
Description
Sets the time match condition for a day.
Sets the time match condition for a week.
Sets the time match condition for a month.
Sets the time match condition for a year.
8
9
Set the items with check marks in the following table according to the Kind setting.
Settings
Day
Month
Day
Day of the week
Hour:Minute
Kind
Month
Week
ü
ü
ü
Year
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
10
• Month
11
Set the month.
• Day
Set the day.
• Day of the week
12
Set the day of the week.
• Hour:Minute
Set the time in the range of 00:00 to 23:59.
13
• Timer action
Setting
Single
Repeat
Description
Executes the action once when the condition is met.
You can reset a timer by pressing FUNC after the timer expires.
Executes the action each time the condition is met.
App
Index
M-4660
7-5
7.3 Setting a Match Time Timer
Procedure
• Resetting a Match Time Timer
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Match T Reset soft key.
3. Press the match time timer soft key that you want to reset.
The match time timer is reset.
Explanation
• Resetting a Match Time Timer
A match time timer becomes inactive after it times out. You can reset an inactive
match time timer to activate it again.
• The resetting of the timer is not considered a timeout.
• Resetting of a timer affects a match time timer whose time action is set to Single.
• If the timer is used in TLOG computation (/M1 and /PM1 options) and MathReset is
specified, the computed result is reset.
7-6
M-4660
7.4
1
Using the Remote Control Function (/R1
option) and the USER Key
2
You can use the event action function to set remote control and USER key inputs as
events that will trigger actions.
For event action configuration instructions, see section 7.1.
For a configuration example, see appendix 2.
3
4
5
6
7
Event Action
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
7-7
7.5
Using an Alarm, Output Relay, or Internal
Switch
You can use the event action function to set alarms, output relays, or internal switches as
events that will trigger actions.
For event action configuration instructions, see section 7.1.
For a configuration example, see appendix 2.
7-8
M-4660
Chapter 8
8.1
Security Features
1
Disabling the Keys (key lock function)
This section explains how to disable the keys.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.8.
2
• Selecting the Key Lock Function
3
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save.
4
5
6
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save, Batch.
7
8
Security Features
9
10
11
• Disabling Keys
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Keylock
> Password, Key action, Media or Action of Function.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
8-1
8.1 Disabling the Keys (key lock function)
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab >
Keylock.
Settings
• Security > Key
Select Keylock.
Setting
Keylock
Login
Description
Enables the key lock function. The Keylock item appears in the Basic
Setting Mode menu.
Enables the login function. See section 8.2 for details.
• Password
The password used to release the key lock (Up to eight characters,
The MV displays “********” for the password.
Aa# 1)
• Key action, External Media, and Action of Function
Select whether or not to lock each item.
Setting
Free
Lock
8-2
Description
Does not lock the item.
Locks the item.
M-4660
8.1 Disabling the Keys (key lock function)
1
Procedure
• Locking the Keys
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
2
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Keylock soft key.
The key lock function is enabled. The key lock icon appears in the status display section.
3
• Releasing the Key Lock Function
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
4
2. Press the Keylock soft key.
A window prompting for the password opens.
5
6
7
3. Enter the password, and press DISP/ENTER.
The key lock is released. The key lock icon disappears from the status display section.
8
Security Features
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
8-3
8.2
Allowing Only Registered Users to Operate the
MV (login function)
This section explains how to configure the MV so that only registered users can operate
the MV.
For an explanation of this function, see section 1.8.
Display
• Login Function
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Security, Media save, Batch.
• Logout Method
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Login >
Basic settings.
8-4
M-4660
8.2 Allowing Only Registered Users to Operate the MV (login function)
• Registering an Administrator
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Login >
Admin settings.
1
2
3
4
• Registering a User (user-level user)
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Login >
User settings.
5
6
7
8
• User Privileges
Security Features
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Login >
Authority of user > Key action, Media or Action of Function.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
8-5
8.2 Allowing Only Registered Users to Operate the MV (login function)
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Login >
Authority of user.
Settings
You can specify different login settings for logins through keys and logins through
communications.
• Security > Key
Select Login.
Setting
Login
Keylock
Off
Description
Allows only registered users to operate the MV by using keys. The Login
item appears in the Basic Setting Mode menu.
Enables the key lock function. See section 8.1 for details.
Disables security features.
• Security > Communication
Setting
Login
Off
Description
Only allows registered users to operate the MV via a communication
interface. The Login item appears in the Basic Setting Mode menu.
Disables security features.
• User basic settings > Auto logout
Setting
Off
1min to 10min
Description
Does not log out until you manually log out.
Automatically logs out when there is no key operation for a specified time.
• User basic settings > Operation without login
Sets the operations that a user can carry out when logged out.
Setting
Off
Display
Description
Only allows a user to log in.
Allows a user to log in or switch the operation screen.
• Admin number
You can register up to five administrators. Be sure to register at least one
administrator. You can only use the login function when there is at least one registered
administrator.
8-6
M-4660
8.2 Allowing Only Registered Users to Operate the MV (login function)
1
• Admin number > Mode
The available settings vary depending on the Security setting.
Setting
Off
Key
Comm
Web
Key+Comm
Description
No registration.
Allows login through keys.
Allows login through a communication interface.
Allows login to the MV operator page and monitor page from a Web browser.
Allows login through keys and through a communication interface.
2
3
• Admin number > User name
Set the user name (up to 20 characters, A a # 1 ).
• You cannot register a user name that is already registered.
• You cannot register “quit” or a user name containing only spaces.
4
• Admin number > Password
Set the password (up to eight characters, A a # 1 ).
The default password is a string of question marks (????????). When you set a
password, the MV displays a string of asterisks (********).
• You cannot register “quit” or a password containing only spaces.
5
6
• User number
You can register up to 30 users.
7
• User number > Mode
The available settings vary depending on the Security setting.
Description
No registration.
Allows login through keys.
Allows login through a communication interface.
Allows login to the MV monitor page from a Web browser.
Allows login through keys and through a communication interface.
8
Security Features
Setting
Off
Key
Comm
Web
Key+Comm
9
• User number > User name and Password
See the explanation for the administrator user name and password.
10
• User number > Authority of user
Setting
Off
1 to 10
Description
Does not limit operations.
An operation limitation registration number.
11
• Authority of user, Key action, Media/USB, and Action of Function
Select the “authority of user” preset number from 1 to 10.
See section 8.1 for details.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
8-7
8.3
Logging in and Logging Out
This section explains how to log into the MV by using keys. For instructions on how to
operate the MV via a communication interface, see the Communication Interface User’s
Manual (IM RD-MV1000-17E).
Procedure
• Logging In
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
A list of registered user names appears.
2. Press the arrow keys to select a user name, and press DISP/ENTER.
A window opens for you to enter the password.
3. Enter the password,* and press DISP/ENTER.
*
The MV is ready for key operation. The status display section shows the logged-in user
name.
The password that you enter appears as a string of asterisks (********).
• Logging Out
Logging Out Using Keys
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Logout soft key.
The MV logs you out. The user name disappears from the status display section.
Auto Logout
If auto logout is enabled, the MV will automatically log you out if you do not operate
the keys for a specified time.
8-8
M-4660
8.3 Logging in and Logging Out
1
• Changing the Password
Procedure Using Keys
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2
2. Press the Password change soft key.
A window prompting for the current password opens.
3. Enter the current password, and press DISP/ENTER.
3
A window prompting for a new password opens.
4. Enter a new password, and press DISP/ENTER.
A window opens for re-entering the new password.
5. Enter the new password, and press DISP/ENTER.
4
The window closes, and the new password is activated.
5
6
7
8
Security Features
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
8-9
Chapter 9
9.1
Environment Settings
1
Setting the Date and Time
This section explains how to set the date and time. If you are using the MV in a region
that uses DST, specify the date and time for switching between DST and standard time.
2
Setting the Date and Time
Display
3
• Date and Time
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Date/Time.
4
5
6
Settings
7
Time set
Enter the date and time, and press DISP/ENTER.
Configuring Daylight Saving Time
8
Display
• DST
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Date/Time > Daylight Saving Time.
9
Environment Settings
10
11
Settings
12
• Use/Not
To enable the DST function, select Use.
• Start time
13
Specify the date/time to switch from standard time to DST. Set the month, the nth
week, the day of the week, and the time.
• End time
Specify the date/time to switch from DST to standard time. Set the month, the nth
week, the day of the week, and the time.
App
Index
M-4660
9-1
9.1 Setting the Date and Time
Other Time Settings
Set the time zone of the region where the MV will be used, the time correction operation
during memory sampling, and the date format. Be sure to set the time zone if you are
using Ethernet network functions.
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Time
settings.
Settings
• Time settings > Time zone (HHMM)
Set the time zone of the region where the MV will be used in terms of the time
difference from GMT. Specify a value in the range of –1300 to 1300 (where the first
two digits denote the hour and the last two digits denote the minute). A negative value
indicates that the local time is behind GMT.
Example: The standard time in Japan is ahead of GMT by 9 hours. In this case, enter
900.
• Time settings > Time deviation limit
Current time
Specified time
Time deviation limit
When the time deviation between the time on the MV and the specified time is within
±(the value specified here), the time on the MV is gradually corrected. Otherwise, the
time is corrected immediately.
Setting
10s to 5min
Off
Description
The time deviation limit.
Disables gradual time correction.
Example:If Time deviation limit is set to 10s and the time on the MV is 10 hours 21
minutes 15 seconds, the time is gradually corrected if the specified time
is between 10 hours 21 minutes 5 seconds and 10 hours 21 minutes 25
seconds.
9-2
M-4660
9.1 Setting the Date and Time
• Time settings > Date format
Setting
Example for Jan. 23, 2008
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
D.M.Y
2008/01/23
01/23/2008
23/01/2008
23.01.2008
Time displayed at the grid position
of the trend display (if the time is 7:00
on Jan. 23)*
01/23 07
01/23 07
23/01 07
23.01 07
* Only when the trend update interval is set to a value greater than or equal to 1h/div.
Where the Date Format Setting Applies
The date format is applied to the date shown on the display. It does not affect the date
format on the date/time configuration screen, the date in the output data transmitted
via a communication interface, the date information saved along with data, or the date
used in data file names.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Environment Settings
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
9-3
9.2
Setting the Temperature Unit and Decimal
Point Type
This section explains how to set the temperature unit and how to set the type of decimal
point that is used on the display and in data files saved to text format.
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Operating environment.
Settings
• Temperature
Select the temperature unit. This setting affects all temperature measurement
channels.
Setting
C
F
Description
For Celsius
For Fahrenheit
• Decimal Point Type
Setting
Point
Comma
9-4
Display Example
1234.56
1234,56
M-4660
9.3
1
Viewing MV Information
This section explains how to display the MV system information and network information.
Procedure
2
• Displaying System Information
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
3
The function menu appears.
2. Press the System info soft key.
The system information is displayed.
4
• Displaying Network Information
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
5
2. Press the Network info soft key.
The network information is displayed.
Explanation
• System Information Screen
6
ANALOG: Number of measurement channels
(C) denotes the clamped input
terminals (/H2 option).
MATH:
Number of math channels
(/M1 and /PM1 options)
EXTCH: Number of external input channels
(/MC1 option)
7
MEMORY: Internal memory size
OPTIONS
8
MAC address
Version: Firmware version
9
• Network Information Screen
Environment Settings
The screen displays the following MV settings.
IP address, MAC address, DNS server, host name, and domain name
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
9-5
9.4
Changing the Displayed Language
This section explains how to select the displayed language.
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Operating environment.
Settings
• Operating environment > Language
Set the language to English, Japanese, German, French, Chinese, or Korean.
9-6
M-4660
9.5
1
Initializing the MV
This section explains how to initialize the MV and how to clear the internal memory.
For a list of default settings, see the First Step Guide (IM RD-MV1000-02E/IM RDMV2000-02E).
2
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Initialize tab > Clear
settings and data or Clear data only.
3
4
5
6
Settings
• Initialization Method
Menu Item
Clear settings and
data
Clear data only
Description
Initializes the settings in Basic Setting Mode and Setting Mode to their
default values and clears the data in the internal memory.
Clears the data in the internal memory.
Data in the Internal Memory That Is Cleared
Display data, event data, manually sampled data, report data (/M1 and /PM1 options),
and log information.
7
8
9
Procedure
Environment Settings
1. Select Clear settings and data or Clear data only.
10
2. Press DISP/ENTER.
A confirmation window opens.
3. Select Yes, and then press DISP/ENTER.
The specified operation is executed, and the MV returns to Operation Mode.
If you do not want to initialize, select No, and press DISP/ENTER.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
9-7
9.6
Transmitting the MV Status via Relay Contact (/
F1 option)
This section explains how to configure the MV to transmit a relay contact signal when an
error occurs in the MV CPU. It also explains how to configure the MV to transmit a signal
to another relay when a specific condition occurs.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.10.
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Status
relay.
Settings
• Memory/Media status
On: Transmits the internal memory and CF card statuses to a relay.
• Measurement error
On: Transmits a relay signal when a measurement error occurs.
• Communication error
On: Transmits a relay signal when a communication error occurs.
• Memory stop
On: Outputs a relay signal when memory sampling is stopped.
Procedure
• FAIL Output
No settings or operations are required. The MV transmits a relay contact signal if it
detects a CPU error. The MV also transmits a relay contact signal when the MV is
turned OFF.
• Status relay
The MV transmits a relay contact signal when a specified condition occurs.
9-8
M-4660
9.7
1
Controlling the MV by Using a Keyboard
Connecting/Removing a Keyboard
2
• Connecting a Keyboard
Connect the keyboard connector to the MV USB port.
The message “USB device has been connected” appears on the screen, and the
keyboard is ready for use.
Front panel USB port
3
Rear panel USB port
4
• Removing the Keyboard
5
Remove the keyboard connector from the MV USB port.
Note
•
•
•
•
You can connect or remove a keyboard regardless of the MV condition (power ON/OFF or
displayed screen).
You can connect one keyboard to the MV.
Use a keyboard appropriate for the MV language setting.
The CapsLock and NumLock key states are retained even if you disconnect the USB
keyboard.
6
7
8
9
Environment Settings
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
9-9
9.7 Controlling the MV by Using a Keyboard
Operating from a Keyboard
You can carry out the same operations that you carry out from the MV front panel.
Example: Switch to Setting Mode
While the MV is in Operation Mode, press Ctrl+M.
The MV switches to Setting Mode, and the corresponding menu appears.
• Mapping of the MV Keys to the Keyboard Keys
Keyboard Keys
MV Keys
Enter
DISP/ENTER
←
Left arrow key
↑
Up arrow key
↓
Down arrow key
→
Right arrow key
Num Enter
DISP/ENTER
Esc
ESC
F1 to F7
Soft keys 1 through 7
F9
FUNC
F12
Hold down FUNC for 3 seconds
Left-Windows
MENU
Right-Windows
MENU
Application
HISTORY
Ctrl+S
START/STOP
Ctrl+T
T/DIV
Ctrl+U
USER
Ctrl+M
MENU
Ctrl+H
HISTORY
Tab, Shift+Tab
Arrow keys*
* Press Tab to move the cursor to the next item or Shift+Tab to move to the previous item.
This does not work in the following screens:
Operation screens, the Setting mode and Basic setting mode menus, screens for entering
values and characters, the “Menu customize” and “Save/Load” screens in Setting mode,
and the “Load setting, Initialize” screen in Basic setting mode
• Entering Alphabetical Characters, Numbers, and Symbols
When alphabetical characters, numbers, and symbols can be entered, you can enter
them from the keyboard. The operation is the same as with normal keys.
Symbols You Can Enter from a Keyboard
You can enter the symbols below. However, only the symbols that are valid on the MV
can be used. For example, you cannot use the following characters for the data save
destination directory name: & * / : ?
#
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
:
?
@
[
*
Press ^ on the keyboard to enter the degree symbol.
]
^
_
• Invalid Keys
Keys enclosed in a frame are invalid.
PC104 keyboard (US)
9-10
M-4660
9.8
1
Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight
Saver
This section explains how to change the LCD brightness. It also explains how to set the
backlight saver function to prolong the service life of the LCD backlight.
2
Display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Display > LCD.
3
4
5
6
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and select Menu tab > Display > Trend, Bar graph, LCD, Monitor.
7
8
9
Environment Settings
10
Settings
• Brightness
The larger the value, the brighter the display becomes.
Setting
1 to 8
1 to 6
11
Model
RD-MV1000
RD-MV2000
12
• Backlight saver > Mode
Setting
Off
Dimmer
Timeoff
Description
Disables the backlight saver.
Dims the display if there is no operation for a given time.
Turns the backlight OFF if there is no operation for a given time.
13
App
Index
M-4660
9-11
9.8 Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight Saver
• Backlight saver > Saver time
Select a value from 1min to 1h. If the specified time elapses without any key operation
or alarm occurrence, the LCD backlight switches to the specified mode.
• Backlight saver > Restore
Setting
Key
Key+Alm
Description
The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is
pressed.
The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is
pressed or when an alarm occurs.
Note
•
•
If the backlight is dimmed or turned OFF by the backlight saver function, pressing any key
on the MV will cause the backlight to return to the original brightness. In this instance, the
key does not perform its intended function.
A higher brightness level tends to lead to faster screen discoloration (yellowing) and
brightness degradation. Avoid extended use at an unnecessarily high setting. We also
recommend that you use the backlight saver function.
Procedure
If you set the mode to Dimmer or Timeoff, you can execute the specified operation at any
time by pressing FUNC and selecting LCD saver.
9-12
M-4660
Chapter 10
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
1
10.1 Configuring Computation Channels
This section explains how to set a computation channel’s expression, measurement
range, tag, alarm, and recording On/Off. You cannot set expressions or constants during
memory sampling or computation.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.9.
2
3
Display
• Expressions and Alarms
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Expression, Alarm.
4
5
6
• Constants Used in Expressions
7
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Constant.
8
9
10
• Computation Channel Tag, Memory Sampling On/Off, Alarm Delay
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Tag, Memory sample,
Alarm delay.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Tag, Memory, Delay.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-1
10.1 Configuring Computation Channels
• TLOG Computation Conditions, Rolling Average
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > TLOG, Rolling average.
• C
omputation Error Display, Overflow Data Handling in Statistical
Computation
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Math.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Math, Report.
10-2
M-4660
10.1 Configuring Computation Channels
1
Settings
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.
2
• Calculation expression, span
• Math On/Off
Select On for channels that you want to use.
• Calculation expression
Set the expression by using up to 120 characters.
For instructions on how to write expressions, see section 10.2.
RD-MV1000
Press the Input soft key to open a window for entering an expression.
Press the M1/M2 soft key to switch between a screen used to enter values and
characters and a screen used to enter operators and functions. Use soft keys,
arrow keys, and DISP/ENTER to enter an expression.
3
4
5
6
7
RD-MV2000
Press the Input soft key to open a window used to enter an expression.
8
9
10
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
11
Note
You cannot simultaneously use a USB keyboard and the keys on the MV to enter an
expression. If you press an MV soft key while entering an expression from a USB keyboard, the
expression will be cleared.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-3
10.1 Configuring Computation Channels
• Span Lower, Span Upper
Set the measurement range.
Selectable range of values: –9999999 to 99999999
Selectable decimal places: X.XXXX, XX.XXX, XXX.XX, XXXX.X
• Unit
Set the unit for the computed values (up to six characters,
A a # 1 ).
• Alarm
The available alarm types are high limit alarm, low limit alarm, delay high limit alarm,
and delay low limit alarm.
The range of alarm values is as follows:
Type
H, L, T, t
Alarm Values
–9999999 to 99999999 ignoring the decimal point
For alarm configuration instructions, see section 3.7.
*
If you change the On/Off or expression setting of a computation channel, the alarm on that
channel will be set to Off.
• Alarm delay > Time
Set the alarm delay using an integer in the range of 1 s to 3600 s.
• Tag > Characters
Set the tag name (up to 16 characters,
A a # 1 ).
• Constant
• Number of constant
Select the constant (K01 to K60) you want to set.
• Value
The selectable range is as follows:
–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
The number of significant digits for constants is five. If you are setting a constant in
exponential notation, use up to five digits for the mantissa and up to two digits for
the exponent.
• TLOG
• Timer type
Set the timer type to Timer or MatchTimeTimer.
• Timer No.
Select the timer number that you want to use.
For timer configuration instructions, see section 7.2.
For instructions on how to set the match time timer, see section 7.3.
• Sum scale
Select the sum scale from /s to /h to match the time unit of the measured value.
Example: If the unit of the measured value is m3/min, select /min.
Off: Directly sums the measured data for each scan interval.
• Reset
To reset the TLOG computed value after each interval, select On.
10-4
M-4660
10.1 Configuring Computation Channels
1
• Rolling Average
• On/Off
To calculate the rolling average of the computed results, select On.
• Interval
Select the sampling interval for the rolling average from the available settings. The
sampling interval takes on a value that is an integral multiple of the scan interval.
For example, if the sampling interval is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s, the
actual sampling interval is 6 s.
• Number of samples
Set the number of samples to use for the rolling average using an integer between
1 and 1500.
The rolling average time is equal to the sampling interval × the number of data
samples.
2
3
4
Note
•
•
•
If the number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number
of samples immediately after computation starts, the average of the available data is
calculated.
Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation.
If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit, the data is clipped at the upper or
lower limit, and the rolling average is computed. The upper and lower limits are ±100000000
ignoring the decimal point. The decimal place is the same as that of the span lower limit.
5
6
7
• Memory sample > On/Off
Select On to record the computed data of the target channels.
• Math
• Value on Error
8
Specify whether to display a computation error as +Over or –Over.
• Value on Overflow > SUM, AVE
Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in a SUM or AVE
computation of TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Setting
Error
Skip
Limit
Description
The computed result is a computation error indication.
Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
Uses a limit value in place of the overflow data and continues the
computation.
10
Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in a MAX, MIN, or P-P
computation of TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Description
Uses the overflow data as-is.
Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• Value on Overflow > MAX, MIN, P-P
Setting
Over
Skip
9
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-5
10.2 Writing Expressions
This section defines expressions and explains how to write them.
Common Items
Follow the rules below when writing expressions.
• Use up to 120 characters to write expressions.
• Use parentheses to indicate the order of mathematical functions.
• Specify channels in an expression using channel numbers.
Examples: 1, 12, 101, and 201
• You can write the one digit numbers of constants (K), communication input data (C),
remote input terminal statuses (D), pulse inputs (P, Q), internal switch statuses (S),
alarm output relay statuses (I), and flags (F) in an expression using two digits or one
digit. For example: 01 or 1.
Examples: K01, K1, C01, C1, D01, D1, P01, P1, Q01, Q1, S01, S1, I01, I1, F01, and F1
• Be aware that the data of the previous scan is used for the computation channel’s
value and for the values of channels with numbers that are greater than the
computation channel’s number.
• Write special computations (HOLD, RESET, and CARRY) and conditional expressions
at the beginning of an expression.
Order of Precedence for Computations
The order of precedence for computations in an expression is as follows:
Type
Operators and Functions
(High order of precedence)
Functions
ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), LN(), EXP(), TLOG.MAX(), TLOG.MIN(),
TLOG.AVE(), TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.P-P(), CLOG.MAX(), CLOG.
MIN(), CLOG.AVE(), CLOG.SUM(), CLOG.P-P()
Special computations and conditional expressions
PRE, HOLD, RESET, CARRY, [a?b:c]
Power
**
Logical negation
NOT
Multiplication and division
*, /
Addition and subtraction
+, –
Greater than and less than
.GT., .LT., GE., LE.
Equal and not equal
.EQ., .NE.
Logical product
AND
Logical sum and exclusive logical sum OR, XOR
(Low order of precedence)
Limitations
Expressions have these limitations.
Expression
TLOG computation
CLOG computation
PRE
HOLD(a):b
RESET(a):b
CARRY(a):b
Conditional
expressions [a?b:c]
10-6
Limitations
An operator or function cannot be written inside the parentheses.
An expression can contain only one TLOG function.
The maximum number of channels that can be written in the parentheses is 30.
An operator or function cannot be written inside the parentheses.
An expression can contain only one CLOG function.
An operator or function cannot be written inside the parentheses.
Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
An expression can contain only one HOLD function.
Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
An expression can contain only one RESET function.
Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
An expression can contain only one CARRY function.
Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b.
RESET, CARRY, and HOLD cannot be specified for a, b, and c.
Conditional expressions cannot be combined with other operators or functions
([a?b:c]+001 for example). However, a conditional expression can be specified for a, b,
and c.
M-4660
10.2 Writing Expressions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-7
10.2 Writing Expressions
Basic Arithmetic
Expression Example
• Addition 001+002
(Determines the sum of the measured values of channel 1 and channel 2)
• Subtraction 001–002
(Determines the difference between the measured values of channel 1
and channel 2)
• Multiplication 001*K03
(Multiplies the measured value of channel 1 by constant K03)
• Division 001/K02
(Divides the measured value of channel 1 by constant K02)
Power and Other Operations
Expression Example
• Power 001**002
(Determines the measured value of channel 1 to the power of the
measured value of channel 2)
• Square root SQR(002)
(Determines the square root of the measured value of channel 2)
• Absolute value ABS(002)
(Determines the absolute value of the measured value of channel 2)
• Common logarithm LOG(001)
(Determines the common logarithm (log10) of the measured value
of channel 1)
• Natural logarithm LN(001)
(Determines the natural logarithm of the measured value of
channel 1)
• Exponent EXP(001)
(Determines e to the power of the measured value of channel 1)
Relational Computation
Expression Example
002.LT.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is zero.
002.GT.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is zero.
002.EQ.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is zero.
002.NE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is zero.
002.GE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value of
channel 3, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is zero.
002.LE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value of channel 3,
the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is zero.
10-8
M-4660
10.2 Writing Expressions
Logical Computation
Checks whether the two data values, e1 and e2 (e1 only for NOT), are zero or nonzero,
and computes according to each condition.
AND
Logical product
(Syntax) e1ANDe2
(Condition)If the two data values e1 and e2 are both nonzero, the computed result
is 1. Otherwise, it is zero.
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0→
e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 = 0→
e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 = 0, e2 ≠ 0→
e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 ≠ 0→
e1ANDe2 = 1
1
2
3
4
OR
Logical sum
(Syntax) e1ORe2
(Condition)If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zero, the computed result is
zero. Otherwise, it is 1.
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0→
e1ORe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 = 0→
e1ORe2 = 1
e1 = 0, e2 ≠ 0→
e1ORe2 = 1
e1 ≠ 0, e2 ≠ 0→
e1ORe2 = 1
XOR
Exclusive OR
(Syntax) e1XORe2
(Condition)If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and nonzero or nonzero and
zero, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, it is zero.
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0→
e1XORe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 = 0→
e1XORe2 = 1
e1 = 0, e2 ≠ 0→
e1XORe2 = 1
e1 ≠ 0, e2 ≠ 0→
e1XORe2 = 0
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOT
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Logical negation
(Syntax) NOTe1
(Condition) The result is the inverse of the status of data e1 (zero or nonzero).
(Explanation) e1 = 0→
NOTe1 = 1
e1 ≠ 0→
NOTe1 = 0
11
Expression Example
12
01-02OR03.GT.04
Determines the OR of the computed results of “01-02” and “03.GT.04”.
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-9
10.2 Writing Expressions
TLOG Computation
In the explanation below, you cannot enter an expression that contains an operator or
function, an internal switch (S), a relay (I), or a flag (F) for e1. Also, an expression can
contain only one TLOG function.
TLOG.MAX( )
Maximum value
(Syntax) TLOG.MAX(e1)
(Condition) Determines the maximum value of channel e1.
TLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax) TLOG.MIN(e1)
(Condition) Determines the minimum value of channel e1.
TLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax) TLOG.AVE(e1)
(Condition) Determines the average value of channel e1.
TLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax) TLOG.SUM(e1)
(Condition) Determines the sum of channel e1.
TLOG.P-P( )
Maximum – minimum value
(Syntax) TLOG.P-P(e1)
(Condition) Determines the maximum – minimum value of channel e1.
Expression Example
TLOG.MAX(01)+K01*SQR(02)
Examples of Invalid Expressions
TLOG.AVE(01)+TLOG.AVE(02)
Reason: TLOG appears twice in one expression.
TLOG.AVE(ABS(01))
Reason: A function is used inside the parentheses.
10-10
M-4660
10.2 Writing Expressions
CLOG Computation
Only data from measurement, computation, and external input channels can be used in a
CLOG computation. Up to 30 channels can be written inside the parentheses.
In the explanation below, an operator or function cannot be placed inside the
parentheses. Also, an expression can contain only one CLOG function.
1
2
CLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax) CLOG.SUM(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition)Determines the sum of the data of channels e1, e2, e4, e5, and e6 that
are measured at the same time.
CLOG.MAX( )
Maximum value
(Syntax) CLOG.MAX(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition)Returns the maximum measured data value at a given point in time
from channels e1, e2, e4, e5, and e6.
3
4
5
CLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax) CLOG.MIN(e1.e2.e5.e7)
(Condition)Returns the minimum measured data value at a given point in time from
channels e1, e2, e5, and e7.
CLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax) CLOG.AVE(e1-e6)
(Condition)Returns the average of the measured data values of channels e1 to e6
at a given point in time.
6
7
8
CLOG.P-P( )
Maximum – minimum value
(Syntax) CLOG.P-P(e1.e2.e5.e7)
(Condition)Returns the difference between the maximum and minimum data values
measured at a given point in time from channels e1, e2, e5, and e7.
9
10
Expression Example
CLOG.MAX(001.002.I04-I06)+K01*SQR(002)
CLOG.AVE(001.003.005)+CLOG.AVE(002.004.006)
Reason: CLOG appears twice in one expression.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Examples of Invalid Expressions
11
CLOG.AVE(001.ABS(001))
Reason: A function is used inside the parentheses.
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-11
Special Computation:
PRE( )
(Syntax) PRE(e1)
(Condition) Determines the previous value of e1.
HOLD(a):b
(Syntax) HOLD(a):b
(Condition)When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value is held.
RESET(a):b
(Syntax) RESET(a):b
(Condition)When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value of b is reset, and b is carried
out to derive the computed value.
CARRY(a):b
(Syntax) CARRY(a):b
(Condition)Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the computed value X of b is
less than a, the computed result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a,
the computed result is the excess (X – a).
(Explanation)When a value such as a flow rate is summed and the threshold value
is reached or exceeded, the sum value is reset while carrying over the
amount that exceeded the threshold value.
Expression Example
Expression that sums the values of channel 1 and resets the value when it reaches or
exceeds 10000
K01=10000
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Examples of Invalid Expressions
002+HOLD(K01):TLOS.SUM(001)
HOLD is not at the beginning of the expression.
RESET(101.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)+RESET(101.GT.K01):002
Reason: RESET appears twice in one expression.
Conditional Expression
[a?b:c]
(Syntax) [001.GT.K01?002:003]
(Condition)If the measured value of channel 1 is greater than constant K01, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 2. Otherwise, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 3.
Examples of Invalid Expressions
[001.GT.K01?002:003]*K02
Reason: Used in combination with another operator.
Nested Conditional Expressions
A conditional expression can be written in Expression1, Expression2, and Expression3 in
the equation [Expression1?Expression2:Expression3]. For example, the following expression
is allowed: [Equation1?[Equation2-1?Equation2-2:Equation2-3]:[Equation3-1?Equation32:Equation3-3]]
Expressions can be nested as long as the number of characters does not exceed 120
characters.
10-12
M-4660
10.3 Displaying Computation Channels
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-13
10.3 Displaying Computation Channels
You can assign computation channels to groups and display them just like measurement
channels.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.9.
Display
• Color
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Color.
• Showing the Zone Display, Scale Display, and Bar Graph display
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Zone, Scale or Bar graph.
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Zone, Scale, Bar graph.
10-14
M-4660
1
• Partially Expanded Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Partial.
*
The Partial command appears in the menu if you set Partial to On in Basic Setting Mode.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.9.
2
3
4
• Alarm Mark and Color Scale Band
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Alarm mark or Color
scale band.
5
6
7
8
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Alarm mark, Color scale
band.
9
10
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-15
10.4 Starting/Stopping Computation
Settings
• Group of channel, First-CH, and Last-CH
Select the target channel range.
• Color
See section 6.5 for details.
• Zone
See section 6.6 for details.
• Partial
See section 6.9 for details.
• Bar graph
See section 6.11 for details.
• Scale
See section 6.7 for details.
• Alarm Mark and Color Scale Band
See section 6.8 for details.
10-16
M-4660
1
10.4 Starting/Stopping Computation
Display
2
• Action Performed When the START Key Is Pressed
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Math channel > Math start action.
3
4
5
Settings
• Math start action > Math start
Setting
Off
Start
Reset+Start
Description
Does not start computation even when the START/STOP key is pressed.
Start computation when the START/STOP key is pressed.
Starts computation when the START/STOP key is pressed and resets the
computed result up to that point.
Procedure
7
8
• Starting Computation
• Starting Computation and Memory Sampling at the Same Time
Press START/STOP. Computation starts at the same time as memory sampling.
The computation icon appears in the status display section.
*
6
Math start must be set to Start or Reset+Start.
9
• Starting Computation Only
10
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
Computation starts, and the status display section shows the computation icon.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
2. Press the Math start soft key.
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-17
10.5 Generating Reports
• Stopping Computation
• Stopping Computation and Memory Sampling at the Same Time
1. Press START/STOP.
A confirmation dialog box opens.
2. Select Mem+Math, and then press DISP/ENTER.
Memory sampling and computation stop, and the computation icon in the status display
section disappears.
• Stopping Computation Only
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Math stop soft key.
Computation stops, and the computation icon in the status display section disappears.
Note
When computation is stopped, the computed data of the computation channel is held at the
value that existed immediately before the computation was stopped. If memory sampling is in
progress, the held value is recorded.
• Resetting the Computed Results of All Computation Channels
You can carry out this operation regardless of whether or not computation is in
progress.
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Math reset soft key.
The computed results of all computation channels are reset.
• Releasing the Computation Data Dropout Display
You can carry out this operation when a computation data dropout occurs. When a
computation data dropout occurs, the computation icon turns yellow.
1. In Operation Mode, press FUNC.
The function menu appears.
2. Press the Math ACK soft key.
*
The computation icon returns to white.
Math ACK appears in the function menu only when a computation data dropout occurs.
Note
A computation data dropout occurs when the MV cannot process computation within a scan
interval. If computation data dropout occurs frequently, reduce the load on the CPU by reducing
the number of computation channels or by setting a longer scan interval. If a computation data
dropout occurs during memory sampling, the data immediately before the dropout is recorded
as the computed data of the scan interval in which the dropout occurred.
10-18
M-4660
10.5 Generating Reports
1
10.5 Generating Reports
This section explains how to configure report generation.
For an explanation of these functions, see section 1.9.
2
Display
• Report Computation Type
RD-MV1000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Report.
3
4
5
6
RD-MV2000
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Environment tab >
Math, Report.
7
8
9
10
Press MENU and select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab > Report >
Basic settings.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• Report Type and Time of Generation
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
10-19
Chapter 11
External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
1
11.1 Configuring External Input Channels
You can use external input channels on RD-MV2000 medium-speed input models. With
communication functions, you can load data from other devices and display and save the
loaded data on the MV.
2
• Configuring the Input
3
Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Basic setting mode > Menu tab >
Communication (Ethernet) or Communication (Serial) > Modbus client or
Modbus master > Command settings.
4
5
6
7
• Input Range and Alarm
8
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Ext. channel > Range, Alarm.
9
10
11
External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
11-1
11.1 Configuring External Input Channels
• Tag, Memory sample, and Alarm delay
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Ext. channel > Tag, Memory sample, Alarm
delay.
• Channels to Be Manually Sampled
See section 4.5.
Settings
• Configuring the Input
The measured values of external devices are loaded into external input channels by
using the Modbus client or Modbus master function.
For configuration instructions, see the Communication Interface User’s Manual (IM
RD-MV1000-17E).
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. Channel numbers are from 201 to 440.
• Ext. range > On/Off
Select On to use the channels.
• Ext. range > Span Lower, Span Upper
The measurement range.
Selectable range of values: –30000 to 30000
Decimal place: Up to four fractional digits
• Ext. range > Unit
Set the unit (up to six characters,
A a # 1 ).
• Ext. alarm
The available alarm types are high limit alarm, low limit alarm, delay high limit alarm,
and delay low limit alarm.
The range of alarm values is as follows:
Type
H, L
Alarm Values
In the range of –30000 to 30000 ignoring
the decimal point
T, t
Same as H, L
Example of Alarm Values
If the span is 0.0 to 100.0:
–3000.0 to 3000.0
Same as H, L
For alarm configuration instructions, see section 3.7.
*
11-2
If you change the On/Off or span settings of an external input channel, the alarm on that
channel will be set to Off.
M-4660
11.1 Configuring External Input Channels
1
• Alarm delay > Time
For instructions on how to set the alarm delay, see section 3.7.
• Tag
2
For information on how to set the tag name, see section 6.2.
• Memory sample > On/Off
3
Select On for the target channels.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
11-3
11.2 Displaying External Input Channels
You can assign external input channels to groups and display them just like measurement
channels. See chapter 6 for details.
Display
• Channel Display Color
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Ext. channel > Color.
• Showing the Zone Display, Scale Display, and Bar Graph display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Ext. channel > Zone, Scale, Bar graph.
11-4
M-4660
11.2 Displaying External Input Channels
1
• Partially Expanded Display
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Ext. channel > Partial.
*
The Partial command appears in the menu if you set Partial to On in Basic Setting Mode.
For configuration instructions, see section 6.9.
2
3
4
5
• Alarm Mark and Color Scale Band
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Ext. channel > Alarm mark, Color scale
band.
6
7
8
9
10
11
External Input Channels (/MC1 option)
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
11-5
11.2 Displaying External Input Channels
Settings
• Group of channel, First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. Channel numbers are from 201 to 440.
• Color
See section 6.5.
• Zone
See section 6.6.
• Partial
See section 6.9.
• Bar Graph
See section 6.11.
• Scale
See section 6.7.
• Alarm Mark and Color Scale Band
See section 6.8.
11-6
M-4660
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
1
12.1 List of Messages
There are cases in which error codes and messages are displayed on the screen during
operation. A list of the possible error codes and messages are given in the table below.
Communication error codes and messages are also listed.
Error responses to communication commands are output in English.
3
Errors Related to Parameter Settings
• Setting Errors
Message
System error.
Incorrect date or time setting.
A disabled channel is selected.
4
5
6
7
8
Incorrect function parameter.
The input numerical value exceeds the set range.
Incorrect input character string.
Too many characters.
Incorrect input mode.
9
Incorrect input range code.
11
Range settings are not same within the selected channels.
21
Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel.
22
The upper and lower span limits are equal.
23
The upper and lower scale limits are equal.
24
The lower limit of the span band is greater than the upper
limit.
25
The lower limit of the scale band is greater than the upper
limit.
30
The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span.
31
Partial-expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel.
35
The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal.
36
The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper
limit.
37
The display band is narrower than 4% of the entire display.
40
Incorrect group set character string.
41
There is no specified input channel.
42
Exceeded the number of channels which can be set.
43
A channel number cannot repeat in a group.
45
There is no character string saved in the clipboard.
Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
Contact your nearest Omega dealer.
Enter a correct value.
Specify a channel that is not set to Skip or Off.
Specify a channel that is installed.
See the Communication Interface User’s Manual.
Enter a proper value.
Enter a proper character string.
Enter the correct number of characters.
Specify a correct mode.
See section 3.3.
Specify a correct range code.
See section 3.3.
Specify channels with the same range setting.
See section 3.9.
Cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
See section 3.7.
Cannot be set to the same value.
See section 3.3.
Cannot be set to the same value.
See section 3.3.
Set the lower limit less than the upper limit.
See section 3.3.
Set the lower limit less than the upper limit.
See section 3.3.
Set the boundary value in the range of “the minimum
span value + 1 digit” to “the maximum span value – 1
digit.”
See section 6.9
Cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
See sections 3.3 and 6.9
Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5.
See section 6.6
Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5.
See section 6.6
Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5.
See section 6.6
Check the syntax.
See section 6.1
Specify a channel that is installed.
See sections 2.3 and 6.1
Up to 10 channels/group (RD-MV2000).
Up to 6 channels/group (RD-MV1000).
See section 6.1
Check that a channel is not registered twice.
See section 6.1
Copy a character string to the clipboard.
See section 6.1
4
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Code
1
2
3
2
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-1
12.1 List of Messages
Code
46
Message
The character string saved in the clipboard is too long.
61
There is no channel specified by the MATH expression.
62
MATH expression grammar is incorrect.
63
MATH expression sequence is incorrect.
64
MATH upper and lower span values are equal.
65
Too many operators for MATH expression.
70
Nonexistent constant specified in MATH expression.
71
Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded.
80
This username is already registered.
81
All space or ‘quit’ string cannot be specified.
84
The login password has not been set up.
85
The login password is incorrect.
86
The key-lock release password is incorrect.
87
This key is locked.
88
This function is locked.
89
Press [FUNC] key to login.
90
91
No permission to enter to the SETUP mode.
Password is incorrect.
92
93
Press [ESC] key to change to the operation mode.
String including space or all space cannot be specified.
94
More than one address cannot be specified.
95
Number entered exceeds channel number range.
Use another command.
100
IP address doesn’t belong to class A, B, or C.
101
The result of the masked IP address is all 0s or 1s.
12-2
Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
Paste a character string with the specified number of
characters.
Check the character length limitation at the
destination.
“Settings and Values” in the First Step Guide
Check the channel number specified by the
expression.
See sections 1.9 and 10.1
Check that the expression grammar is correct.
See section 10.2
Check that the operator used in the expression
in relation to the applicable operands meets the
grammar requirements.
See section 10.2
Set different values for the upper and lower limits of
the computation span.
See section 10.1
The maximum number of operators in an expression
has been exceeded. Reduce the number of
operators, such as by splitting up the expression into
multiple computation channels.
See section 10.2
Check the constant number specified by the
expression.
See section 10.1
Check the selectable range.
See section 10.1
Register another user name.
See section 8.2
Change the character string.
See section 8.2
Set a password.
See section 8.2
Check the password. If you lost the password, ask
your administrator to reset it.
See sections 8.2 and 8.3
Check the password. If you lost the password, it must
be reset.
See section 8.1
Release the key lock.
See section 8.1
Release the key lock.
See section 8.1
Log in.
See section 8.3
The MV never generates this message.
Enter the correct password. If you lost the password,
it must be reset.
Sections 8.2 and 8.3
Press ESC.
Spaces are not allowed in the Web browser user
name and password.
Section 2.4 in the communication manual
Only a single sender is allowed.
Section 2.3 in the communication manual
Check the syntax of the Modbus command.
Sections 2.9 and 3.5 in the communication manual
Check the IP address.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
Check the subnet mask.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
Code
102
Message
SUBNET mask is incorrect.
103
The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP
address.
105
This port number is already in use. Please enter a different
number.
113
Password entered is incorrect.
119
This user name is unable to use this mode.
120
Measured value is incorrect. (in ascending order)
122
Measured value exceeds the range setting.
125
Character entry cannot be performed.
126
You cannot use the same password.
127
Report kind overlaps and cannot be set up.
129
IP address is not set.
131
You have exceeded the available channel capacity.
132
You have exceeded the available number of commands.
External I/O auto setting information is not available.
134
Auto setting has already been executed.
135
External I/O cannot be found.
136
External I/O start cannot be executed.
137
DNS for this device is not set.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
133
Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
Check the subnet mask.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
Check the IP address.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
Enter a different port number for each function.
Section 7.1 in the communication manual
Enter the correct password.
See section 8.3
A user-level user cannot enter the Basic Setting
mode.
See section 8.2
Set the calibration correction value to a value greater
than the previous value.
See section 3.9
Check the channel input or the channel range setting.
See sections 3.3 and 3.9
The MV is not showing a display used to enter
character strings.
See section 9.7
Specify a different password.
See section 8.3
Change the overlapped report data type.
See section 10.5
Set the MV IP address.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
You cannot connect more than 240 channels.
Section 2.9 in the communication manual
The maximum number of commands that can be
sent is 16. The modules that can be set with a
single command are consecutive modules that can
be automatically set. Change the MW100 module
configuration so that there are no empty slots.
Section 2.9 in the communication manual
Below are the possible causes. Check them.
• The MW100 is in calibration mode. Change to the
setting mode or measurement mode.
• The measurement module may not have been
detected. Perform system reconfiguration.
• There are no modules that can be automatically set.
Check the modules.
• An IP address has not been assigned to the
MW100. Set the IP address.
• The Modbus server of the MW100 is turned OFF.
Turn the server ON.
Section 2.9 in the communication manual
You cannot set an MW100 that has been
automatically set.
Section 2.9 in the communication manual
Check the Ethernet connection.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
The current MW100 settings do not allow the
measurement to be started. Check the settings.
Set the MV DNS parameter.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-3
12.1 List of Messages
• Execution Errors
Code
150
Message
This action is not possible because sampling is in
progress.
151
This action is not possible during sampling or calculating.
152
153
This action is not possible because saving is in progress.
This action is not possible because formatting is in
progress.
Message not accepted because message limit was
reached.
154
155
The message is not written while sampling is stopped.
156
There are no channels to be saved to the memory.
157
This function is not possible at this time.
158
Exceeds time deviation setting.
159
It is outside the postscript message write-in range.
12-4
Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
Stop memory sampling and then execute.
See section 4.4
Stop memory sampling or computation first.
See sections 4.4 and 10.4
Wait until the saving is complete.
Wait until the formatting is complete.
The limit is 50 messages.
See section 6.4
Start memory sampling and then execute.
See section 4.4
Set the channels to be saved.
See sections 4.1 and 10.1
If the data type to be recorded is set to E+D, you cannot
change the trend interval by using the T/DIV key.
See section 5.2
When synchronizing the clock through remote control.
See section 1.7
Add message can be written to the past section of the
data being memory sampled.
See section 6.4
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
1
Operation Errors
• Errors Related to the External Storage Medium
Code
200
Message
Operation aborted because an error was found in media.
201
Not enough free space on media.
202
210
211
Media is read-only.
Media has not been inserted.
Media is damaged or not formatted.
212
Format error.
213
214
The file is read-only.
There is no file or directory.
215
Exceeded the allowable number of directories or files.
216
The file or directory name is incorrect.
217
Unknown file type.
218
This directory or file now exists. Delete it or change the
name.
Invalid file or directory operation.
219
222
230
The file is already in use. Try again later.
This action is not possible because FTP transmission is in
progress.
Media is not recognized.
There is no setting file.
231
Abnormal setting exists in file.
Tried to delete multiple directory levels. Or, tried to
delete a directory containing files.
Delete the files and directories in the directory first
before executing the operation.
See section 4.7
Wait until the file is accessible.
Execute after FTP data transfer is complete.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
220
221
Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
Use another storage medium or format it.
See section 4.7
There is not enough free space on media or the
number of directories exceeded the limit.
Replace with another medium.
See section 1.5
Make it writable.
Insert a storage medium into the drive.
Remove the medium and set it again. If an error still
occurs, replace or format the medium.
See section 4.7
Try formatting again.
See section 4.7
Access another file or make the file writable.
Specified a file in which data is being added. Tried to
save a file which does not exists in the internal memory.
Replace with another storage medium. Delete
unneeded files and directories.
See section 4.7
Use alphanumeric characters.
See section 4.2
Check the extension.
See section 13.3
See section 4.2
9
Remove the medium and set it again.
Switch to a medium that contains a setup file (.pdl
extension).
Specify another file.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-5
12.1 List of Messages
• Errors Related to the Historical Trend
232
There is no available data.
233
The specified historical data do not exist.
234
The specified channel is not assigned to the display group.
Appears when displaying historical trends.
Specify another file.
Appears when switching to historical trend from
information display.
Sections 5.7, 5.8, and 5.9
Appears when switching to trend, digital, or bar graph
from overview.
See sections 5.4 and 6.1
• Errors Related to E-mail and Web Server
260
IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available.
261
SMTP server is not found.
262
Cannot initiate E-mail transmission.
263
Sender’s address rejected by the server.
264
Some recipients’ addresses are invalid.
265
SMTP protocol error.
266
Ethernet cable is not connected.
267
Could not connect to SMTP server.
268
269
E-mail transmission request failed.
E-mail transfer error.
270
Could not connect to the POP3 server.
271
POP3 server authentication failed.
275
The current image cannot be output to the Web.
276
Image data currently being created. Unable to perform key
operation.
Could not output screen to Web.
277
12-6
The IP address is not specified. Check the IP address.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name.
• Check the DNS setting.
• Check the SMTP server name.
Sections 2.2 and 2.3 in the communication manual
•The host name of the MV is not correct. Check the
host name.
•The port number of the SMTP server is not correct.
Check the port name.
Sections 2.2 and 2.3 in the communication manual
Check the sender address.
Section 2.3 in the communication manual
Check the recipient addresses.
Section 2.3 in the communication manual
May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate
addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in
the middle of the e-mail transmission.
Check the cable connection.
Section 2.2 in the communication manual
•Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the
network.
•If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP
address, check to see that the IP address is correct.
Section 2.3 in the communication manual
Contact your nearest Omega dealer.
May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate
addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in
the middle of the e-mail transmission.
Check whether or not the destination POP3 server is
running. Check that the cables are connected properly
and that the HUB is turned on. Section 2.3 in the
communication manual
Check whether the user name and server name are
permitted by the server.
Section 2.3 in the communication manual
The setup display cannot be output to the Web browser.
This message is displayed on the Web browser.
Try again a little later. This message is displayed on the
Web browser.
Failed to create the image. This message is displayed on
the Web browser.
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
• Errors Related to FTP Client
For a description of the FTP client function of the MV, see the Communication Interface
User’s Manual (IM RD-MV1000-17E). The detail code does not appear in the error
message on the screen. You can view the code on the FTP log display of the MV or using
the FTP log output via communications.
Code
280
281
282
12-7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
M-4660
Message
IP address is not set or FTP function is not available.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280.
Character String and Details
HOSTADDR
An IP address has not been assigned to the MV.
Check the IP address.
DORMANT
Internal processing error.1
LINK
Data link is disconnected.
Check the cable connection.
FTP mail box operation error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281.
Character String and Details
MAIL
Internal processing error.1
STATUS
Internal processing error.1
TIMEOUT
Internal processing error.1
PRIORITY
Internal processing error.1
NVRAM
Internal processing error.1
FTP control connection error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282.
Character String and Details
HOSTNAME
Failed the DNS lookup (search the IP address corresponding to the host name).
Check the DNS setting and the destination host name.
TCPIP
Internal processing error.1
UNREACH
Failed to connect to a control connection server.
Check the address setting and that the server is running.
OOBINLINE
Internal processing error.1
NAME
Internal processing error.1
CTRL
The control connection does not exist.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper
time period.
IAC
Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper
time period.
ECHO
Failed to transmit data on the control connection.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper
time period.
REPLY
Failed to receive data on the control connection.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper
time period.
1
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
12.1 List of Messages
Character String and Details
SERVER
The server is not in a condition to provide the service.
Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided.
Code
283
284
12-8
Message
FTP command was not accepted.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283.
Character String and Details
USER
Failed to verify the user name.
Check the user name setting.
PASS
Failed to verify the password.
Check the password setting.
ACCT
Failed to verify the account.
Check the account setting.
TYPE
Failed to change the transfer type.
Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode.
CWD
Failed to change the directory.
Check the initial path setting.
PORT
Failed to set the transfer connection.
Check that the security function is disabled.
PASV
Failed to set the transfer connection.
Check that the server supports PASV commands.
SCAN
Failed to read the transfer connection settings.
Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server.
FTP transfer setting error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284.
Character String and Details
MODE
Internal processing error.1
LOCAL
Internal processing error.1
REMOTE
The destination file name is not correct.
Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files.
ABORT
File transfer abort was requested by the server.
Check the server for the reason for the abort request.
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
Code
285
286
290
291
293
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
292
Message
FTP data connection error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285.
Character String and Details
SOCKET
Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection.2
BIND
Failed the transfer connection command.2
CONNECT
Failed the transfer connection.2
LISTEN
Failed the transfer connection reception.2
ACCEPT
Failed to accept the transfer connection.2
SOCKNAME
Internal processing error.1
RECV
Failed to receive data over the transfer connection.2
SEND
Failed to send data over the transfer connection.2
FTP file transfer error.
SNTP access failure.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 290.
Character String and Details
DORMANT
Internal processing error.1
LINK
Data link is disconnected.
Check the cable connection.
SNTP server does not respond.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 291.
Character String and Details
TIMEOUT
Check that the server is running.2
Incorrect SNTP server setting.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 292.
Character String and Details
HOSTNAME
Failed the DNS lookup (search the IP address corresponding to the host name).
Check the DNS setting and the SNTP server name.
TCPIP
Internal processing error.1
Invalid SNTP server reply.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 293.
Character String and Details
SEND
A correct IP address has not been assigned to the MV.
Check the IP address.
BROKEN
There is a problem with the SNTP server.
If this error occurs even after executing SNTP manually several times, check the SNTP
server.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-9
12.1 List of Messages
Code
294
295
296
297
12-10
Message
No time correction because excess time deviation with SNTP server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 294.
Character String and Details
OVER
This error occurs when periodic SNTP is executed by the auto setting of the clock and
the clock is not adjusted because the time difference between the MV and the SNTP
server is greater than or equal to 10 minutes.
Check the time on the MV and the SNTP server.
IP address was released because DHCP setting is invalid.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 295.
Character String and Details
REJECT
Address obtained by DHCP is inappropriate.
DHCP access failure.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 296.
Character String and Details
ESEND
Failed to transmit to the DHCP.
ESERVER
DHCP server not found.
ESERVFAIL
No response from the DHCP server.
ERENEWED
Address renewal rejected.
EEXTENDED
Address lease extension rejected.
EEXPIRED
Address lease period expired.
Registration of the hostname to the DNS server failed.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 297.
Character String and Details
INTERNAL
Failed to register the host name (transmission error, reception timeout, etc.).
FORMERR
Failed to register the host name (format error: DNS message syntax error).
SERVFAIL
Failed to register the host name (server failure: DNS server processing error).
NXDOMAIN
Failed to register the host name (non existent domain).
NOTIMP
Failed to register the host name (not implemented).
REFUSED
Failed to register the host name (operation refused).
YXDOMAIN
Failed to register the host name (name exists).
YXRRSET
Failed to register the host name (RR set exists).
NXRRSET
Failed to register the host name (RR set does not exist).
NOTAUTH
Failed to register the host name (not authoritative for zone).
NOTZONE
Failed to register the host name (different from zone section).
NONAME
Host name not entered on the MV.
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
Code
298
1
Message
Deletion of the hostname to the DNS server failed.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 298.
Character String and Details
INTERNAL
Failed to delete the host name (transmission error, reception timeout, etc.).
FORMERR
Failed to delete the host name (format error: DNS message syntax error).
SERVFAIL
Failed to delete the host name (server failure: DNS server processing error).
NXDOMAIN
Failed to delete the host name (non existent domain).
NOTIMP
Failed to delete the host name (not implemented).
REFUSED
Failed to delete the host name (operation refused).
YXDOMAIN
Failed to delete the host name (name exists).
YXRRSET
Failed to delete the host name (RR set exists).
NXRRSET
Failed to delete the host name (RR set does not exist).
NOTAUTH
Failed to delete the host name (not authoritative for zone).
NOTZONE
Failed to delete the host name (different from zone section).
NOTLINKED
4 Physical layer was disconnected when removing the host name.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
Contact your nearest Omega dealer.
These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission
(bad cable connection, duplicate addresses, network equipment failure).
•
•
The FTP client function on the MV has a timer function that drops the connection if there is
no data transfer for two minutes. If the server does not respond within this time period, the
transfer fails.
The FTP client function on the MV overwrites files without a warning if files with the same
name exist at the transfer destination unless the server returns a negative response.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Note
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-11
12.1 List of Messages
Communication Errors
For information regarding the communication function of the MV, see the Communication
Interface User’s Manual (IM RD-MV1000-17E).
• E
rrors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes, Output Communication
Command Execution, and Setup Data Loading
Code
300
301
302
303
350
351
352
353
354
Message
Command is too long.
Too many number of commands delimited with ‘;’.
This command has not been defined.
Data request command can not be enumerated with sub-delimiter.
Command is not permitted to the current user level.
This command cannot be specified in the current mode.
The option is not installed.
This command cannot be specified in the current setting.
This command is not available during sampling or calculating.
• M
emory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output
Communication Command Execution
An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
on the screen.
Code
362
363
12-12
Message
There are no data to send ‘NEXT’ or ‘RESEND’.
All data have already been transferred.
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
• Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors
An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
on the screen.
Code
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
Message
Command error.
Delimiter error.
Parameter error.
No permission.
No such connection.
Use ‘quit’ to close this connection.
Failed to disconnect.
No TCP control block.
Format error.
1
2
3
4
• Other Communication Errors
An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
on the screen.
Code
400
401
402
403
404
410
411
420
421
422
Message
Input username.
Input password.
Select username from ‘admin’ or ‘user’.
Login incorrect, try again!
No more login at the specified level is acceptable.
Login successful. (The special user level)
Login successful. (The general user level)
Connection has been lost.
The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded.
Communication has timed-out.
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-13
12.1 List of Messages
Status Messages
Code
500
501
503
504
505
506
508
509
510
511
513
514
515
516
520
521
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
542
543
550
551
552
560
561
12-14
Message
Execution is complete.
Please wait a moment...
Data are being saved to media...
File is being loaded from media...
Formatting...
Memory save to media was interrupted.
There is no file or directory.
Press [DISP/ENTER] key to display file name.
Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating.
MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating.
Post process in progress.
Now loading historical data.
Data save is completed.
Files are now being sorted.
Connecting to the line...
The data file is being transferred.
Media can be removed safely.
Media was removed compulsorily.
USB device has been connected.
USB device cannot be recognized.
There was no data which is not saved to media.
Media was recognized.
Media is not recognized.
Media read error.
Flash write error.
The A/D calibration is being executed...
FTP test is being executed...
E-mail test is being executed...
Now connecting to SNTP server...
Now adjusting the time.
M-4660
12.1 List of Messages
Code
562
563
564
565
566
567
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
568
Message
Ethernet cable is disconnected.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 562.
Character String and Details
ON
Detected that an Ethernet cable was connected.
OFF
Detected that an Ethernet cable was disconnected.
The command is sent to DHCP.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 563.
Character String and Details
RENEW
Requesting address renewal to the DHCP server.
The response was received from DHCP.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 564.
Character String and Details
RENEWED
Address renewal complete.
EXTENDED
Address release extension request complete.
RELEASED
Address release complete.
IP address was set.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 565.
Character String and Details
IPCONFIG
Assigned the IP address.
It is a setting that doesn’t register hostname to the DNS server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 566.
Character String and Details
NOREQUEST
Configured not to register the host name.
The hostname was registered to DNS server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 567.
Character String and Details
UPDATE
Registered the host name to the DNS server.
The hostname was deleted from DNS server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 568.
Character String and Details
REMOVE
Assigned the IP address.
OFF
Removed the host name from the DNS server.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-15
12.1 List of Messages
Warning Messages
Code
600
601
610
614
615
Message
Measured data and Settings have been initialized.
Measured data have been initialized.
This username is already registered.
Calibration settings are reset because of range setting change.
Noise may influence measurement in test mode.
Ref. Section
–
–
See section 8.2.
See section 3.9
See section 3.1
System Errors
Servicing is required when a system error occurs. If this happens, contact your nearest
Omega dealer for repairs.
Code
901
902
910
911
912
913
914
921
922
923
924
930
940
12-16
Message
ROM failure.
RAM failure.
A/D memory failure for all input channels.
Channel 1 A/D memory failure.
Channel 2 A/D memory failure.
Channel 3 A/D memory failure.
Channel 4 A/D memory failure.
Channel 1 A/D calibration value error.
Channel 2 A/D calibration value error.
Channel 3 A/D calibration value error.
Channel 4 A/D calibration value error.
Memory acquisition failure.
The Ethernet module is down.
M-4660
1
12.2 Troubleshooting
Does not function at all (nothing is displayed).
Is the power switch
turned ON? Does the
switch work properly?
NO
2
Make sure that the power
is turned ON properly.
F.S.G.
3
YES
4
Is the power supply
connected properly?
NO
Connect the power supply properly.
Section 2.2
5
YES
Is the power
supplied properly?
NO
Use a power supply of the specified
voltage and frequency.
Section 2.2
YES
6
7
Contact your nearest Omega
dealer to have your MV serviced.
F.S.G.: First Step Guide
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-17
12.2 Troubleshooting
• Large measurement errors.
• Trend or digital wave value fluctuation.
• Trend going off the scale beyond either 0% or 100%.
Does the input meet
the specifications?
NO
Change the input to meet the specifications.
Section 13.1
YES
Are the range/span
settings appropriate?
NO
• Adjust the span and range settings
(section 3.3).
• If you use input calibration (/CC1 option),
check the set values for correction points
(section 3.9).
YES
Are you taking measures
against noise?
NO
YES
Are you keeping the
environmental temperature
constant (TC input)?
NO
YES
Is the input wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the input wiring parallel
with other equipment?
NO
YES
Is the RJC setting correct
(TC input)?
NO
• Separate the input wiring from the
noise source.
• Ground the recorder.
• Ground the measured object.
• Insulate the TC from the measured object.
• Use shielded cables for input.
• Change the integration time of the input
A/D converter (section 3.1).
• Use the moving average of the input
(section 3.4).
• Attach the input terminal cover correctly.
• Protect the input terminal from fans
and other sources of wind.
• Keep the temperature fluctuation near
the input terminal to a minimum.
• Wire correctly (Section 2.3)
• Install the terminal block correctly.
• Fasten the terminal screws correctly.
• Insulate the RTD from the ground.
• If burnt, replace the TC.
• Stop the TC burnout upscale/downscale
function of other equipment.
• Ground the MV and other equipment
at one point.
• Disconnect parallel wiring
(use a double-element TC, for instance).
Configure correctly.
Section 3.2
YES
Contact your nearest Omega
dealer to have your MV serviced.
12-18
M-4660
12.2 Troubleshooting
1
Display and other functions do not work properly.
Are you taking measures
against noise?
NO
YES
• Move the input and communication wires
away from the noise source.
• Ground the recorder.
• Use shielded cables for input.
• Insert an isolation transformer into the
power line.
• Insert a power line filter into the power line.
• If an inductive load is used in the alarm
output line, insert a surge suppressor in
the line.
Contact your nearest Omega
dealer to have your MV serviced.
YES
3
4
5
Items on the display selection menu or function menu are not displayed.
Are all of the typical
conditions for displaying
the item satisfied?
2
NO
6
• Make sure that the menu item is set to
be displayed using the customize-menu
function.
If the item is not set to be displayed, then
set it to be displayed (see section 6.17).
• Confirm that the MV is equipped with the
options required for that menu item.
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
9
Contact your nearest Omega
dealer to have your MV serviced.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-19
12.3 Periodic Inspection
Check the operation periodically to keep the MV in good working order.
Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed.
• Is the display and storage functioning properly?
If not, see section 12.2, “Troubleshooting.”
• Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated?
If replacement is necessary, see section 12.5, “Recommended Replacement Periods
for Worn Parts.”
12-20
M-4660
1
12.4 Calibrating the MV
It is recommended that the MV be calibrated once a year to assure its measurement
accuracy.
Calibration service is also provided by Omega dealers.
For details, contact your nearest Omega dealer.
2
3
Required Instruments
Calibration instruments with the following resolution are required for calibrating the MV.
Recommended Instruments
• DC voltage standard:
• Decade resistance box:
5520A by FLUKE or equivalent
Main specifications
Output accuracy: ±(0.005% + 1 µV)
Omega Meters & Instruments Model 2793-01 or
equivalent
Main specifications
Accuracy of output range 0.1 to 500 Ω: ±(0.01%
+2 mΩ)
Resolution: 0.001 Ω
• 0°C standard temperature device: ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics or equivalent
Main specifications
Standard temperature stability accuracy: ±0.05°C
For information on purchasing the calibration instruments, contact your nearest Omega
dealer.
Calibration Procedure
1. Wire the MV and the calibration instrument as shown in the following figure, and
2. Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity
is within the standard operating conditions (see section 13.6).
3. Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0, 50, and 100% of the input
range and calculate the errors from the readings.
If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications, contact
your nearest Omega dealer.
Note
For thermocouple inputs, you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a
voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature.
DC Voltage Measurement (Example for the RD-MV1012)
5
6
7
8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the MV is at least 30
minutes).
4
9
10
11
12
Screw terminal
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
/b
+/A
–/B
13
–
Clamp terminal
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
Input terminal
M-4660
+
App
/b
+/A
–/B
+
–
Index
DC voltage standard
12-21
12.4 Calibrating the MV
Temperature Measurement When Using an RTD (Example for the RDMV1012)
Screw terminal
The resistances of the three lead wires should be equal.
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
/b
+/A
–/B
b
A
B
Clamp terminal
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
–
Decade resistance box
/b
+/A
–/B
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
Input terminal
Temperature Measurement When Using a Thermocouple (Example for the
RD-MV1012)
Copper wires
Thermocouple wires or
TC extension wires
–
+
Screw terminal
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
/b
+/A
–/B
+
–
DC voltage standard
Copper
wires
Clamp terminal
Thermocouple
CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
wires
(0°C standard temperature device
ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics)
/b
+/A
–/B
CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
Input terminal
RJC of TC Input
As the measurement terminal of the MV is generally at room temperature, the actual
output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive
force table based on 0°C. The MV performs compensation by measuring the temperature
at the input terminal and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the
actual output of the thermocouple. Therefore, when the measurement terminal is shorted
(equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0°C), the measured value indicates the
temperature of the input terminal.
When calibrating the MV, this compensation voltage (thermoelectromotive force of 0°C
reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from the
output of the standard generator before application. As shown in the figure, by using the
0°C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0°C, you can
input the thermoelectromotive force of 0°C reference from the DC voltage standard and
perform the calibration.
12-22
M-4660
12.5 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn
Parts
To maintain the reliability of the MV and to use the MV in a good condition for an
extended time, we recommend that parts be replaced periodically. The replacement parts
may change to accommodate preventive maintenance over extended time. Be sure to
check with your nearest Omega dealer.
The following table shows the recommended replacement period for expendable parts.
The replacement period shown here applies when the MV is used under standard
operating conditions. For the actual replacement period, consider the actual conditions of
use. Replacement of parts will be carried out by a Omega engineer or a Omega-certified
engineer. Contact your nearest Omega dealer when such replacement is necessary.
1
2
3
4
RD-MV1000
Item
LCD
Battery
Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
*
Replacement
Period
5 years
10 years
5 years
5 years
Name
Quantity Used
Bezel Assembly
Battery Assembly
Power Supply
Assembly*
AD Assembly*
1
1
1
Notes
5
6
Depends on the model
Replacement period when used at the upper limit of the normal operating temperature (40°C).
The replacement period varies depending on the operating temperature and the MV specifications. If the
operating temperature is 30°C, it may be possible to use the part for more than 10 years.
7
RD-MV2000
Item
*
5 years
Name
Bezel Assembly
Battery Assembly
Power Supply
Assembly*
AD Assembly*
Quantity Used
Notes
1
1
1
8
Depends on the model
Replacement period when used at the upper limit of the normal operating temperature (40°C).
The replacement period varies depending on the operating temperature and the MV specifications. If the
operating temperature is 30°C, it may be possible to use the part for more than 10 years.
Note
•The LCD replacement period indicates the half life of the brightness when the brightness
is set to the factory default setting. The half life is shortened as the brightness is set
higher. The deterioration of brightness varies depending on the condition of use, and its
determination is subjective. Consider these points when determining the actual replacement
period.
•The LCD color may turn yellowish over time. The discoloration tends to progress faster as
the brightness is set higher.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
LCD
Battery
Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
Replacement
Period
5 years
10 years
5 years
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
M-4660
12-23
Chapter 13
Specifications
13.1 Signal Input and Alarm
1
Signal Input
2
Item
Specifications
Number of inputs, scan interval, and A/D integration time
Model
Number of Inputs:
4
MV1004
8
MV1008
6
MV1006
12
MV1012
24
MV1024
8
MV2008
10
MV2010
20
MV2020
30
MV2030
40
MV2040
48
MV2048
A/D Converter Integration Time
Scan Interval
Normal mode
125 ms, 250 ms
1 s, 2 s, 5 s
Fast sampling mode*
25 ms
2 s, 5 s
125 ms, 250 ms
125 ms
3
4
25 ms
1 s, 2 s, 5 s
2 s, 5 s
125 ms
60 Hz/50 Hz
100 ms
600 Hz (fixed)
5
* Not available on models equipped with external input channels (/MC1 option).
Input types
DC voltage, 1-5V, thermocouple (TC), resistance temperature detector (RTD), ON/OFF input
(DI), and DC current (by adding an external shunt resistor)
Input format
Floating unbalanced input
Measurement range and measurable range
Input Type
DC voltage
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
Range
Measurable Range
20 mV
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
60 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
200 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
2V
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
6V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
20 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
50 V
–50.00 to 50.00 V
1-5V
1-5 V6
0.800 to 5.200 V
32 to 3200°F
Thermocouple R1
0.0 to 1760.0°C
32 to 3200°F
S1
0.0 to 1760.0°C
32 to 3308°F
B1
0.0 to 1820.0°C
–328 to 2498°F
K1
–200.0 to 1370.0°C
–328.0 to 1472.0°F
E1
–200.0 to 800.0°C
–328.0 to 2012.0°F
J1
–200.0 to 1100.0°C
–328.0 to 752.0°F
T1
–200.0 to 400.0°C
32 to 2372°F
N1
0.0 to 1300.0°C
32 to 4199°F
W2
0.0 to 2315.0°C
–328.0 to 1652.0°F
L3
–200.0 to 900.0°C
–328.0 to 752.0°F
U3
–200.0 to 400.0°C
32 to 4352°F
WRe4
0.0 to 2400.0°C
–328.0 to 1112.0°F
RTD
Pt (Pt100)5
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–328.0 to 1022.0°F
JPt (JPt100)5
–200.0 to 550.0°C
DI
Voltage
0: Less than 2.4 V. 1: 2.4 V or higher (judged at the 6 V range)
Contact
0: Open. 1: Closed (parallel capacitance of 0.01 µF or less)
1: R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC584-1 (1995), DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995
2: W: W-5%Re/W-26%Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.), ASTM E988
3: L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710
4: WRe: W-3%Re/W-25%Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.)
5: Pt100: JIS C1604-1997, IEC751-1995, DIN IEC751-1996
JPt100: JIS C1604-1989, JIS C1606-1989
Measuring current: i = 1mA (Pt100, JPt100)
6: The range for linear scaling of 1-5V inputs. Burnout detection and low-cut functions are
available.
6
App
Index
M-4660
13-1
13.1 Signal Input and Alarm
Item
Thermocouple burnout*
Specifications
Burnout upscale/downscale selectable (for each channel)
Normal: 2 kΩ or less, burnout: 100 kΩ or more (parallel capacitance of 0.01 µF or less)
Detection current: Approx. 10 µA
1-5 range burnout*
Burnout upscale/downscale selectable (for each channel)
Burnout detection: Greater than the scale upper limit + 10% of scale width or less than the
scale lower limit – 5% of scale width
TC reference junction compensation
Internal reference junction compensation or external reference junction compensation
Filter function
Takes the moving average of the input values (for each channel). Moving average data points:
2 to 400
Computation
Difference computation
Computable range: DC voltage, TC, RTD, and DI
Linear scaling
Computable range: DC voltage, TC, RTD, and DI
Scalable range: –30000 to 30000. The decimal place is anywhere that values will have less
than four fractional digits.
Unit:Up to six characters
Range-out detection: You can configure the MV to indicate a range-out when a value falls
outside ±5% of the scale range.
Square root computation Takes the square root of the input and apply linear scaling
Computable range: DC voltage
Scalable range and unit: Sam as linear scaling
Low-cut: Set the low-cut point to a value in the 0.0% to 5.0% of the span
Range-out detection: Same as linear scaling
1-5V
Computable range: 1-5
Scalable range and unit: Sam as linear scaling
Low-cut: The low-cut point is fixed to the span lower limit.
Range-out detection: Same as linear scaling
*
In fast sampling mode, the MV cannot detect burnouts on all measurement channels within a scan interval. The MV may
not detect a burnout for the following number of measurements, if measurement is started in a burnout condition, or after
a burnout condition occurs.
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, RD-MV2008: a maximum of four measurements
RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024, RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, RD-MV2048: a maximum
of two measurements
Alarms
Item
Number of alarms
Alarm types
Specifications
Up to four alarms (levels) for each measurement channel
High limit, low limit, difference high limit, difference low limit, high limit on rate-of-change alarm,
low limit on rate-of-change alarm, delay high limit, delay low limit
Alarm delay
1 to 3600 s (for each channel)
Rate-of-change calculation interval of rate-of-change alarms
1 to 32 times the scan interval (common to all channels)
Alarm output
Output to the internal switch
Number of internal switches: 30
Internal switch operation: AND/OR operation selectable
Hysteresis
High and low limit alarms: 0.0 to 5.0% of the span (common to all channels)
Difference high and low limit alarms: 0.0 to 5.0% of the span (common to all channels)
Display
Displays the status on the respective operation screen and an alarm icon on the status display
section when an alarm occurs.
Display operation: Hold or not hold the display until the alarm output release operation.
Alarm hide function (no alarm logging function)
Not display alarms nor record to the alarm summary (for each channel)
Alarm information
Displays a log of alarm occurrences on the alarm summary.
13-2
M-4660
13.2 Display Functions
1
Display
2
Item
Display*
Brightness
Backlight saver function
Specifications
RD-MV1000: 5.5-inch TFT color LCD (320 × 240 dots)
RD-MV2000: 10.4-inch TFT color LCD (640 × 480 dots)
RD-MV1000: Eight levels. RD-MV2000: Six levels.
Dim or turn off the LCD backlight if there is no key operation for a specified time.
Dim or turn off the LCD backlight at any time by using the FUNC key
3
*The LCD monitor may contain few pixels that are always on or off. The brightness of the LCD may not be uniform due to the
LCD characteristics. This is not a malfunction.
4
Screen
Item
Display groups
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
Specifications
Allows you to assign channels to groups on the trend display, digital display, and bar graph display
for displaying
Number of groups
RD-MV1000: 10. RD-MV2000: 36.
Number of channels per group
RD-MV1000: 6 max. RD-MV2000: 10 max.
Display colors
Channel: Select from 24 colors
Background: Select white or black
Trend display
Waveform line width
Select 1, 2, or 3 dots
Display method
Displays with orthogonal time (T) and measured value (Y) axes
Layout:
Vertical, horizontal, wide, or split
Trend interval:
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, RD-MV2008: Select from 5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 30 s, 1
min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 10 h/div
RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024, RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020,
RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, RD-MV2048: Select from 15 s (only for fast
sampling mode), 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min,
1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 10 h/div
Switchable to the secondary trend interval
Scale
Displays a scale for each channel
Current value bar graph, color scale band, and alarm value marks can be displayed on the scale.
Miscellaneous
Grid (divisions: 4 to 12), trip line (line width: 1, 2, or 3 dots), message, zone display, partially
expanded display, auto zone display
Digital display
Displays measured values numerically
Update rate
1 s (or the scan interval if the scan interval is greater than 1 s)
Bar graph display
Displays measured values on a bar graph
Direction
Vertical or horizontal
Base position
End or center
Update rate
1 s (or the scan interval if the scan interval is greater than 1 s)
Scale
Displays a scale for each channel
Color scale band and alarm value marks can be displayed on the scale.
Historical trend display
Shows the display data or event data in the internal memory or external storage medium.
Display format
All screen or half screen (only when the display data is being redisplayed)
Foreground display (TOP CHANNEL): Displays a specified channel’s waveform in foreground
Auto span display: Displays a waveform by automatically adjusting the display span of a specified
channel
Auto zone display: Displays waveforms in separated display zones for each channel
Time axis operations Reduction/expansion, continuous data display, absolute/relative time display
Added message
Adds messages
Background colors
White, cream, black, and light gray
Overview display
Displays measured values of all channels and alarm statuses (measured values not displayed if
there are 261 or more channels on the RD-MV2000)
App
Index
M-4660
13-3
13.2 Display Functions
Item
Information display
Alarm summary display
Specifications
Displays a log of up to 1000 alarms
You can specify an alarm by using the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the
trend display.
Message summary display Time and content of up to 450 messages (including 50 added messages)
You can specify a message by using the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on
the trend display.
Memory summary display Displays information about the internal memory data
You can specify a file by using the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the trend
display.
You can save data in the internal memory to an external storage medium by using keys.
Report (/M1, /PM1)
Displays report data in the internal memory
Stacked bar graph (/M1, /PM1)
Displays stacked bar graphs of report data for each report group
Display type: Hourly+daily (uses hourly report data for displaying), hourly+weekly (uses daily
report data for displaying), daily+monthly (uses daily report data for displaying)
Report groups: Every 6 channels (RD-MV1000) or every 10 channels (RD-MV2000) are
assigned in order to groups 1, 2, 3, and so on, starting with the first report channel (R001).
Channel assignment is fixed.
Scale/grid: Fixed to four sections
Update rate: 1 s
Stacks report data of channels in the specified group and displays the result on a bar graph.
Displays only channels with the same unit as the first channel in the group.
Status display
Relay status display: Displays the ON/OFF status of alarm output relays and internal
switches
Modbus client status: Displays the communication status of the Modbus client
Modbus master status: Displays the communication status of the Modbus master
Log display
Displays the login log, error log, communication log, FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log,
DHCP log, and Modbus status log
4-panel display (only with the RD-MV2000)
Divides the display into quadrants and shows four different display formats
Four display combinations can be registered.
Display pause
You can pause the display using keys.
Other Displayed Information
Item
Tag display
Messages
Number of messages
Characters
Write method
Write destination
Auto message
Specifications
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
You can write messages to the trend display.
100
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Enter a preset message or write a message on the spot
You can specify to write only to the display group or to all groups.
Writes a message when the MV recovers from a power failure while memory sampling is in
progress.
Writes a message when the trend interval is switched while memory sampling is in progress.
Added messages
Writes messages to past data positions
Number of messages
50
Status display section
Displays the MV status at the upper section of the display
Displayed information
(1) Year, month, day, time, (2) displayed group name/display name, (3) user name (when
using the login function), (4) batch name (when using the batch function), (5) internal
memory status, (6) external storage medium status, (7) alarm status, and (8) function usage
status (key lock , computation function, and e-mail)
Auto switching of displayed groups
Switches the display group at given intervals.
Interval: Select from the available settings between 5 s and 1 min.
Auto recovery display
Specify the display that will appear automatically when keys are not operated.
Time until the display switches: Select from the available settings between 1 min and 1 h.
Favorite display
You can register an often-used display to the HISTORY key and use the key to switch to the
display quickly
Up to eight displays can be registered.
13-4
M-4660
13.2 Display Functions
Item
Available languages
System information display
Specifications
English, Japanese, German, French, Chinese, or Korean
Displays the number of measurement, computation, and external input channels; available
options; remote controller ID; MAC address; firmware version; and internal memory capacity.
Network information display
Displays the MV network configuration information.
Display selection menu customization
You can show/hide and change the positions of each item in the display selection menu and
submenus
You can insert or delete separators.
Function menu customization
You can show/hide and change the display positions of each item.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
M-4660
13-5
13.3 Storage Function
Configuration
Item
Internal memory
Medium
External storage medium
Medium
Format
Specifications
Temporarily stores various types of data
Flash memory
CF card (up to 2 GB)
FAT32 or FAT16
Data Types
Data Type
Extension
Format
Display data
DAD
TDD
DAE
TDE
DAR
DAM
PDL
PNG
Binary (undisclosed)
Text
Binary (undisclosed)
Text
Text
Text
Binary (undisclosed)
PNG (general format)
Event data
Report data
Manually sampled data
Setup data
Snapshot data
Display Method
MV
DAQSTANDARD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Application
Yes1, 2
Yes
Yes1, 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1You can convert the data format on DAQSTANDARD and then open the data on a software application such as Microsoft Excel.
2 You can open on a software application, the data loaded from the MV through the communication function.
Display Data and Event Data
Item
Internal memory
File storage capacity
Number of files
Operation
Display data
Source
Sampling interval
Contents
Data size
Files size
Data format
Recording
Event data
Source
Sampling interval
Contents
Data size
Files size
Data format
Mode
Saved data combinations
File size
13-6
Specifications
80 MB (standard memory) or 200 MB (large memory)
Up to 400
FIFO (First In First Out)
Measurement, computation, and external input channels (/MC1)
Set by Trend/Storage interval
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, RD-MV2008: Select from 5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10
min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 10 h/div
RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024, RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, RDMV2048: Select from 15 s (only for fast sampling mode), 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20
min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 10 h/div
The maximum and minimum values within the data update interval among the data values
sampled at the scan interval
Measurement and external input channel (/MC1) data: 4 bytes/data value. Computation channel
data: 8 bytes/data value.
Up to 8 MB
Binary or text
Records data at all times
Measurement, computation, and external input channels (/MC1)
Set by Sample rate
Select from 25ms, 125ms, 250ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min, and 10min
However, you can only set rates that are slower than the scan interval.
Data for each sampling interval
Measurement and external input channel (/MC1) data: 2 bytes/data value. Computation channel
data: 4 bytes/data value.
Up to 8 MB
Binary or text
Free: Records data at all times
Triggered: Starts recording data when a certain event occurs and stops after a specified interval.
Display data only, event data only, or display data and event data.
See appendix 1.
M-4660
13.3 Storage Function
1
Manually Sampled Data
Item
Contents
Specifications
Values measured at user-specified times
You can specify up to 120 channels when using external input channels (/MC1).
Data format
Text
Maximum number of data values that can be stored to the internal memory
400
2
Report Data (/M1, /PM1)
3
Item
Specifications
Contents
Report at each scheduled time of report
Data format
Text
Maximum number of reports that can be stored to the internal memory
100
4
Saving of Data to an External Storage Medium
Item
Manual saving
Auto saving
Auto saving interval
Auto saving operation
File name
Save destination
Specifications
Select the data in the internal memory and save to an external storage medium
If auto saving is disabled, saves when you insert an external storage medium and operate the
keys.
Automatically saves data in the internal memory to an external storage medium
Display data: Select from 10, 20, 30 min, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 h, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 14, and 31 days.
Set by Save interval.
Event data (Free mode): Set by Data length.
Event data (triggered modes): Saves data at the end of a sampling operation at a specified time.
Set by Data length.
Manually sampled data: When you execute manual sampling
Report data: When reports are generated
Select “save data only if there is sufficient free space on the CF card” or “constantly retain the
most recent data files in the CF card (media FIFO)”.
Select from “serial number+user-assigned string+date,” “sequence number+user-assigned string,”
and “sequence number+batch name.”
Auto saving: CF card. Manual saving: CF card or USB flash memory
Directory name: Specify using up to 20 characters
6
7
8
9
Snapshot Data
Item
Contents
Data format
Output destination
5
Specifications
Displayed screen image data
PNG
CF card or communication output
10
Setup Data
Item
Contents
Data format
File name
Output destination
Loading
Specifications
MV setup data
Binary
Specify using up to 32 characters
CF card or USB flash memory
Loadable from a CF card or USB flash memory
11
Specifications
You can load display data or event data from a CF card or USB flash memory and display the
loaded data.
13
12
Data File Loading
Item
Function
Item
Header comment
Specifications
You can add comments using up to 50 characters to display data, event data, manually sampled
data, and report data files.
Specifications
Miscellaneous
App
Index
M-4660
13-7
13.4 Other Standard Functions
Event Action Function
Item
Event action
Number of settings
Event
Timer
Match time timer
Action
Specifications
Executes a specified operation when a given event occurs.
40
Remote control input, etc.
Number of timers: 4
Number of timers: 4
You can specify memory start/stop, alarm ACK, etc.
There are limitations on the combinations of events and actions.
Security Functions
Item
Key lock function
Login function
Administrators
Users
Specifications
Limitations on key operations, access to the external storage medium, and various operations
Allows registered users to operate the MV
5 users
30 users
Time Related Functions
Item
Clock
Accuracy
Time setting
Time adjustment method
While memory sampling
Specifications
With a calendar function
±10 ppm, excluding a delay (of 1 second, maximum) that results each time the power is
turned ON.
Using key operation, communication command, event action function, or SNTP client
function
Corrects the time by 40 ms for each second.
Limit by which the time is gradually adjusted: Select from the available settings between 10 s
and 5 min.
If the time is outside the limit, the time is immediately corrected.
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2038.
While no memory sampling
Time zone
Date format
Immediately changes the time
You can set the time difference from GMT.
Select YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, or DD.MM.YYYY
Types of Characters That the MV Can Handle
Item
Characters
13-8
Specifications
Alphabet characters, numbers, and symbols (limitation exists)
M-4660
13.4 Other Standard Functions
Communication Functions
1
Item
Electrical and mechanical
Medium
Implemented protocols
2
E-mail client
FTP client
FTP server
Web server
SNTP client
SNTP server
DHCP client
Modbus client
Modbus server
Setting/measurement server
Maintenance/test server
Instrument information server
Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet frames conform to the DIX specification)
Ethernet (10BASE-T)
TCP, IP, UDP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, SNTP, Modbus, and MV-dedicated
protocols
Automatically send e-mail when a specified event occurs such as an alarm
POPbeforeSMTP authentication available
Automatically transfer data files to the FTP server
Applicable files: Display data, event data, screen image data, and report data
Transfer files, delete files, manipulate directories, and output file lists from the MV
Shows the MV display on a Web browser.
Queries the SNTP server for the time and sets the MV.
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2036.
Transmits the MV time.
Time resolution: 5 ms
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2036.
Automatically obtains the network address settings from the DHCP server
Reads data from another device and writes to the registers.
Transmits MV data
Operate, set, and transmit data from the MV using a dedicated protocol
Transmits connection information and network information
Transmits the connected MV information (serial number, model name, etc.).
3
4
5
6
Batch Function
Item
Function
Batch name
Structure
Text field
Batch comment
Specifications
Data management using batch names. You can enter text fields and batch comments in the
data file.
Added to the file name of the display data and event data.
Batch number (up to 32 characters) + lot number (up to 8 digits)
Adds text to the display data and event data.
Adds text to the display data and event data.
USB Interface
Item
USB port
Number of ports
Supplied power
Connectable devices
Keyboard
External media
7
8
9
Specifications
Conforms to Rev 1.1, host function
2 (One on the front panel and another of the rear panel)
5 V ± 10%, 500 mA(per port)
If the total bus power of the two ports exceeds 500 mA, the devices cannot be used
simultaneously.
Only connect the devices listed below. Connecting other devices may damage the MV.
HID Class Ver1.1 compliant
104 keyboard (US) and 109 keyboard (Japanese)
Maximum number of connections: 1
USB flash memory (up to 2 GB)
We do not guarantee the operation of all USB flash memory devices.
External media such as hard disks, ZIP, MO, and optical disks cannot be used.
Maximum number of connections: 1
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
M-4660
13-9
13.5 Options
Alarm Output Relay (/A1, /A2, /A3, and /A4)
Item
Action
Number of outputs
Relay contact rating
Output format
Relay operation
Specifications
Transmits relay contact signals from the terminals on the rear panel when alarms occur.
2 outputs (/A1), 4 outputs (/A2), 6 outputs (/A3), and 12 outputs (/A4)
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
NO-C-NC
Energized/de-energized, AND/OR, hold/non-hold, and reflash settings are selectable.
RS-232 Interface (/C2) and RS-422/485 Interface (/C3)
Item
Specifications
Medium
EIA RS-232(/C2) or EIA RS-422/485(/C3)
Protocol
Dedicated protocol or Modbus protocol
Synchronization
Start-stop synchronization
Transmission mode (RS-422/485)
Four-wire, half-duplex, multi-drop connection (1:N (N = 1 to 32))
Data rate
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps
Data length
7 or 8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
Parity
Odd, even, or none
Handshaking
Off:Off, XON:XON, XON:RS, and CS:RS
Communication distance (RS-422/485)
1200 m
Modbus communication
Operation modes: Master or slave
FAIL/Status Output Relay (/F1)
Item
FAIL output
Relay operation
Status output
Relay operation
Relay contact rating
13-10
Specifications
Relay contact output on CPU error
Energized during normal operation and de-energized on system error.
Transmits a relay contact signal when a selected condition occurs
Energized when a condition occurs
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
M-4660
13.5 Options
1
Computation Function (including the report function) (/M1)
Item
Number of computation channels
Operation
Computation accuracy
Usable data
Channel data
Constants
Communication input data
Remote control input status
Pulse input
Status input
Rolling average:
Measure range
Alarms
Display
Data saving
Report function
Specifications
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1008, RD-MV2008: 12 channels (101 to 112)
RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024: 24 channels (101 to 124)
RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, RD-MV2048: 60 channels (101 to
160)
General arithmetic operations: Basic arithmetic, square root, absolute, common logarithm,
natural logarithm, exponential, and power
Relational operations: <, ≤, >, ≥, =, ≠
Logic operations: AND, OR, NOT, XOR
Statistical operations: TLOG, CLOG
Special operations: PRE, HOLD, RESET, CARRY
Conditional operation: [a?b:c]
Double-precision floating point for TLOG.SUM and single-precision floating point for all
other computations
Measurement, computation, and external input channels (/MC1)
60 constants
RD-MV1000: 24, RD-MV2000: 60
0/1 (/R1)
Counts the number of pulses (/PM1)
Internal switch, alarm output relay (/A[ ]), and flags
Performs moving average on the computed results.
–9999999 to 99999999
Decimal place: Zero to four fractional digits
High limit, low limit, delay high limit, and delay low limit
Hysteresis: High and low limit alarm: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span.
Same as the measurement channels
Same as the measurement channels
Number of report channels: same as the number of computation channels
Operations: Average, maximum, minimum, sum, instantaneous value
Report types: Hourly, daily, hourly + daily, daily + weekly, daily + monthly
Input Type
Cu10 (GE)
Cu10 (L&N)
Cu10 (WEED)
Cu10 (BAILEY)
Cu10: a = 0.00392 at 20°C
Cu10: a = 0.00393 at 20°C
Cu25: a = 0.00425 at 0°C
* Measuring current i = 1 mA
–200 to 300°C
Accuracy
Guaranteed
Range
7
8
9
–70 to 170°C
–75 to 150°C
–200 to 260°C
–328 to 572°F
Measurement Accuracy
A/D integration time:
16.7 ms or more
(0.4% of rdg + 1.0°C)
A/D integration time:
1.67 ms
(0.8% of rdg + 5.0°C)
Max.
Resolution
10
0.1°C
–200 to 300°C
(0.3% of rdg + 0.8°C)
4
6
Specifications
Under standard operating conditions
Measurement
Range
3
5
Cu10, Cu25 RTD Input/Three-Wire Isolated RTD Input (/N1)
Item
Measurement/display accuracy
2
11
(0.5% of rdg + 2.0°C)
Input source resistance
1 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal.)
Ambient temperature influence (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or greater)
±(0.2% of range + 2 digits) or less
Signal source resistance
With a variation of 1 Ω per wire (same resistance for all three wires): ±(0.1% of rdg +
1 digit) or less
With a maximum difference of 40 mΩ between wires: Approx. 1°C
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
M-4660
13-11
13.5 Options
Three-Wire Isolated RTD Input (/N2)
Item
Input terminal
Specifications
Isolation on each channel
Applies to RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024, RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RDMV2040, and RD-MV2048
Extended Input (/N3)
Item
Specifications
Measurement/display accuracy
Under standard operating conditions
Input Type
Measurement Range
Measurement Accuracy
A/D integration time:
A/D integration time:
16.7 ms or more
1.67 ms
0 to 20 K
Within 4.5 K
20 to 300 K
Within 2.5 K
(0.25% of rdg + 2.3°C)
PLATINEL
0.0 to 1400.0°C 32 to 2552°F
Accuracy not guaranteed
0 to 450°C
PR40-20
0.0 to 1900.0°C 32 to 3452°F
450 to 750°C
(0.9% of rdg + 3.2°C)
TC
750 to 1100°C
(0.9% of rdg + 1.3°C)
1100 to 1900°C (0.9% of rdg + 0.4°C)
(0.25% of rdg + 0.7°C)
NiNiMo
0.0 to 1310.0°C 32 to 2390°F
0 to 400°C
15.0°C
W/WRe26
0.0 to 2400.0°C 32 to 4352°F
400 to 2400°C
(0.2% of rdg + 2.0°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 1.3°C)
Type N (AWG14) 0.0 to 1300.0°C 32 to 2372°F
Pt50
–200.0 to 550.0°C –328.0 to 1112.0°F (0.3% of rdg + 0.6°C)
Ni100 (SAMA)
–200.0 to 250.0°C –328.0 to 482.0°F (0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C)
Ni100 (DIN)
–60.0 to 180.0°C –76.0 to 356.0°F
(0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C)
Ni120
–70.0 to 200.0°C –94.0 to 392.0°F
0 to 40 K
Within 3.0 K
0.0 to 300.0 K
RTD* J263*B
40 to 300 K
Within 1.0 K
(0.15% of rdg + 0.8°C)
Cu53
–50.0 to 150.0°C –58.0 to 302.0°F
(0.2% of rdg + 1.0°C)
Cu100
–50.0 to 150.0°C –58.0 to 302.0°F
Pt25
–200.0 to 550.0°C –328.0 to 1022.0°F (0.15% of rdg + 0.6°C)
* Measuring current i = 1 mA
Kp vs Au7Fe
0.0 to 300.0 K
Within 13.5 K
Within 7.5 K
(0.25% of rdg + 8.0°C)
Max.
Resolution
0.1 K
Accuracy not guaranteed
(0.9% of rdg + 15.0°C)
(0.9% of rdg + 6.0°C)
(0.9% of rdg + 3.0°C)
(0.5% of rdg + 3.5°C)
30.0°C
(0.4% of rdg + 4.0°C)
(0.5% of rdg + 7.0°C)
(0.6% of rdg + 3.0°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 2.0°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 2.0°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 2.0°C)
Within 9.0 K
Within 3.0 K
(0.3% of rdg + 4.0°C)
(0.4% of rdg + 5.0°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 3.0°C)
0.1°C
0.1 K
0.1°C
Input source resistance
Thermocouple input: 2 kΩ or less
RTD input: 1 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal)
Ambient temperature influence (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or greater)
TC input
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less, excluding the reference junction compensation error
RTD input
±(0.2% of range + 2 digits) or less
Signal source resistance
TC input
With a variation of signal source resistance +1 kΩ: ±10 µV or less
RTD input
With a variation of 1 Ω per wire (same resistance for all three wires): ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or
less
With a maximum difference of 100 mΩ between wires: Approx. 1°C
Remote Control (/R1)
Item
Number of input terminals
Input type
Specifications
8
Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler, built-in isolated power supply for the input
terminals, and shared common.
Input type and signal level
Voltage-free contact
Contact closed at 200 Ω or less and contact open at 100 kΩ or greater.
Open collector
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage current when OFF: 0.25 mA or
less
Allowable input voltage
5 VDC
Signal type
Level or edge (250 ms or more)
Action
Executes a specified action by applying a given signal to the remote signal input terminal
Action assignment: Set using the event action function
13-12
M-4660
13.5 Options
1
24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply (/TPS2 and /TPS4)
Item
Number of loops
Output voltage
Rated output current
Maximum output current
Allowable conductor resistance
Max. length of wiring
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Specifications
2 (/TPS2), 4 (/TPS4)
22.8 to 25.2 VDC (under rated load current)
4 to 20 mADC
25 mADC (overcurrent protection operation current: approx. 68 mADC)
RL ≤ (17.8 – minimum transmitter operation voltage)/0.02 A
where 17.8 V is the result obtained by subtracting the maximum drop voltage of 5 V,
when the load shunt resistance is 250 Ω, from the minimum output voltage of 22.8 V
2 km (when using a CEV cable)
20 MΩ or more at 500 VDC between output terminal and ground
500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10mA) for one minute between output terminal and ground
500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10mA) for one minute between output terminals
2
3
4
Pulse Input (/PM1)
Item
Pulse input
Number of Inputs:
Input type
Input type and signal level
Counting
Allowable input voltage
Max. sampling pulse period
Minimum detected pulse width
Pulse detection period
Pulse measuring accuracy
Pulse count interval
Miscellaneous
Remote control
Computation Function
Specifications
3 (8 when using the remote control input terminals)
Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler and built-in isolated power supply
for the input terminals.
Shared common for pulse inputs
Voltage-free
Contact closed at 200 Ω or less and contact open at 100 kΩ or
contact
greater.
Open collector
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage
current when OFF: 0.25 mA or less
Counts the rising edges of pulses.
For voltage-free contact input: Contact open to contact close
For open collector: The H terminal voltage level changing from high to low
30 VDC
100 Hz
5 ms or more for both low (closed) and high (open)
Approx. 3.9 ms (256 Hz)
±1 pulse
Scan interval or 1 s
Pulse input terminals can be used as remote control input terminals, isolated from
remote control input terminals
Number of inputs: 5. Other items are the same as with remote control (/R1)
Remote control input terminals can be used as pulse input terminals.
Same as the computation function (/M1)
5
6
7
8
9
10
Calibration Correction (/CC1)
Item
Calibration correction method
Specifications
Corrects the measured value of each channel using segment linearizer approximation
Number of segment points: 2 to 16 (including the start and end points)
External Input Channel Function (/MC1)
Item
Function
12
Specifications
Loads data from other instruments by using the Modbus client or Modbus master
function and displays, records, and saves the data
240 channels (201 to 440)
Same as the measurement channels
Same as the measurement channels
Specify up to 120 channels from measurement, computation, and external input
channels.
13
Specifications
Number of channels
Display
Data saving
Manual sampling
11
App
Index
M-4660
13-13
13.6 General Specifications
Construction
Item
Material
Color
External dimensions
Weight
Specifications
Case: Aluminum plate (RD-MV2000), metal plate (RD-MV1000)
Bezel: Polycarbonate
Case: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 or equivalent)
Bezel: Light gray (Munsell 5.2PB8.2/1.0 or equivalent)
*
RD-MV1000: 189(W) × 177(H) × 253(D) mm, 189(W) × 177(H) × 259(D) mm
*
RD-MV2000: 307(W) × 273(H) × 254(D) mm , 307(W) × 273(H) × 260(D) mm
* With clamp terminals (input terminal suffix code is -1) or pulse inputs (/PM1 option)
RD-MV1004, RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012: Approx. 3.3 kg, RD-MV1008, RD-MV1024: Approx. 3.5
kg, RD-MV2008, RD-MV2020: Approx. 5.3 kg, RD-MV2010: Approx. 5.2 kg, RD-MV2030: Approx.
5.5 kg, RD-MV2040, RD-MV2048: Approx. 5.6 kg excluding options
Normal Operating Conditions
Item
Supply voltage
Power supply frequency
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration
Shock
Magnetic field
External noise
DC voltage
Thermocouple
Specifications
90 to 132, 180 to 250 VAC
50 Hz ± 2%, 60 Hz ± 2%
0 to 40°C
20 to 80%RH (at 5 to 40°C)
10 to 60 Hz, 0.2 m/s2
Not allowed
400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz)
Normal mode (50/60 Hz)
The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring range.
The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring thermal
electromotive force.
RTD
50 mV or less
Common mode noise
250 VACrms or less for all ranges (50/60 Hz)
Maximum noise voltage between channels
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz) or less
Installation position
Horizontal
You can tilt the MV by bringing the front legs out.
Warm-up time
At least 30 minutes after power-on
Installation location
Indoors
Operating altitude
2000 m or less
Input Terminal (input terminal suffix code -1)
Item
Type
Specifications
Clamp terminal
Attachable and detachable for each channel
Recommended wire size: 0.08 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG28 to 16)
Input Terminal (input terminal suffix code -2)
Item
Type
13-14
Specifications
M4 screw
M-4660
13.6 General Specifications
1
Power Supply (supply voltage suffix code -1)
Item
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range
Rated power supply frequency
Power consumption
Allowable interruption time
Specifications
100 to 240 VAC
90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC
50 Hz or 60 Hz
RD-MV1000/RDSupply voltage
MV2000
RD-MV1000
100 VAC
240 VAC
RD-MV2000
100 VAC
240 VAC
LCD backlight off
Normal
Maximum
15 VA
25 VA
28 VA
38 VA
30 VA
40 VA
40 VA
54 VA
45 VA
60 VA
65 VA
90 VA
2
3
Less than 1 cycle of the power supply frequency
4
Power Supply (supply voltage suffix code -2)
Item
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range
Power consumption
Specifications
12 VDC/24 VDC
10.0 to 28.8 VDC
RD-MV1000/RDMV2000
RD-MV1000
RD-MV2000
5
Supply voltage
LCD backlight off
Normal
Maximum
12 VDC
24 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
7 VA
7 VA
9 VA
9 VA
14 VA
14 VA
18 VA
18 VA
24 VA
23 VA
35 VA
33 VA
Miscellaneous
A/D converter integration time: Fixed to 20 ms (50 Hz) if set to Auto
When using the AC adapter
Rated supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Supply voltage range
90 to 264 VAC
Rated power supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Maximum input power consumption
RD-MV1000: 60 VA, RD-MV2000: 90 VA
Rated power supply frequency 48 to 62 Hz
Power consumption
RD-MV1000/RD- Supply voltage
LCD backlight off
Normal
MV2000
RD-MV1000
100 VAC
15 VA
30 VA
240 VAC
25 VA
40 VA
RD-MV2000
100 VAC
28 VA
40 VA
240 VAC
38 VA
54 VA
Dielectric strength
Miscellaneous
6
7
8
Maximum
45 VA
60 VA
65 VA
90 VA
10
1500 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the AC adapter power supply terminal and
earth
A/D converter integration time: Fixed to 20 ms (50 Hz) if set to Auto
11
Isolation
Item
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Specifications
Between the Ethernet, RS-422/485, and insulation terminals and earth: 20 MΩ or greater at
500 VDC
Between the power terminal and earth: 2300 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between the contact output terminal and earth: 1600 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between the signal input terminal and earth: 1500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between signal input terminals: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute (excluding the “b”
input terminal of RD-MV1006, RD-MV1012, RD-MV1024,
RD-MV2010, RD-MV2020, RD-MV2030, RD-MV2040, RDMV2048)
Between the remote input terminal and earth: 1000 VDC for one minute
Between the pulse input terminal and earth: 1000 VDC for one minute
Grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less
12
13
Specifications
Ground
9
App
Index
M-4660
13-15
13.6 General Specifications
Transporting and Storage Conditions
Item
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration
Shock
Specifications
–25 to 60°C
5 to 95%RH (no condensation)
10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 or less
392m/s2 or less (in packaged condition)
Compliant Standards
Item
CSA
UL
CE
EMC directive
Low voltage directive
C-Tick
1
2
3
13-16
Specifications
CSA22.2 No.61010-1, installation category II,1 pollution degree 2,2 and measurement category II
UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C)
EN61326 compliant (Emission: Class A, Immunity: Annex A)
EN61000-3-2 compliant
EN61000-3-3 compliant
EN55011
EN61010-1, installation category II, measurement category II,3 pollution degree 2
AS/NZS CISPR11 compliant, Class A Group 1
Installation category (overvoltage category) II: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies
the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. “II” applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation
like a distribution board.
Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface
resistivity is adhering. “2” applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
Measurement category II: Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments
supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.
M-4660
13.6 General Specifications
1
Standard Performance
Item
Specifications
Measurement/display accuracy
Standard operating conditions:
Temperature:
23 ± 2°C
Humidity:
55% ± 10%RH
Power supply voltage:
90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC
Power supply frequency:
50/60 Hz ± 1%
Warm-up time:
At least 30 minutes.
Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation.
Input Type
DC voltage
Range
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2V
1-5 V
6V
20 V
50 V
R
S
Thermocouple
• Not including the
accuracy of reference
junction compensation
• With burnout detection
function OFF
B
K
E
J
T
N
W
L
U
WRe
RTD
Pt100
JPt100
DI
Voltage
Contact
Measurement Accuracy (Digital Display)
A/D integration time: 16.7 ms or more A/D integration time: 1.67 ms
(0.05% of rdg + 12 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 40 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 3 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 15 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 12 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 40 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 3 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 15 digits)
(0.15% of rdg + 1°C)
R, S
0 to 100°C: 3.7°C,
100 to 300°C: 1.5°C
B
400 to 600°C: 2°C,
Accuracy not guaranteed for
values less than 400°C
(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
–200 to –100°C: (0.15% of rdg + 1°C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C)
–200 to –100°C: (0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 4°C)
R, S
0 to 100°C: 10°C,
100 to 300°C: 5°C
B
400 to 600°C: 7°C,
Accuracy not guaranteed for
values less than 400°C
(0.2% of rdg + 3.5°C)
–200 to –100°C: (0.15% of rdg + 6°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
–200 to –100°C: (0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.15% of rdg + 1°C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C)
–200 to –100°C: (0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
0 to 200°C: 4.0°C
(0.3% of rdg + 3.5°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 7°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
–200 to –100°C: (0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 10°C)
0 to 200°C: 18.0°C
(0.15% of rdg + 0.3°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 1.5°C)
2
3
Max. Resolution
of Digital Display
1 µV
10 µV
10 µV
100 µV
1 mV
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
4
5
6
7
0.1°C
8
9
Threshold level (Vth=2.4 V) accuracy ± 0.1 V
1 kΩ or less: 1 (ON), 100 kΩ or more: 0 (OFF) (parallel capacitance of 0.01 µF or less)
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
M-4660
13-17
13.6 General Specifications
Item
Specifications
Measurement accuracy when scaling
Accuracy during scaling (digits) = measurement accuracy (digits) × multiplier + 2 digits (rounded up)
* Fractions rounded up
where the multiplier = scaling span (digits)/measuring span (digits).
Example For 1-5 V range (A/D integration time is 16.7 ms or more), measurement span of 1.000
to 5.000 V, and scaling span of 0.000 to 2.000
The measuring accuracy for 5 V input is as follows:
Measuring accuracy (1-5V range) = ±(0.05% × 5 V + 3 digits) = ±(0.0025 V [3 digits] +
3 digits) = ±6 digits
Multiplier = {2000 digits (0.000 to 2.000)}/4000 digits (1.000 to 5.000) = 0.5
Thus, accuracy during scaling = ±(6 × 0.5 + 2) digits = 5 digits (fractions rounded up)
Reference junction compensation accuracy
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0°C and when input terminal temperature
is balanced
Type R, S, W, WRe: ±1°C
Maximum input voltage
Input resistance
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, and U: ±0.5°C
Type B: Internal reference compensation is fixed to 0°C
±60 VDC (continuous)
200 mV range or less and TC: 10 MΩ or more
2 V range or higher:
Approx. 1 MΩ
Input source resistance
Volt, TC
2 kΩ or less
RTD input (Pt100)
10 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal.)
Bias current
10 nA or less (except when burnout detection function is enabled)
Maximum common mode noise voltage
250 VACrms (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Maximum noise voltage between channels
250 VACrms (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Inter-channel interference 120 dB (when the input source resistance is 500 Ω and the input to other channels is 60 VDC)
Common mode rejection ratio
When the A/D integration time is 20 ms
120 dB (50 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
When the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms
120 dB (60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
When the A/D integration time is 1.67 ms
80 dB (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
Normal mode rejection ratio
When the A/D integration time is 20 ms
40 dB or more (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%)
When the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms
40 dB or more (60 Hz ± 0.1%)
When the A/D integration time is 1.67 ms
Not reject 50/60 Hz
13-18
M-4660
13.6 General Specifications
1
Effects from Operating Conditions
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms or greater)
DC voltage, TC range With temperature variation of 10°C: ±(0.1% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less
* Excluding the reference junction compensation error
RTD range
±(0.1% of rdg + 2 digits) or less
Power supply fluctuation
With a fluctuation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC (50/60 Hz): Accuracy specifications are
met.
With a fluctuation of ±2 Hz of the rated power frequency (supply voltage 100 VAC): Accuracy
specifications are met.
Magnetic field
AC (50/60 Hz) and 400 ADC/m fields: ±(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits) or less
Signal source resistance
DC voltage range
With a variation of source signal resistance + 1 kΩ:
200 mV range or less: ±10 µV or less
2 V range or higher: ±0.15% of rdg or less
TC range
With a variation of signal source resistance +1 kΩ: ±10 µV or less
RTD range (Pt100)
With a variation of 10 Ω per wire (same resistance for all three wires): ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or
less
With a maximum difference of 40 mΩ between wires: Approx. 0.1°C
Effects of vibration
Effects from a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and
an acceleration of 0.2 m/s2: ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Clock
3
4
5
6
Miscellaneous
Item
Memory backup
2
Specifications
A built-in lithium battery backs up the settings and runs the clock
Battery life: Approximately 10 years (at room temperature)
With a calendar function
Time can be synchronized by using an external contact (remote control function, option).
Clock accuracy: ±10 ppm, excluding the delay at power-on (1 s or less)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
M-4660
13-19
13.7 External Dimensions
RD-MV1000
Unit : mm
(approx. inch)
REAR VIEW
189
(7.44)
259
(10.20)
162.4
177
(6.97)
232
(9.13)
(6.39)
11°
191
(7.52)
POWER
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3 %. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
13-20
M-4660
13.7 External Dimensions
1
RD-MV2000
Unit : mm
(approx. inch)
REAR VIEW
2
260
(10.24)
3
4
5
307
6
273
7
(10.75)
334 (13.15)
(12.09)
8
9
10
281
(11.06)
283
(11.14)
11
10
.5°
12
13
Specifications
App
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3 %. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
Index
M-4660
13-21
Appendix
1
Appendix 1 Data File Size
This section explains how to calculate the file sizes of display data files and event data
files. The calculation examples are for when the MV is set to record only display data or
only event data. If you are recording both display and event data, calculate the data size
of each and add them together.
Use the calculated file size as a rough estimate.
2
A file consists of the following:
sampled-data related information + sampled data
4
3
File Size
The maximum size of a single display data file or event data file is 8 MB.
5
Sampled-Data Related Information Size
Item
File header
Channel information
Group information
Message information
Batch information
Sampled data header
Alarm information header
Message information
Alarm information
Size in Bytes
216
88×N + 32
96×10 + 32 = 992
(RD-MV1000)
96×36 + 32 = 3,488
(RD-MV2000)
104×50 + 32(an add message area is reserved by default)
832
80 + 32 + N×8 + 16 + 2
24 + 8 (add the size of this item even if there is no alarm)
Up to 104×1050 (varies depending on the number of messages)
Up to 32×5000 (varies depending on the number of alarms)
N is the number of channels (measurement channels + external input channels + computation
channels).
Example 1:When recording measured data of 30 measurement channels, 240
external input channels, and 10 computation channels with no messages
or alarms.
216 + (88×280 + 32) + 3,488 + (104×50 + 32) + 832 + (80 + 32 + 280×8 + 16 + 2) + (24 + 8)=
36,842 bytes
6
7
8
9
10
Sampled Data Size
• Data Sizes of Display Data and Event Data
Channel
Measurement channel
External input channel
Computation channel
Display Data
4 bytes/channel
4 bytes/channel
8 bytes/channel
11
Event Data
2 bytes/channel
2 bytes/channel
4 bytes/channel
12
Time data is added to all channels at each sampling.
Time data
8 bytes/sample
Event Data
(Number of measurement channels×2 bytes) + (number of external input channels×2
bytes) + (number of computation channels×4 bytes) + 8 bytes (time data)
Appendix
• Data Size per Sample
Display Data
(Number of measurement channels×4 bytes) + (number of external input channels×4
bytes) + (number of computation channels×8 bytes) + 8 bytes (time data)
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-1
Appendix 1 Data File Size
• Sampled Data Size per File
Display Data
Data size per sample×file save interval/sampling interval
The sampling interval is determined by dividing the Trend/Storage interval (s/div) by
30.
Example 2:When recording the display data of 30 measurement channels, 240
external input channels, and 10 computation channels with the Trend/
Storage interval set to 30 min/div (display data sampling interval is 60 s)
and the file save interval set to 1 day (24 h)
(30×4 bytes + 240×4 bytes + 10×8 bytes + 8 bytes)×24h×60×60/60 s
= 1,168 bytes×24h×60×60/60 s
= 1,681,920 bytes
Event Data
Data size per sample×data length/sample rate
Example 3:When recording the event data of 30 measurement channels, 240
external input channels, and 10 computation channels with the sample
rate set to 1 s and the data length set to 2 h.
(30×2 bytes + 240×2 bytes + 10×4 bytes + 8 bytes)×2h×60×60/1 s
= 588 bytes×2h×60×60/1 s
= 4,233,600 bytes
Size of a File
The size of a file is the sum of the sampled-data related information size and the sampled
data size.
Display Data
Example 4: When recording under the conditions given in examples 1 and 2
From examples 1 and 2, the size of a file is 36,842 + 1,681,920 = 1,718,762 bytes ≈
1.639 MB.
Event Data
Example 5: When recording under the conditions in examples 1 and 3
From examples 1 and 3, the size of a file is 36,842 + 4,233,600 = 4,270,442 bytes ≈
4.073 MB.
App-2
M-4660
Appendix 1 Data File Size
CF Card Recording Length
Here we will estimate how long the MV can record to a CF card when automatically
saving measured data.
Display Data
CF card recording length (estimate) = (CF card size/file size)×file save interval
Example 6:We will estimate the CF card recording length under the conditions
given in examples 1 and 2. We assume the CF card size to be 256 MB.
1
2
3
256 MB/1.639 MB×24 h
≈ 3,748 h
≈ 156 days
Event Data
CF card recording length (estimate) = (CF card size/file size)×data length
Example 7:We will estimate how often we will need to replace the CF card under
the conditions given in examples 1 and 3. We assume the CF card size
to be 256 MB.
256 MB/4.073 MB×2 h
≈ 125 h
≈ 5.2 days
4
5
6
Note
7
If you format a 256-MB CF card, you will be able to use approximately 246 MB.
Internal Memory Recording Length
If you are manually saving measured data to the internal memory, old data will be
overwritten when the internal memory becomes full. You must save the measured data to
a CF card before the data is overwritten.
Display Data
Internal memory recording length (estimate) = (Internal memory size/file size)×file
save interval
Example 8:We will estimate the internal memory recording length under the
conditions given in examples 1 and 2. We assume a standard internal
memory (80 MB).
80 MB/1.639 MB×24 h
≈ 1,171 h
≈ 48 days
8
9
10
11
80 MB/4.073 MB×2 h
≈ 39 h
≈ 1.63 days
12
Appendix
Event Data
Internal memory recording length (estimate) = (Internal memory size/file size)×data
length
Example 9: We will estimate the internal memory recording length under the
conditions given in examples 1 and 3. We assume a standard internal memory (80
MB).
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-3
Appendix 2 Event Action Configuration Examples
Example 1: T
o Start/Stop Memory Sampling by Using the Remote Control
Function (/R1 Option)
We will configure the MV so that it starts or stops memory sampling when a signal is
applied to remote control input terminal 2. We will use event action number 1.
• Display and Settings
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > Event action.
<Operation>
If you turn ON the input to remote control input terminal 2, the MV will start memory
sampling (if it isn’t already). If you turn OFF the input, the MV will stop memory sampling.
Example 2: To Write a Message When an Alarm Occurs
We will configure the MV so that it will write the message “Channel 1 Alarm” to group 1
when an alarm occurs on channel 1. We will use event action number 2.
• Display and Settings
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > Event action.
<Other Settings>
• Assign an alarm to channel 1, and configure the MV so that alarm events are sent to
internal switch 3.
• Register “Channel 1 Alarm” to message number 4.
For alarm configuration instructions, see section 3.7.
For message registration instructions, see section 6.4.
App-4
M-4660
Appendix 2 Event Action Configuration Examples
Example 3: To Save Data Every Day at 17:00
We will configure the MV so that it will store recorded data to a CF card every day at hour
17. We will use event action number 3. We will use timer number 1.
1
2
• Display and Settings
To set the Event Action
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > Event action.
3
4
5
To Configure Match Timer Number 1
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > MatchTimeTimer.
6
7
8
<Other Settings>
Configure the MV to automatically save display data, and set the file save interval to
1day or longer. If you set the file save interval shorter than 1day, the MV also saves data
at the file save interval.
For instructions on how to configure display data recording conditions, see section 4.1.
9
10
11
12
Appendix
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-5
Appendix 2 Event Action Configuration Examples
Example 4: T
o Release Alarm Output by Using the USER Key (AlarmACK
Operation)
We will configure the MV so that the alarm output is released when the USER key. is
pressed. We will use event action number 4.
• Display and Settings
Press MENU and then select Menu tab > Timer, Event action > Event action.
<Operation>
Pressing USER releases an active alarm indication and relay output.
<Other Settings>
Set the alarm indication and alarm output relay operation to Hold.
For instructions on how to configure the alarm indication and alarm output relay
operation, see section 3.5.
App-6
M-4660
1
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
This section explains the text file formats. The MV can generate the following text files:
display data files, event data files, manually sampled data files, and report files.
In the explanation below, CRLF represents a terminator.
2
3
Display Data
• If you set the display data file format to text, the MV generates a tab-separated text
file that contains numeric values and text.
• The MV does not generate values for measurement channels set to Skip or for
computation or external input channels set to Off.
Format
YRECCRLF
Measure Data
Model
Language Code
Serial No.
File Header
File ID
Time Correction
Start Info
End Info
Extra Data
4
5
Version 1.00.00CRLF
MV1000CRLF
Shift_JISCRLF
III•••ICRLF
HHH•••HCRLF
N1 N2CRLF
TTTTCRLF
FFF•••F SSS•••S JJJ•••JCRLF
FFF•••F SSS•••S JJJ•••JCRLF
PPPP KKKK
Q1Q1Q1•••Q1 Q2Q2Q2•••Q2
7
•••CRLF
8
9
10
ccccc
ttt•••t
uuuuuu
PPPP
KKKK
MessageCRLF
CRLF
CRLF
MessageCRLF
CountCRLF
nnn•••n
sssssCRLF
11
12
Appendix
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Sampling Interval SI UNCRLF
Trigger Point TPCRLF
Batch Info BI BBB•••BCRLF
Batch Comment (Time) RRR•••R GGG•••GCRLF
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Text InfoCRLF
Text Field YYY•••Y EEE•••ECRLF
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Ch ccccc ccccc
•••
Tag ttt•••t ttt•••t •••
Unit uuuuuu uuuuuu
•••
Type PPPP PPPP
•••
Kind KKKK KKKK
•••
Sampling DataCRLF
(Time) nnn•••n nnn•••n •••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Message DataCRLF
(Time) WWW•••W SSS•••S RRR•••RCRLF
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-7
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
III•••I MV serial number (16 characters)
HHH•••H File header (50 characters)
Nx N1
Memory start number
N2
File serial number up to memory stop
TTTT Time adjustment
Done
Carried out
None
Not carried out
FFF•••F Start and stop conditions
ManualManually (using key operations or
communications)
Auto
Auto (auto save, etc.)
Black Out
On a power failure event
Trigger
On a trigger event
SSS•••SStart and stop trigger source or message trigger source
None
Key
START/STOP key input
Communication
Communication input
Remote
Event
Remote input
Event occurrence
JJJ•••J Start/end user name (up to 20 characters)
PPPP Data type
Meas
Measurement channel data
Math
Computation channel data
Ext
External input channel data
KKKK Maximum/minimum value
Max
Maximum value
Min
Minimum value
Inst
Instantaneous value
Q1Q1Q1•••Q1
Error data handling
PlusOver
MinusOver
BurnOutUp
BurnOutDown
Positive range-out
Negative range-out
Positive range-out due to burnout
Negative range-out due to burnout
Error
Computation error
NoData
Undefined
Q2Q2Q2•••Q2 Error data value (5 digits including the sign (measurement and external
input), 10 digits including the sign (computation))
SI Trend/Storage interval
UN Time unit
TP Trigger point (0 and greater, displays the trigger point number)
BI Lot number
BBB•••B Batch number (up to 32 characters)
RRR•••R User name (up to 20 characters)
GGG•••G Comments (up to 50 characters)
YYY•••Y Title (up to 20 characters)
EEE•••E Text (up to 30 characters)
App-8
M-4660
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
ccccc
ttt•••t
uuuuuu
nnn•••n
sssss
WWW•••W
1
Channel number (five characters)
Tag name (up to 16 characters)
Unit (up to six characters)
Measured value (up to 10 characters)
Number of messages (up to five characters)
Message string (up to 32 characters)
Time Format
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss_bbb
2
Year, month, day, and time of sampling (23 characters)
yyyy
Year
mo
Month
dd
Day
hh
Hour
mi
Minute
ss
Second
bbb
Millisecond
3
4
5
Event Data
• If you set the event data file format to text, the MV generates a tab-separated text file
that contains numeric values and text.
• The MV does not generate values for measurement channels set to Skip or for
computation or external input channels set to Off.
6
7
Format
For the format and parameters, see “Display Data.”
8
9
10
11
12
Appendix
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-9
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
Manually Sampled Data
• The MV generates manually sampled data to a tab-separated text file that contains
numeric values and text.
• The MV does not generate values for measurement channels set to Skip or for
computation or external input channels set to Off.
• Data is added to the file each time you carry out a manual sampling operation.
Format
YRECCRLF
Manual Sample Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Ch
Tag
Unit
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss
App-10
Version 1.00.00CRLF
MV2000CRLF
shift-JISCRLF
ffffffffCRLF
III•••ICRLF
HHH•••HCRLF
ccccc
ccccc
ttt•••t
ttt•••t
uuuuuu
uuuuuu
nnn•••n
nnn•••n
•••
•••
•••
•••
cccccCRLF
ttt•••tCRLF
uuuuuuCRLF
nnn•••nCRLF
ffffffff
File status (eight characters)
Complete
Completed
Progress
Data being added
Decrease
Defective
III•••I
HHH•••H
ccccc
ttt•••t
uuuuuu
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss
nnn•••n
MV serial number (16 characters)
File header (50 characters)
Channel number (five characters)
Tag name (16 characters)
Unit (six characters)
Year, month, day, and time of sampling (19 characters)
Measured value (13 characters)
M-4660
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
1
File Output Example
Below is an example of manually sampled data for channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
YREC
Manual Sample Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Ch
Tag
Unit
2008/01/23 08:57:22
2008/01/23 08:57:28
2
Version 1.00.00
RD-MV2000
shift-JIS
Progress
S5E701600
CH001
TI-101
˚C
213.8
208.6
CH002
OUT-102
V
0.517
0.494
3
CH003
FI-103
m3/h
368.4
363.0
CH004
VA-204
%
68.9
68.1
4
5
Note
•
The output when error data, range-out data, or computation range-out data is detected
Channel
Measurement
channels and
external input
channels
Computation
channels
•
Data
Error
Output
(Space)
Positive range-out (includes burnout detection)
99999
Negative range-out (includes burnout detection)
Error
–99999
999999999
Positive computation range-out (when the value
exceeds approx. 3.4E+38)
Negative computation range-out (when the value is
less than approx. –3.4E+38)
999999999
–999999999
6
7
8
9
The MV generates a new manually sampled data file in the following cases:
• A measurement channel is changed to Skip from a range other than Skip.
• A measurement channel is changed from Skip to a range other than Skip.
• A computation or external input channel is changed from On to Off or Off to On.
• The unit is changed.
10
11
12
Appendix
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-11
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
Report File
• The MV generates hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports to a tab-separated text
file that contains numeric values and text.
• The MV does not generate values for measurement channels set to Skip or for
computation or external input channels set to Off.
• Data is added to the file each time a file is generated.
Format
YRECCRLF
Report Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Report Set
File Data
Math Set
Start Time
Ch
Tag
Unit
Data Type
Time
Status
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Version 1.00.00CRLF
MV2000CRLF
shift-JISCRLF
ffffffffCRLF
III•••ICRLF
HHH•••HCRLF
RRR•••RCRLF
rrr•••rCRLF
MMM
MMM
MMM
YYYY/MO/DD HH:MI:SSCRLF
ccccc
ccccc
•••
ttt•••t
ttt•••t
•••
uuuuuu
uuuuuu
•••
sss•••sCRLF
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ssCRLF
eeeeeeeeeeCRLF
nnn•••n
nnn•••n
•••
nnn•••n
nnn•••n
•••
nnn•••n
nnn•••n
•••
nnn•••n
nnn•••n
•••
ffffffff
MMMMCRLF
cccccCRLF
ttt•••tCRLF
uuuuuuCRLF
nnn•••nCRLF
nnn•••nCRLF
nnn•••nCRLF
nnn•••nCRLF
File status (eight characters)
Complete
Completed
Progress
Data being added
Decrease
Defective
III•••I MV serial number (16 characters)
HHH•••H File header (50 characters)
RRR•••R Report setting (setting on the MV) (13 characters)
Hourly
Daily
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly
rrr•••r Report file contents (13 characters)
Hourly
Daily
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly
Example: W
hen the MV is set to Hourly+Daily and Combine,
Hourly+Daily is output.
When the MV is set to Hourly+Daily and Separate, the
hourly report is output as Hourly, and the daily report as
Daily.
App-12
M-4660
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
MMMM
Report items. Up to four types. 16 characters (including tabs
that are counted as one character each).
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Inst Instantaneous value
YYYY/MO/DD HH:MI:SSReport start year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
ccccc
Channel number (five characters)
ttt•••t
Tag name (16 characters)
uuuuuu
Unit (six characters)
eeeeeeeeeeStatus (the events that occurred while creating report data) (10
SSS•••S
characters)
Bo
Burnout detected
Er
Error detected
Ov
Overflow detected
Pw
Power failure
Cg
Change (time changed)
Report type (seven characters)
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss Report year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
nnn•••nAverage, maximum, minimum, sum, or instantaneous value
8
(13 characters)
File Output Example
Below is an example of an hourly report for four channels (with the report type set to
Hourly+Daily reports and the file type set to Separate).
Version 1.00.00
RD-MV2000
shift-JIS
Complete
S5E701600
10
Hourly+Daily
Hourly
Ave
Max
2008/01/23 08:10:56
CH001
CH002
TI-101
OUT-102
˚C
V
Hourly
2008/01/23 09:00:00
91.5
259.8
-59.9
3.293636E+05
9
-0.039
0.726
-0.727
-1.392980E+02
11
Min
Sum
CH003
FI-103
m3/h
CH004
VA-204
%
241.1
416.5
83.4
8.680871E+05
48.6
76.6
23.3
1.748983E+05
12
Appendix
YREC
Report Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Report Set
File Data
Math Set
Start Time
Ch
Tag
Unit
Data Type
Time
Status
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
13
App
Index
M-4660
App-13
Appendix 3 Text File Formats
Note
•
When channel data is in a condition shown in the table below, the MV outputs Er, Ov, or Bo
to the report.
Data Condition
Error
Measurement and external input channels
Positive range-out
Negative range-out
Burnout detection
Computation channels
Positive computation range-out (when the value exceeds
approx. 3.4E+38)
Negative computation range-out (when the value is less
than approx. –3.4E+38)
•
Ov
Ov
Bo
Ov
Ov
The report output value of Ave, Max, Min, Sum, and Inst varies depending on the channel
data condition as shown in the table below.
Item
Ave
Max,
Min,
Inst
Sum
Data Condition of Measurement or External Input
Channels
When all of the data are errors or range-outs
• When all of the data are errors
• Positive range-out values (includes burnout detection)
• Negative range-out values (includes burnout detection)
•When all of the data are errors or range-outs
• When the sum value exceeds approx. 3.4E+38
• When the sum value is less than approx. –3.4E + 38
Report Output
Value
(Space)
(Space)
99999
–99999
(Space)
9.999999E+99
–9.999999E+99
Item
Data Condition of Computation Channels
Ave
Max,
Min,
When all of the data are errors or computation range-out
• When all of the data are errors
• When the maximum value or instantaneous value exceeds
*
99999999
• When the minimum value or instantaneous value is less
*
than –9999999
• When all of the data are errors or computation range-outs
• When the sum value exceeds approx. 3.4E+38
• When the sum value is less than approx. –3.4E + 38
Report Output
Value
(Space)
(Space)
999999999
Inst
Sum
*
App-14
Status
Er
–999999999
(Space)
9.999999E+99
–9.999999E+99
The decimal place for maximum, minimum, and instantaneous values is set to the
decimal place that was specified for the span setting of the expression. For example, if
the span setting of the expression is 200.0, the MV outputs 999999999 when the value
exceeds 9999999.9 and –999999999 when the value is less than –999999.9.
M-4660
Index
1
Index
Symbols
**............................................................................................ 10-7
[a?b:c]...................................................................................10-11
4-panel display............................................................ 1-24, 5-31
A
abnormal data....................................................................... 1-47
ABS....................................................................................... 10-7
absolute time mode............................................................... 1-36
ACK............................................................................... 1-8, 3-14
action..................................................................................... 1-37
added message............................................................. 1-16, 6-9
address.................................................................................... 9-5
administrator.................................................................. 1-41, 8-6
alarm....................................................................................... 1-6
alarm configuration.................................................................3-11
alarm delay time.......................................................... 3-13, 10-4
alarm detection...................................................................... 3-13
alarm hide function.................................................................. 1-7
alarm indication....................................................................... 1-7
alarm mark............................................................................. 6-19
alarm output relay............................................................ 1-7, 3-8
alarm output release...................................................... 1-8, 3-14
alarm summary............................................................ 1-19, 5-22
alarm value............................................................................ 3-12
alarm value mark....................................................................1-11
all channel display................................................................... 5-7
all data display....................................................................... 5-12
ALL SAVE progress indicator................................................ 5-25
AND....................................................................................... 10-8
AND/OR........................................................................... 1-7, 1-8
auto increment......................................................................... 4-8
auto logout............................................................. 1-41, 8-6, 8-8
auto message........................................................................ 1-12
auto save............................................................. 1-31, 4-5, 4-10
auto switching.......................................................................... 5-8
auto zone................................................................................. 5-7
B
background color............................................... 1-25, 5-14, 6-28
backlight saver.............................................................1-25, 9-11
bar graph base position......................................................... 6-25
bar graph direction................................................................ 6-25
bar graph display........................................................... 1-15, 5-5
basic arithmetic..................................................................... 10-7
batch comment.............................................................. 1-35, 4-9
batch function.......................................................................... 4-8
batch name.............................................................................. 4-9
batch number........................................................................ 1-35
binary....................................................................................... 4-5
brightness...............................................................................9-11
Burnout.................................................................................. 1-14
burnout.................................................................................... 3-2
burnout detection..................................................................... 1-4
C
M-4660
2
3
4
5
6
D
data, saving........................................................................... 5-24
data length............................................................................... 4-3
data recording and storage flowchart.................................... 1-27
data types...................................................................... 1-26, 4-2
date format.................................................................... 1-50, 9-3
de-energize..................................................................... 1-7, 1-8
dedicated computation channels........................................... 1-42
delay high limit alarm............................................................... 1-6
delay low limit alarm................................................................ 1-6
device status output...................................................... 1-49, 9-8
DHCP log............................................................................... 5-30
difference computation............................................................ 1-5
difference high limit alarm........................................................ 1-6
difference low limit alarm......................................................... 1-6
digit........................................................................................ 6-17
digital display................................................................. 1-14, 5-5
directory, data save to........................................................... 1-31
display, registration................................................................ 6-31
display, splitting..................................................................... 5-12
display channel.......................................................................6-11
display configuration name.................................................... 5-32
display data................................................................. 1-26, 1-28
display data recording conditions.......................................... 1-28
displayed items, switching..................................................... 5-23
display group........................................................................... 6-1
display layout........................................................................... 1-9
display selection menu.................................................. 5-1, 6-36
display zone.......................................................................... 6-12
domain name........................................................................... 9-5
7
8
9
10
11
12
E
e-mail log............................................................................... 5-29
EQ......................................................................................... 10-7
error codes............................................................................ 12-1
error log................................................................................. 5-28
error messages..................................................................... 12-1
errors related to parameter settings...................................... 12-1
event...................................................................................... 1-36
event action................................................................... 1-36, 7-1
event data.................................................................... 1-26, 1-28
event data recording conditions............................................ 1-29
Index-1
13
App
Index
calculation expression........................................................... 10-6
calibration............................................................................ 12-21
calibration correction..................................................... 1-5, 3-15
CARRY.................................................................................10-11
CF card record length.......................................................... App-3
change message..................................................................... 6-5
clock, gradual correction....................................................... 1-50
CLOG computation.............................................................. 10-10
color scale band...........................................................1-11, 6-19
communication errors.......................................................... 12-12
communication log................................................................ 5-28
computation, order of precedence......................................... 10-6
computation, starting........................................................... 10-15
computation, usable data...................................................... 1-44
computation channels........................................................... 10-1
computation data dropout.......................................... 1-44, 10-16
computation error.................................................................. 10-5
computation function............................................................. 1-42
computation type................................................................... 1-42
conditional expression..........................................................10-11
continuous data......................................................................5-11
current value indicator........................................................... 6-17
cursor.....................................................................................5-11
Index
Index
EXP....................................................................................... 10-7
expansion.............................................................................. 5-32
external input channels................................................1-51, 11-1
external storage media, saving............................................. 1-31
interval for rate-of-change alarm..................................... 1-6, 3-8
invalid keys............................................................................ 9-10
F
Jump default display.............................................................. 6-30
FAIL output.................................................................... 1-48, 9-8
favorite display key................................................................ 1-25
FIFO.............................................................................. 1-31, 4-5
file, deletion........................................................................... 4-16
file, loading............................................................................ 4-18
file format..................................................................... 4-5, App-7
file header................................................................................ 4-5
file list.................................................................................... 4-16
file name................................................................................ 1-33
file name, user-specified......................................................... 4-6
file name structure................................................................... 4-6
file save interval....................................................................... 4-2
file size................................................................................ App-1
file size calculation.............................................................. App-1
fine grid.................................................................................... 5-7
fixed alarm mark.................................................................... 6-19
flag....................................................................... 1-37, 1-44, 7-2
flash memory......................................................................... 4-21
format type............................................................................ 4-17
free........................................................................................ 1-29
free message................................................................. 1-12, 6-9
free space.............................................................................. 4-16
function menu................................................................ 5-3, 6-35
K
G
GE......................................................................................... 10-7
grid...............................................................................1-11, 6-23
grid position, time.................................................................... 9-3
grid position month, day, hour................................................. 6-5
group....................................................................................... 6-1
group, auto switching............................................................ 6-29
group display........................................................................... 1-9
GT.......................................................................................... 10-7
H
high limit on rate-of-change..................................................... 1-6
historical display submenu.................................................... 5-10
historical trend....................................................................... 1-16
HOLD...................................................................................10-11
hold (alarm indication)............................................................. 1-7
hold (alarm output relay)......................................................... 1-8
hold/nonhold............................................................................ 1-7
horizontal split display............................................................1-11
host name................................................................................ 9-5
hysteresis........................................................................ 1-6, 3-9
I
ID............................................................................................. 9-5
indication hold......................................................................... 3-8
information display submenu................................................. 5-16
initialization.............................................................................. 9-7
input processing...................................................................... 1-4
input range.............................................................................. 3-3
input type................................................................................. 1-3
integration time................................................................ 1-3, 3-1
interface................................................................................. 1-51
internal memory..................................................................... 1-27
internal memory recording length........................................ App-3
internal memory size............................................................. 1-28
internal switch........................................................................ 1-36
Index-2
J
keyboard.................................................................................. 9-9
key lock......................................................................... 1-40, 8-2
key lock release....................................................................... 8-3
keys..................................................................... 1-36, 6-31, 7-1
L
language........................................................................ 1-51, 9-6
LCD......................................................................................... 1-9
LCD brightness...................................................................... 1-25
LE.......................................................................................... 10-7
limitations.............................................................................. 10-6
linear scaling........................................................................... 1-5
LN.......................................................................................... 10-7
LOG....................................................................................... 10-7
log.......................................................................................... 5-27
log display............................................................................. 1-23
logging in................................................................................. 8-8
logging out............................................................................... 8-8
logical computation................................................................ 10-8
login function................................................................. 1-41, 8-4
login log................................................................................. 5-27
lot number............................................................................. 1-35
lot number digits...................................................................... 4-8
low-cut............................................................................. 1-5, 3-5
low limit on rate-of-change...................................................... 1-6
LT........................................................................................... 10-7
M
maintenance........................................................................ 12-20
manually sampled data............................................... 1-26, 1-30
manually sampled data format.......................................... App-10
manuals........................................................................................i
manual sampling................................................................... 4-14
manual save.................................................................1-32, 4-11
match time timer.......................................................... 1-36, 1-37
measured values, update interval........................................... 1-9
measurement channel............................................................. 1-3
measurement mode................................................................ 3-1
Measure soft key................................................................... 3-16
memory information............................................................... 5-14
memory sampling.................................................................... 4-2
memory start.......................................................................... 4-10
memory stop...........................................................................4-11
memory summary........................................................ 1-21, 5-24
menu customization...................................................... 1-25, 5-4
message........................................................................ 1-12, 6-7
message colors..................................................................... 6-10
message display direction..................................................... 6-22
messages (errors, status, etc)............................................... 12-1
message summary...................................................... 1-20, 5-23
Modbus client status display................................................. 1-23
Modbus master status display............................................... 1-23
Modbus status display........................................................... 5-18
Modbus status log................................................................. 5-30
mode (event data)................................................................... 4-3
mode (range)........................................................................... 3-3
monitor pause.......................................................................... 5-4
moving average............................................................... 1-4, 3-6
M-4660
Index
N
S
NE......................................................................................... 10-7
network information screen..................................................... 9-5
no logging.............................................................................. 3-10
nonhold.................................................................................... 3-8
nonhold (alarm indication)....................................................... 1-7
nonhold (alarm output relay)................................................... 1-8
NOT....................................................................................... 10-8
numeric display..................................................................... 1-14
numeric display section..........................................................1-11
sample rate.............................................................................. 4-3
sampling count........................................................................ 3-6
scale...................................................................................... 6-13
scale, number of divisions..................................................... 6-14
scale lower.............................................................................. 3-4
scale position......................................................................... 6-14
scale upper.............................................................................. 3-4
scan interval.................................................................... 1-3, 3-1
screen image data................................................................. 1-26
second trend update interval................................................... 6-5
security.................................................................................... 8-6
separator............................................................................... 6-36
server...................................................................................... 9-5
setup data.................................................................... 1-26, 1-34
setup data, loading................................................................ 4-20
setup data, saving................................................................. 4-19
single/dual graph................................................................... 5-20
single trigger.......................................................................... 1-29
snapshot................................................................................ 4-15
snapshot data.............................................................. 1-26, 1-34
SNTP log............................................................................... 5-29
soft key.................................................................................... 5-3
sort key........................................................................ 5-22, 5-23
span lower............................................................................... 3-4
span upper.............................................................................. 3-4
special computation..............................................................10-11
special data handling............................................................. 1-47
SQR....................................................................................... 10-7
square root computation.......................................................... 1-5
stacked bar graph.................................................................. 5-19
standard display.................................................................... 6-30
standard temperature device............................................... 12-21
START key operation.......................................................... 10-15
status display section............................................................ 1-10
status messages................................................................. 12-14
status output............................................................................ 9-8
storage medium, formatting................................................... 4-17
submenu........................................................................ 5-1, 6-36
sum operation unit................................................................. 1-46
symbols...................................................................................... iii
symbols, inputtable................................................................ 9-10
system errors....................................................................... 12-16
system information.................................................................. 9-5
O
operation, order of................................................................. 1-44
operation errors..................................................................... 12-5
operation history log.............................................................. 5-27
operations available while logged out................................... 1-41
OR......................................................................................... 10-8
Over....................................................................................... 10-5
over-range detection............................................................. 3-20
overflow................................................................................. 10-5
overflow data......................................................................... 1-47
overview display.......................................................... 1-18, 5-15
overview display submenu.................................................... 5-15
P
partial expansion......................................................... 1-13, 6-21
parts replacement................................................................ 12-20
password......................................................................... 8-2, 8-7
password, changing................................................................ 8-9
paste........................................................................................ 6-2
power..................................................................................... 10-7
power failure data handling................................................... 1-47
power failure message.......................................................... 6-33
PRE......................................................................................10-11
pre-trigger...................................................................... 1-29, 4-3
pulse input..................................................................... 1-5, 3-17
pulse sum.............................................................................. 3-18
R
M-4660
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
tag name................................................................................. 6-3
text........................................................................................... 4-5
text field......................................................................... 1-35, 4-8
time, setting............................................................................. 9-1
time axis zoom, changing...................................................... 5-13
time correction operation....................................................... 1-50
time deviation limit................................................................... 9-2
timer....................................................................................... 1-36
timer action.............................................................................. 7-5
time zone....................................................................... 1-50, 9-2
TLOG..................................................................................... 10-4
TLOG computation...................................................... 1-45, 10-9
trademarks...................................................................................i
transmitter power supply....................................................... 1-51
Trend/Storage interval............................................................. 4-2
trend display...................................................................1-11, 5-5
trend display submenu............................................................ 5-5
trend line width...................................................................... 6-22
trend rate switching................................................................. 6-5
trend update rate, changing.................................................... 5-7
trend waveform display direction........................................... 6-22
Index-3
11
12
13
App
Index
range....................................................................................... 3-4
range-out............................................................................... 1-14
recommended replacement periods for worn parts............. 12-20
recording, stopping.................................................................4-11
reference channel.................................................................... 3-5
reference junction compensation.................................... 1-4, 3-2
reflash...................................................................... 1-7, 1-8, 3-7
relational computation........................................................... 10-7
relative time mode................................................................. 1-36
relay action on Ack.................................................................. 3-8
relay status display...................................................... 1-23, 5-18
remote control....................................................................... 1-36
remote control function............................................................ 7-1
repeat trigger......................................................................... 1-29
report channels, changing..................................................... 5-17
report data......................................................... 1-22, 1-26, 1-30
report display......................................................................... 5-17
report file, date when divided.............................................. 10-19
report file division.................................................................. 1-31
report file format................................................................ App-12
report function....................................................................... 1-46
report generation................................................................. 10-17
RESET..................................................................................10-11
reset (computation)............................................................. 10-16
reset (timer)..................................................................... 7-4, 7-6
reset+start........................................................................... 10-15
revisions.......................................................................................i
rolling average............................................................. 1-45, 10-5
1
Index
Index
trigger.................................................................................... 4-10
trigger source.......................................................................... 4-3
trip line..................................................................................... 6-2
troubleshooting.................................................................... 12-17
type (range)............................................................................. 3-4
U
unit........................................................................................... 3-5
unit handling.......................................................................... 1-44
unsaved data, saving collectively.......................................... 1-32
user............................................................................... 1-41, 8-7
V
version..................................................................................... 9-5
W
warning messages.............................................................. 12-16
waveform, clear when starting............................................... 6-22
waveform updating................................................................ 1-12
Web log................................................................................. 5-28
wide display............................................................................1-11
X
XOR....................................................................................... 10-8
Z
zone display.......................................................................... 1-13
Index-4
M-4660
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising